|
|
The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci, Complete
|
|
|
by Leonardo Da Vinci
|
|
|
(#3 in our series by Leonardo Da Vinci)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
|
|
|
copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
|
|
|
this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
|
|
|
Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the
|
|
|
header without written permission.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
|
|
|
eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is
|
|
|
important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
|
|
|
how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a
|
|
|
donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
|
|
|
|
|
|
**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
|
|
|
|
|
|
*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Title: The Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci, Complete
|
|
|
|
|
|
Author: Leonardo Da Vinci
|
|
|
|
|
|
Release Date: Jan, 2004 [EBook #5000]
|
|
|
[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
|
|
|
[Most recently updated June 26, 2002]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Edition: 10
|
|
|
|
|
|
Language: English
|
|
|
|
|
|
Character set encoding: ASCII
|
|
|
|
|
|
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE NOTEBOOKS OF LEONARDO DA
|
|
|
VINCI, COMPLETE ***
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This eBook was produced by Charles Aldarondo and the Distributed
|
|
|
Proofreaders team.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci
|
|
|
|
|
|
Volume 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
Translated by Jean Paul Richter
|
|
|
|
|
|
1888
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PREFACE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A singular fatality has ruled the destiny of nearly all the most
|
|
|
famous of Leonardo da Vinci's works. Two of the three most important
|
|
|
were never completed, obstacles having arisen during his life-time,
|
|
|
which obliged him to leave them unfinished; namely the Sforza
|
|
|
Monument and the Wall-painting of the Battle of Anghiari, while the
|
|
|
third--the picture of the Last Supper at Milan--has suffered
|
|
|
irremediable injury from decay and the repeated restorations to
|
|
|
which it was recklessly subjected during the XVIIth and XVIIIth
|
|
|
centuries. Nevertheless, no other picture of the Renaissance has
|
|
|
become so wellknown and popular through copies of every description.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Vasari says, and rightly, in his Life of Leonardo, "that he laboured
|
|
|
much more by his word than in fact or by deed", and the biographer
|
|
|
evidently had in his mind the numerous works in Manuscript which
|
|
|
have been preserved to this day. To us, now, it seems almost
|
|
|
inexplicable that these valuable and interesting original texts
|
|
|
should have remained so long unpublished, and indeed forgotten. It
|
|
|
is certain that during the XVIth and XVIIth centuries their
|
|
|
exceptional value was highly appreciated. This is proved not merely
|
|
|
by the prices which they commanded, but also by the exceptional
|
|
|
interest which has been attached to the change of ownership of
|
|
|
merely a few pages of Manuscript.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That, notwithstanding this eagerness to possess the Manuscripts,
|
|
|
their contents remained a mystery, can only be accounted for by the
|
|
|
many and great difficulties attending the task of deciphering them.
|
|
|
The handwriting is so peculiar that it requires considerable
|
|
|
practice to read even a few detached phrases, much more to solve
|
|
|
with any certainty the numerous difficulties of alternative
|
|
|
readings, and to master the sense as a connected whole. Vasari
|
|
|
observes with reference to Leonardos writing: "he wrote backwards,
|
|
|
in rude characters, and with the left hand, so that any one who is
|
|
|
not practised in reading them, cannot understand them". The aid of a
|
|
|
mirror in reading reversed handwriting appears to me available only
|
|
|
for a first experimental reading. Speaking from my own experience,
|
|
|
the persistent use of it is too fatiguing and inconvenient to be
|
|
|
practically advisable, considering the enormous mass of Manuscripts
|
|
|
to be deciphered. And as, after all, Leonardo's handwriting runs
|
|
|
backwards just as all Oriental character runs backwards--that is
|
|
|
to say from right to left--the difficulty of reading direct from the
|
|
|
writing is not insuperable. This obvious peculiarity in the writing
|
|
|
is not, however, by any means the only obstacle in the way of
|
|
|
mastering the text. Leonardo made use of an orthography peculiar to
|
|
|
himself; he had a fashion of amalgamating several short words into
|
|
|
one long one, or, again, he would quite arbitrarily divide a long
|
|
|
word into two separate halves; added to this there is no punctuation
|
|
|
whatever to regulate the division and construction of the sentences,
|
|
|
nor are there any accents--and the reader may imagine that such
|
|
|
difficulties were almost sufficient to make the task seem a
|
|
|
desperate one to a beginner. It is therefore not surprising that the
|
|
|
good intentions of some of Leonardo s most reverent admirers should
|
|
|
have failed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Leonardos literary labours in various departments both of Art and of
|
|
|
Science were those essentially of an enquirer, hence the analytical
|
|
|
method is that which he employs in arguing out his investigations
|
|
|
and dissertations. The vast structure of his scientific theories is
|
|
|
consequently built up of numerous separate researches, and it is
|
|
|
much to be lamented that he should never have collated and arranged
|
|
|
them. His love for detailed research--as it seems to me--was the
|
|
|
reason that in almost all the Manuscripts, the different paragraphs
|
|
|
appear to us to be in utter confusion; on one and the same page,
|
|
|
observations on the most dissimilar subjects follow each other
|
|
|
without any connection. A page, for instance, will begin with some
|
|
|
principles of astronomy, or the motion of the earth; then come the
|
|
|
laws of sound, and finally some precepts as to colour. Another page
|
|
|
will begin with his investigations on the structure of the
|
|
|
intestines, and end with philosophical remarks as to the relations
|
|
|
of poetry to painting; and so forth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Leonardo himself lamented this confusion, and for that reason I do
|
|
|
not think that the publication of the texts in the order in which
|
|
|
they occur in the originals would at all fulfil his intentions. No
|
|
|
reader could find his way through such a labyrinth; Leonardo himself
|
|
|
could not have done it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Added to this, more than half of the five thousand manuscript pages
|
|
|
which now remain to us, are written on loose leaves, and at present
|
|
|
arranged in a manner which has no justification beyond the fancy of
|
|
|
the collector who first brought them together to make volumes of
|
|
|
more or less extent. Nay, even in the volumes, the pages of which
|
|
|
were numbered by Leonardo himself, their order, so far as the
|
|
|
connection of the texts was concerned, was obviously a matter of
|
|
|
indifference to him. The only point he seems to have kept in view,
|
|
|
when first writing down his notes, was that each observation should
|
|
|
be complete to the end on the page on which it was begun. The
|
|
|
exceptions to this rule are extremely few, and it is certainly
|
|
|
noteworthy that we find in such cases, in bound volumes with his
|
|
|
numbered pages, the written observations: "turn over", "This is the
|
|
|
continuation of the previous page", and the like. Is not this
|
|
|
sufficient to prove that it was only in quite exceptional cases that
|
|
|
the writer intended the consecutive pages to remain connected, when
|
|
|
he should, at last, carry out the often planned arrangement of his
|
|
|
writings?
|
|
|
|
|
|
What this final arrangement was to be, Leonardo has in most cases
|
|
|
indicated with considerable completeness. In other cases this
|
|
|
authoritative clue is wanting, but the difficulties arising from
|
|
|
this are not insuperable; for, as the subject of the separate
|
|
|
paragraphs is always distinct and well defined in itself, it is
|
|
|
quite possible to construct a well-planned whole, out of the
|
|
|
scattered materials of his scientific system, and I may venture to
|
|
|
state that I have devoted especial care and thought to the due
|
|
|
execution of this responsible task.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The beginning of Leonardo's literary labours dates from about his
|
|
|
thirty-seventh year, and he seems to have carried them on without
|
|
|
any serious interruption till his death. Thus the Manuscripts that
|
|
|
remain represent a period of about thirty years. Within this space
|
|
|
of time his handwriting altered so little that it is impossible to
|
|
|
judge from it of the date of any particular text. The exact dates,
|
|
|
indeed, can only be assigned to certain note-books in which the year
|
|
|
is incidentally indicated, and in which the order of the leaves has
|
|
|
not been altered since Leonardo used them. The assistance these
|
|
|
afford for a chronological arrangement of the Manuscripts is
|
|
|
generally self evident. By this clue I have assigned to the original
|
|
|
Manuscripts now scattered through England, Italy and France, the
|
|
|
order of their production, as in many matters of detail it is highly
|
|
|
important to be able to verify the time and place at which certain
|
|
|
observations were made and registered. For this purpose the
|
|
|
Bibliography of the Manuscripts given at the end of Vol. II, may be
|
|
|
regarded as an Index, not far short of complete, of all Leonardo s
|
|
|
literary works now extant. The consecutive numbers (from 1 to 1566)
|
|
|
at the head of each passage in this work, indicate their logical
|
|
|
sequence with reference to the subjects; while the letters and
|
|
|
figures to the left of each paragraph refer to the original
|
|
|
Manuscript and number of the page, on which that particular passage
|
|
|
is to be found. Thus the reader, by referring to the List of
|
|
|
Manuscripts at the beginning of Volume I, and to the Bibliography at
|
|
|
the end of Volume II, can, in every instance, easily ascertain, not
|
|
|
merely the period to which the passage belongs, but also exactly
|
|
|
where it stood in the original document. Thus, too, by following the
|
|
|
sequence of the numbers in the Bibliographical index, the reader may
|
|
|
reconstruct the original order of the Manuscripts and recompose the
|
|
|
various texts to be found on the original sheets--so much of it,
|
|
|
that is to say, as by its subject-matter came within the scope of
|
|
|
this work. It may, however, be here observed that Leonardo s
|
|
|
Manuscripts contain, besides the passages here printed, a great
|
|
|
number of notes and dissertations on Mechanics, Physics, and some
|
|
|
other subjects, many of which could only be satisfactorily dealt
|
|
|
with by specialists. I have given as complete a review of these
|
|
|
writings as seemed necessary in the Bibliographical notes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In 1651, Raphael Trichet Dufresne, of Paris, published a selection
|
|
|
from Leonardo's writings on painting, and this treatise became so
|
|
|
popular that it has since been reprinted about two-and-twenty times,
|
|
|
and in six different languages. But none of these editions were
|
|
|
derived from the original texts, which were supposed to have been
|
|
|
lost, but from early copies, in which Leonardo's text had been more
|
|
|
or less mutilated, and which were all fragmentary. The oldest and on
|
|
|
the whole the best copy of Leonardo's essays and precepts on
|
|
|
Painting is in the Vatican Library; this has been twice printed,
|
|
|
first by Manzi, in 1817, and secondly by Ludwig, in 1882. Still,
|
|
|
this ancient copy, and the published editions of it, contain much
|
|
|
for which it would be rash to hold Leonardo responsible, and some
|
|
|
portions--such as the very important rules for the proportions of
|
|
|
the human figure--are wholly wanting; on the other hand they contain
|
|
|
passages which, if they are genuine, cannot now be verified from any
|
|
|
original Manuscript extant. These copies, at any rate neither give
|
|
|
us the original order of the texts, as written by Leonardo, nor do
|
|
|
they afford any substitute, by connecting them on a rational scheme;
|
|
|
indeed, in their chaotic confusion they are anything rather than
|
|
|
satisfactory reading. The fault, no doubt, rests with the compiler
|
|
|
of the Vatican copy, which would seem to be the source whence all
|
|
|
the published and extensively known texts were derived; for, instead
|
|
|
of arranging the passages himself, he was satisfied with recording a
|
|
|
suggestion for a final arrangement of them into eight distinct
|
|
|
parts, without attempting to carry out his scheme. Under the
|
|
|
mistaken idea that this plan of distribution might be that, not of
|
|
|
the compiler, but of Leonardo himself, the various editors, down to
|
|
|
the present day, have very injudiciously continued to adopt this
|
|
|
order--or rather disorder.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I, like other enquirers, had given up the original Manuscript of the
|
|
|
Trattato della Pittura for lost, till, in the beginning of 1880, I
|
|
|
was enabled, by the liberality of Lord Ashburnham, to inspect his
|
|
|
Manuscripts, and was so happy as to discover among them the original
|
|
|
text of the best-known portion of the Trattato in his magnificent
|
|
|
library at Ashburnham Place. Though this discovery was of a fragment
|
|
|
only--but a considerable fragment--inciting me to further search,
|
|
|
it gave the key to the mystery which had so long enveloped the first
|
|
|
origin of all the known copies of the Trattato. The extensive
|
|
|
researches I was subsequently enabled to prosecute, and the results
|
|
|
of which are combined in this work, were only rendered possible by
|
|
|
the unrestricted permission granted me to investigate all the
|
|
|
Manuscripts by Leonardo dispersed throughout Europe, and to
|
|
|
reproduce the highly important original sketches they contain, by
|
|
|
the process of "photogravure". Her Majesty the Queen graciously
|
|
|
accorded me special permission to copy for publication the
|
|
|
Manuscripts at the Royal Library at Windsor. The Commission Centrale
|
|
|
Administrative de l'Institut de France, Paris, gave me, in the most
|
|
|
liberal manner, in answer to an application from Sir Frederic
|
|
|
Leighton, P. R. A., Corresponding member of the Institut, free
|
|
|
permission to work for several months in their private collection at
|
|
|
deciphering the Manuscripts preserved there. The same favour which
|
|
|
Lord Ashburnham had already granted me was extended to me by the
|
|
|
Earl of Leicester, the Marchese Trivulsi, and the Curators of the
|
|
|
Ambrosian Library at Milan, by the Conte Manzoni at Rome and by
|
|
|
other private owners of Manuscripts of Leonardo's; as also by the
|
|
|
Directors of the Louvre at Paris; the Accademia at Venice; the
|
|
|
Uffizi at Florence; the Royal Library at Turin; and the British
|
|
|
Museum, and the South Kensington Museum. I am also greatly indebted
|
|
|
to the Librarians of these various collections for much assistance
|
|
|
in my labours; and more particularly to Monsieur Louis Lalanne, of
|
|
|
the Institut de France, the Abbate Ceriani, of the Ambrosian
|
|
|
Library, Mr. Maude Thompson, Keeper of Manuscripts at the British
|
|
|
Museum, Mr. Holmes, the Queens Librarian at Windsor, the Revd Vere
|
|
|
Bayne, Librarian of Christ Church College at Oxford, and the Revd A.
|
|
|
Napier, Librarian to the Earl of Leicester at Holkham Hall.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In correcting the Italian text for the press, I have had the
|
|
|
advantage of valuable advice from the Commendatore Giov. Morelli,
|
|
|
Senatore del Regno, and from Signor Gustavo Frizzoni, of Milan. The
|
|
|
translation, under many difficulties, of the Italian text into
|
|
|
English, is mainly due to Mrs. R. C. Bell; while the rendering of
|
|
|
several of the most puzzling and important passages, particularly in
|
|
|
the second half of Vol. I, I owe to the indefatigable interest taken
|
|
|
in this work by Mr. E. J. Poynter R. A. Finally I must express my
|
|
|
thanks to Mr. Alfred Marks, of Long Ditton, who has most kindly
|
|
|
assisted me throughout in the revision of the proof sheets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The notes and dissertations on the texts on Architecture in Vol. II
|
|
|
I owe to my friend Baron Henri de Geymuller, of Paris.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I may further mention with regard to the illustrations, that the
|
|
|
negatives for the production of the "photo-gravures" by Monsieur
|
|
|
Dujardin of Paris were all taken direct from the originals.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is scarcely necessary to add that most of the drawings here
|
|
|
reproduced in facsimile have never been published before. As I am
|
|
|
now, on the termination of a work of several years' duration, in a
|
|
|
position to review the general tenour of Leonardos writings, I may
|
|
|
perhaps be permitted to add a word as to my own estimate of the
|
|
|
value of their contents. I have already shown that it is due to
|
|
|
nothing but a fortuitous succession of unfortunate circumstances,
|
|
|
that we should not, long since, have known Leonardo, not merely as a
|
|
|
Painter, but as an Author, a Philosopher, and a Naturalist. There
|
|
|
can be no doubt that in more than one department his principles and
|
|
|
discoveries were infinitely more in accord with the teachings of
|
|
|
modern science, than with the views of his contemporaries. For this
|
|
|
reason his extraordinary gifts and merits are far more likely to be
|
|
|
appreciated in our own time than they could have been during the
|
|
|
preceding centuries. He has been unjustly accused of having
|
|
|
squandered his powers, by beginning a variety of studies and then,
|
|
|
having hardly begun, throwing them aside. The truth is that the
|
|
|
labours of three centuries have hardly sufficed for the elucidation
|
|
|
of some of the problems which occupied his mighty mind.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Alexander von Humboldt has borne witness that "he was the first to
|
|
|
start on the road towards the point where all the impressions of our
|
|
|
senses converge in the idea of the Unity of Nature" Nay, yet more
|
|
|
may be said. The very words which are inscribed on the monument of
|
|
|
Alexander von Humboldt himself, at Berlin, are perhaps the most
|
|
|
appropriate in which we can sum up our estimate of Leonardo's
|
|
|
genius:
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Majestati naturae par ingenium."
|
|
|
|
|
|
LONDON, April 1883.
|
|
|
|
|
|
F. P. R.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONTENTS OF VOLUME I.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PROLEGOMENA AND GENERAL INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK ON PAINTING
|
|
|
|
|
|
Clavis Sigillorum and Index of Manuscripts.--The author's intention
|
|
|
to publish his MSS. (1).--The preparation of the MSS. for
|
|
|
publication (2).--Admonition to readers (3).--The disorder in the
|
|
|
MSS. (4).--Suggestions for the arrangement of MSS. treating of
|
|
|
particular subjects (5--8).--General introductions to the book on
|
|
|
painting (9--13).--The plan of the book on painting (14--17).--The
|
|
|
use of the book on painting (18).--Necessity of theoretical
|
|
|
knowledge (19, 20).--The function of the eye (21--23).--Variability
|
|
|
of the eye (24).--Focus of sight (25).--Differences of perception by
|
|
|
one eye and by both eyes (26--29).--The comparative size of the
|
|
|
image depends on the amount of light (30--39).
|
|
|
|
|
|
II.
|
|
|
|
|
|
LINEAR PERSPECTIVE
|
|
|
|
|
|
General remarks on perspective (40--41).--The elements of
|
|
|
perspective:--of the point (42--46).--Of the line (47--48).--The
|
|
|
nature of the outline (49).--Definition of perspective (50).--The
|
|
|
perception of the object depends on the direction of the eye
|
|
|
(51).--Experimental proof of the existence of the pyramid of sight
|
|
|
(52--55).--The relations of the distance point to the vanishing
|
|
|
point (55--56).--How to measure the pyramid of vision (57).--The
|
|
|
production of the pyramid of vision (58--64).--Proof by experiment
|
|
|
(65--66).--General conclusions (67).--That the contrary is
|
|
|
impossible (68).--A parallel case (69).--The function of the eye, as
|
|
|
explained by the camera obscura (70--71).--The practice of
|
|
|
perspective (72--73).--Refraction of the rays falling upon the eye
|
|
|
(74--75).--The inversion of the images (76).--The intersection of
|
|
|
the rays (77--82).--Demonstration of perspective by means of a
|
|
|
vertical glass plane (83--85.)--The angle of sight varies with the
|
|
|
distance (86--88).--Opposite pyramids in juxtaposition (89).--On
|
|
|
simple and complex perspective (90).--The proper distance of objects
|
|
|
from the eye (91--92).--The relative size of objects with regard to
|
|
|
their distance from the eye (93--98).--The apparent size of objects
|
|
|
denned by calculation (99--106).--On natural perspective (107--109).
|
|
|
|
|
|
III.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SIX BOOKS ON LIGHT AND SHADE
|
|
|
|
|
|
GENERAL INTRODUCTION.--Prolegomena (110).--Scheme of the books on
|
|
|
light and shade (111).--Different principles and plans of treatment
|
|
|
(112--116).--Different sorts of light (117--118).--Definition of
|
|
|
the nature of shadows (119--122).--Of the various kinds of shadows
|
|
|
(123--125).--Of the various kinds of light (126--127).--General
|
|
|
remarks (128--129).--FIRST BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--On the nature
|
|
|
of light (130--131).--The difference between light and lustre
|
|
|
(132--135).--The relations of luminous to illuminated bodies (136).
|
|
|
--Experiments on the relation of light and shadow within a room
|
|
|
(137--140).--Light and shadow with regard to the position of the
|
|
|
eye (141--145).--The law of the incidence of light
|
|
|
(146--147).--SECOND BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--Gradations of strength
|
|
|
in the shadows (148--149).--On the intensity of shadows as dependent
|
|
|
on the distance from the light (150--152).--On the proportion of
|
|
|
light and shadow (153--157).--THIRD BOOK ON LIGHT AND
|
|
|
SHADE.--Definition of derived shadow (158--159).--Different sorts of
|
|
|
derived shadows (160--162).--On the relation of derived and primary
|
|
|
shadow (163--165).--On the shape of derived shadows (166--174).--On
|
|
|
the relative intensity of derived shadows (175--179).--Shadow as
|
|
|
produced by two lights of different size (180--181).--The effect of
|
|
|
light at different distances (182).--Further complications in the
|
|
|
derived shadows (183--187).--FOURTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--On the
|
|
|
shape of cast shadows (188--191).--On the outlines of cast shadows
|
|
|
(192--195).--On the relative size of cast shadows (196.
|
|
|
197).--Effects on cast shadows by the tone of the back ground
|
|
|
(198).--A disputed proposition (199).--On the relative depth of
|
|
|
cast shadows (200--202).--FIFTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND
|
|
|
SHADE.--Principles of reflection (203. 204).--On reverberation
|
|
|
(205).--Reflection on water (206. 207).--Experiments with the mirror
|
|
|
(208--210).--Appendix:--On shadows in movement (211--212).--SIXTH
|
|
|
BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.--The effect of rays passing through holes
|
|
|
(213. 214).--On gradation of shadows (215. 216).--On relative
|
|
|
proportion of light and shadows (216--221).
|
|
|
|
|
|
IV.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE OF DISAPPEARANCE
|
|
|
|
|
|
Definition (222. 223).--An illustration by experiment (224).--A
|
|
|
guiding rule (225).---An experiment (226).--On indistinctness at
|
|
|
short distances (227--231).--On indistinctness at great distances
|
|
|
(232--234).--The importance of light and shade in the Prospettiva
|
|
|
de' perdimenti (235--239).--The effect of light or dark backgrounds
|
|
|
on the apparent size of objects (240--250).--Propositions on
|
|
|
Prospettiva de' perdimenti from MS. C. (250--262).
|
|
|
|
|
|
V.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THEORY OF COLOURS
|
|
|
|
|
|
The reciprocal effects of colours on objects placed opposite each
|
|
|
other (263--271).--Combination of different colours in cast shadows
|
|
|
(272).--The effect of colours in the camera obscura (273. 274).--On
|
|
|
the colours of derived shadows (275. 276).--On the nature of colours
|
|
|
(277. 278).--On gradations in the depth of colours (279. 280).--On
|
|
|
the reflection of colours (281--283).--On the use of dark and light
|
|
|
colours in painting (284--286).--On the colours of the rainbow
|
|
|
(287--288).
|
|
|
|
|
|
VI.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE OF COLOUR AND AERIAL PERSPECTIVE
|
|
|
|
|
|
General rules (289--291).--An exceptional case (292).--An experiment
|
|
|
(293).--The practice of the Prospettiva de' colori (294).--The rules
|
|
|
of aerial perspective (295--297).--On the relative density of the
|
|
|
atmosphere (298--299).--On the colour of the atmosphere (300--307).
|
|
|
|
|
|
VII.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON THE PROPORTIONS AND ON THE MOVEMENTS OF THE HUMAN FIGURE
|
|
|
|
|
|
Preliminary observations (308. 309).--Proportions of the head and
|
|
|
face (310--318).--Proportions of the head seen in front
|
|
|
(319--321).--Proportions of the foot (322--323).--Relative
|
|
|
proportions of the hand and foot (324).--Relative proportions of
|
|
|
the foot and of the face (325--327).--Proportions of the leg
|
|
|
(328--331).--On the central point of the whole body (332).--The
|
|
|
relative proportions of the torso and of the whole figure
|
|
|
(333).--The relative proportions of the head and of the torso
|
|
|
(334).--The relative proportions of the torso and of the leg (335.
|
|
|
336).--The relative proportions of the torso and of the foot
|
|
|
(337).--The proportions of the whole figure (338--341).--The torso
|
|
|
from the front and back (342).--Vitruvius' scheme of proportions
|
|
|
(343).--The arm and head (344).--Proportions of the arm
|
|
|
(345--349).--The movement of the arm (350--354).--The movement of
|
|
|
the torso (355--361).--The proportions vary at different ages
|
|
|
(362--367).--The movement of the human figure (368--375).--Of
|
|
|
walking up and down (375--379).--On the human body in action
|
|
|
(380--388).--On hair falling down in curls (389).--On draperies
|
|
|
|
|
|
(390--392).
|
|
|
|
|
|
VIII.
|
|
|
|
|
|
BOTANY FOR PAINTERS, AND ELEMENTS OF LANDSCAPE PAINTING
|
|
|
|
|
|
Classification of trees (393).--The relative thickness of the
|
|
|
branches to the trunk (394--396).--The law of proportion in the
|
|
|
growth of the branches (397--402).--The direction of growth
|
|
|
(403--407).--The forms of trees (408--411).--The insertion of the
|
|
|
leaves (412--419).--Light on branches and leaves (420--422).--The
|
|
|
proportions of light and shade in a leaf (423--426).--Of the
|
|
|
transparency of leaves (427--429).--The gradations of shade and
|
|
|
colour in leaves (430--434).--A classification of trees according to
|
|
|
their colours (435).--The proportions of light and shade in trees
|
|
|
(436--440).--The distribution of light and shade with reference to
|
|
|
the position of the spectator (441--443).--The effects of morning
|
|
|
light (444--448).--The effects of midday light (449).--The
|
|
|
appearance of trees in the distance (450--451).--The cast shadow of
|
|
|
trees (452. 453).--Light and shade on groups of trees
|
|
|
(454--457).--On the treatment of light for landscapes
|
|
|
(458--464).--On the treatment of light for views of towns
|
|
|
(465--469).--The effect of wind on trees (470--473).--Light and
|
|
|
shade on clouds (474--477).--On images reflected in water (478).--Of
|
|
|
rainbows and rain (479. 480).--Of flower seeds (481).
|
|
|
|
|
|
IX.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE PRACTICE OF PAINTING
|
|
|
|
|
|
I. MORAL PRECEPTS FOR THE STUDENT OF PAINTING.--How to ascertain the
|
|
|
dispositions for an artistic career (482).--The course of
|
|
|
instruction for an artist (483--485).--The study of the antique
|
|
|
(486. 487).--The necessity of anatomical knowledge (488. 489).--How
|
|
|
to acquire practice (490).--Industry and thoroughness the first
|
|
|
conditions (491--493.)--The artist's private life and choice of
|
|
|
company (493. 494).--The distribution of time for studying (495--
|
|
|
497).--On the productive power of minor artists (498--501).--A
|
|
|
caution against one-sided study (502).--How to acquire universality
|
|
|
(503--506).--Useful games and exercises (507. 508).--II. THE
|
|
|
ARTIST'S STUDIO.--INSTRUMENTS AND HELPS FOR THE APPLICATION OF
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.--ON JUDGING OF A PICTURE.--On the size of the studio
|
|
|
(509).--On the construction of windows (510--512).--On the best
|
|
|
light for painting (513--520).--On various helps in preparing a
|
|
|
picture (521--530).--On the management of works (531. 532).--On the
|
|
|
limitations of painting (533--535).--On the choice of a position
|
|
|
(536. 537).--The apparent size of figures in a picture (538.
|
|
|
539).--The right position of the artist, when painting and of the
|
|
|
spectator (540--547).--III. THE PRACTICAL METHODS OF LIGHT AND SHADE
|
|
|
AND AERIAL PERSPECTIVE.--Gradations of light and shade (548).--On
|
|
|
the choice of light for a picture (549--554).--The distribution of
|
|
|
light and shade (555--559).--The juxtaposition of light and shade
|
|
|
(560. 561).--On the lighting of the background (562--565).--On the
|
|
|
lighting of white objects (566).--The methods of aerial perspective
|
|
|
(567--570).--IV. OF PORTRAIT AND FIGURE PAINTING.--Of sketching
|
|
|
figures and portraits (571. 572).--The position of the head
|
|
|
(573).--Of the light on the face (574--576).--General suggestions
|
|
|
for historical pictures (577--581).--How to represent the
|
|
|
differences of age and sex (582. 583).--Of representing the emotions
|
|
|
(584).--Of representing imaginary animals (585).--The selection of
|
|
|
forms (586--591).--How to pose figures (592).--Of appropriate
|
|
|
gestures (593--600).--V. SUGGESTIONS FOR COMPOSITIONS.--Of painting
|
|
|
battle-pieces (601--603).--Of depicting night-scenes (604).--Of
|
|
|
depicting a tempest (605. 606).--Of representing the deluge
|
|
|
(607--609).--Of depicting natural phenomena (610. 611).--VI. THE
|
|
|
ARTIST'S MATERIALS.--Of chalk and paper (612--617).--On the
|
|
|
preparation and use of colours (618--627).--Of preparing the panel
|
|
|
(628).--The preparation of oils (629--634).--On varnishes (635--
|
|
|
637).--On chemical _materials (638--650).--VII. PHILOSOPHY AND
|
|
|
HISTORY OF THE ART OF PAINTING.--The relation of art and nature
|
|
|
(651. 652).--Painting is superior to poetry (653. 654).--Painting is
|
|
|
superior to sculpture (655. 656).--Aphorisms (657--659).--On the
|
|
|
history of painting (660. 661).--The painter's scope (662).
|
|
|
|
|
|
X.
|
|
|
|
|
|
STUDIES AND SKETCHES FOR PICTURES AND DECORATIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
On pictures of the Madonna (663).--Bernardo di Bandino's portrait
|
|
|
(664).--Notes on the Last Supper (665--668).--On the battle of
|
|
|
Anghiari (669).--Allegorical representations referring to the duke
|
|
|
of Milan (670--673).--Allegorical representations
|
|
|
(674--678).--Arrangement of a picture (679).--List of drawings
|
|
|
(680).--Mottoes and Emblems (681--702).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The author's intention to publish his MSS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.
|
|
|
|
|
|
How by a certain machine many may stay some time under water. And
|
|
|
how and wherefore I do not describe my method of remaining under
|
|
|
water and how long I can remain without eating. And I do not publish
|
|
|
nor divulge these, by reason of the evil nature of men, who would
|
|
|
use them for assassinations at the bottom of the sea by destroying
|
|
|
ships, and sinking them, together with the men in them. Nevertheless
|
|
|
I will impart others, which are not dangerous because the mouth of
|
|
|
the tube through which you breathe is above the water, supported on
|
|
|
air sacks or cork.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The leaf on which this passage is written, is headed with
|
|
|
the words _Casi_ 39, and most of these cases begin with the word
|
|
|
'_Come_', like the two here given, which are the 26th and 27th. 7.
|
|
|
_Sughero_. In the Codex Antlanticus 377a; 1170a there is a sketch,
|
|
|
drawn with the pen, representing a man with a tube in his mouth, and
|
|
|
at the farther end of the tube a disk. By the tube the word
|
|
|
'_Channa_' is written, and by the disk the word '_sughero_'.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The preparation of the MSS. for publication.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you put together the science of the motions of water, remember
|
|
|
to include under each proposition its application and use, in order
|
|
|
that this science may not be useless.--
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: A comparatively small portion of Leonardo's notes on
|
|
|
water-power was published at Bologna in 1828, under the title: "_Del
|
|
|
moto e misura dell'Acqua, di L. da Vinci_".]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Admonition to readers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let no man who is not a Mathematician read the elements of my work.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The disorder in the MSS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Begun at Florence, in the house of Piero di Braccio Martelli, on the
|
|
|
22nd day of March 1508. And this is to be a collection without
|
|
|
order, taken from many papers which I have copied here, hoping to
|
|
|
arrange them later each in its place, according to the subjects of
|
|
|
which they may treat. But I believe that before I am at the end of
|
|
|
this [task] I shall have to repeat the same things several times;
|
|
|
for which, O reader! do not blame me, for the subjects are many and
|
|
|
memory cannot retain them [all] and say: 'I will not write this
|
|
|
because I wrote it before.' And if I wished to avoid falling into
|
|
|
this fault, it would be necessary in every case when I wanted to
|
|
|
copy [a passage] that, not to repeat myself, I should read over all
|
|
|
that had gone before; and all the more since the intervals are long
|
|
|
between one time of writing and the next.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 1. In the history of Florence in the early part of the
|
|
|
XVIth century _Piero di Braccio Martelli_ is frequently mentioned as
|
|
|
_Commissario della Signoria_. He was famous for his learning and at
|
|
|
his death left four books on Mathematics ready for the press; comp.
|
|
|
LITTA, _Famiglie celebri Italiane_, _Famiglia Martelli di
|
|
|
Firenze_.--In the Official Catalogue of MSS. in the Brit. Mus., New
|
|
|
Series Vol. I., where this passage is printed, _Barto_ has been
|
|
|
wrongly given for Braccio.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. _addi 22 di marzo 1508_. The Christian era was computed in
|
|
|
Florence at that time from the Incarnation (Lady day, March 25th).
|
|
|
Hence this should be 1509 by our reckoning.
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. _racolto tratto di molte carte le quali io ho qui copiate_. We
|
|
|
must suppose that Leonardo means that he has copied out his own MSS.
|
|
|
and not those of others. The first thirteen leaves of the MS. in the
|
|
|
Brit. Mus. are a fair copy of some notes on physics.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Suggestions for the arrangement of MSS treating of particular
|
|
|
subjects.(5-8).
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of digging a canal. Put this in the Book of useful inventions and in
|
|
|
proving them bring forward the propositions already proved. And this
|
|
|
is the proper order; since if you wished to show the usefulness of
|
|
|
any plan you would be obliged again to devise new machines to prove
|
|
|
its utility and thus would confuse the order of the forty Books and
|
|
|
also the order of the diagrams; that is to say you would have to mix
|
|
|
up practice with theory, which would produce a confused and
|
|
|
incoherent work.
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I am not to blame for putting forward, in the course of my work on
|
|
|
science, any general rule derived from a previous conclusion.
|
|
|
|
|
|
7.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Book of the science of Mechanics must precede the Book of useful
|
|
|
inventions.--Have your books on anatomy bound! [Footnote: 4. The
|
|
|
numerous notes on anatomy written on loose leaves and now in the
|
|
|
Royal collection at Windsor can best be classified in four Books,
|
|
|
corresponding to the different character and size of the paper. When
|
|
|
Leonardo speaks of '_li tua libri di notomia_', he probably means
|
|
|
the MSS. which still exist; if this hypothesis is correct the
|
|
|
present condition of these leaves might seem to prove that he only
|
|
|
carried out his purpose with one of the Books on anatomy. A borrowed
|
|
|
book on Anatomy is mentioned in F.O.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The order of your book must proceed on this plan: first simple
|
|
|
beams, then (those) supported from below, then suspended in part,
|
|
|
then wholly [suspended]. Then beams as supporting other weights
|
|
|
[Footnote: 4. Leonardo's notes on Mechanics are extraordinarily
|
|
|
numerous; but, for the reasons assigned in my introduction, they
|
|
|
have not been included in the present work.].
|
|
|
|
|
|
General introductions to the book on Painting (9-13).
|
|
|
|
|
|
9.
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTRODUCTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Seeing that I can find no subject specially useful or
|
|
|
pleasing--since the men who have come before me have taken for their
|
|
|
own every useful or necessary theme--I must do like one who, being
|
|
|
poor, comes last to the fair, and can find no other way of providing
|
|
|
himself than by taking all the things already seen by other buyers,
|
|
|
and not taken but refused by reason of their lesser value. I, then,
|
|
|
will load my humble pack with this despised and rejected
|
|
|
merchandise, the refuse of so many buyers; and will go about to
|
|
|
distribute it, not indeed in great cities, but in the poorer towns,
|
|
|
taking such a price as the wares I offer may be worth. [Footnote: It
|
|
|
need hardly be pointed out that there is in this 'Proemio' a covert
|
|
|
irony. In the second and third prefaces, Leonardo characterises his
|
|
|
rivals and opponents more closely. His protest is directed against
|
|
|
Neo-latinism as professed by most of the humanists of his time; its
|
|
|
futility is now no longer questioned.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
10.
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTRODUCTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I know that many will call this useless work [Footnote: 3. questa
|
|
|
essere opera inutile. By opera we must here understand libro di
|
|
|
pittura and particularly the treatise on Perspective.]; and they
|
|
|
will be those of whom Demetrius [Footnote: 4. Demetrio. "With regard
|
|
|
to the passage attributed to Demetrius", Dr. H. MULLER STRUBING
|
|
|
writes, "I know not what to make of it. It is certainly not
|
|
|
Demetrius Phalereus that is meant and it can hardly be Demetrius
|
|
|
Poliorcetes. Who then can it be--for the name is a very common one?
|
|
|
It may be a clerical error for Demades and the maxim is quite in the
|
|
|
spirit of his writings I have not however been able to find any
|
|
|
corresponding passage either in the 'Fragments' (C. MULLER, _Orat.
|
|
|
Att._, II. 441) nor in the Supplements collected by DIETZ (_Rhein.
|
|
|
Mus._, vol. 29, p. 108)."
|
|
|
|
|
|
The same passage occurs as a simple Memorandum in the MS. Tr. 57,
|
|
|
apparently as a note for this '_Proemio_' thus affording some data
|
|
|
as to the time where these introductions were written.] declared
|
|
|
that he took no more account of the wind that came out their mouth
|
|
|
in words, than of that they expelled from their lower parts: men who
|
|
|
desire nothing but material riches and are absolutely devoid of that
|
|
|
of wisdom, which is the food and the only true riches of the mind.
|
|
|
For so much more worthy as the soul is than the body, so much more
|
|
|
noble are the possessions of the soul than those of the body. And
|
|
|
often, when I see one of these men take this work in his hand, I
|
|
|
wonder that he does not put it to his nose, like a monkey, or ask me
|
|
|
if it is something good to eat.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the original, the Proemio di prospettiva cioe
|
|
|
dell'uffitio dell'occhio (see No. 21) stands between this and the
|
|
|
preceding one, No. 9.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTRODUCTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I am fully concious that, not being a literary man, certain
|
|
|
presumptuous persons will think that they may reasonably blame me;
|
|
|
alleging that I am not a man of letters. Foolish folks! do they not
|
|
|
know that I might retort as Marius did to the Roman Patricians
|
|
|
[Footnote 21: _Come Mario disse ai patriti Romani_. "I am unable to
|
|
|
find the words here attributed by Leonardo to Marius, either in
|
|
|
Plutarch's Life of Marius or in the Apophthegmata (_Moralia_,
|
|
|
p.202). Nor do they occur in the writings of Valerius Maximus (who
|
|
|
frequently mentions Marius) nor in Velleius Paterculus (II, 11 to
|
|
|
43), Dio Cassius, Aulus Gellius, or Macrobius. Professor E.
|
|
|
MENDELSON of Dorpat, the editor of Herodian, assures me that no such
|
|
|
passage is the found in that author" (communication from Dr. MULLER
|
|
|
STRUBING). Leonardo evidently meant to allude to some well known
|
|
|
incident in Roman history and the mention of Marius is the result
|
|
|
probably of some confusion. We may perhaps read, for Marius,
|
|
|
Menenius Agrippa, though in that case it is true we must alter
|
|
|
Patriti to Plebei. The change is a serious one. but it would render
|
|
|
the passage perfectly clear.] by saying: That they, who deck
|
|
|
themselves out in the labours of others will not allow me my own.
|
|
|
They will say that I, having no literary skill, cannot properly
|
|
|
express that which I desire to treat of [Footnote 26: _le mie cose
|
|
|
.... che d'altra parola_. This can hardly be reconciled with Mons.
|
|
|
RAVAISSON'S estimate of L. da Vinci's learning. "_Leonard de Vinci
|
|
|
etait un admirateur et un disciple des anciens, aussi bien dans
|
|
|
l'art que dans la science et il tenait a passer pour tel meme aux
|
|
|
yeux de la posterite._" _Gaz. des Beaux arts. Oct. 1877.]; but they
|
|
|
do not know that my subjects are to be dealt with by experience
|
|
|
rather than by words [Footnote 28: See Footnote 26]; and
|
|
|
[experience] has been the mistress of those who wrote well. And so,
|
|
|
as mistress, I will cite her in all cases.
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Though I may not, like them, be able to quote other authors, I shall
|
|
|
rely on that which is much greater and more worthy:--on experience,
|
|
|
the mistress of their Masters. They go about puffed up and pompous,
|
|
|
dressed and decorated with [the fruits], not of their own labours,
|
|
|
but of those of others. And they will not allow me my own. They will
|
|
|
scorn me as an inventor; but how much more might they--who are not
|
|
|
inventors but vaunters and declaimers of the works of others--be
|
|
|
blamed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTRODUCTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And those men who are inventors and interpreters between Nature and
|
|
|
Man, as compared with boasters and declaimers of the works of
|
|
|
others, must be regarded and not otherwise esteemed than as the
|
|
|
object in front of a mirror, when compared with its image seen in
|
|
|
the mirror. For the first is something in itself, and the other
|
|
|
nothingness.--Folks little indebted to Nature, since it is only by
|
|
|
chance that they wear the human form and without it I might class
|
|
|
them with the herds of beasts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
12.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Many will think they may reasonably blame me by alleging that my
|
|
|
proofs are opposed to the authority of certain men held in the
|
|
|
highest reverence by their inexperienced judgments; not considering
|
|
|
that my works are the issue of pure and simple experience, who is
|
|
|
the one true mistress. These rules are sufficient to enable you to
|
|
|
know the true from the false--and this aids men to look only for
|
|
|
things that are possible and with due moderation--and not to wrap
|
|
|
yourself in ignorance, a thing which can have no good result, so
|
|
|
that in despair you would give yourself up to melancholy.
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Among all the studies of natural causes and reasons Light chiefly
|
|
|
delights the beholder; and among the great features of Mathematics
|
|
|
the certainty of its demonstrations is what preeminently (tends to)
|
|
|
elevate the mind of the investigator. Perspective, therefore, must
|
|
|
be preferred to all the discourses and systems of human learning. In
|
|
|
this branch [of science] the beam of light is explained on those
|
|
|
methods of demonstration which form the glory not so much of
|
|
|
Mathematics as of Physics and are graced with the flowers of both
|
|
|
[Footnote: 5. Such of Leonardo's notes on Optics or on Perspective
|
|
|
as bear exclusively on Mathematics or Physics could not be included
|
|
|
in the arrangement of the _libro di pittura_ which is here presented
|
|
|
to the reader. They are however but few.]. But its axioms being laid
|
|
|
down at great length, I shall abridge them to a conclusive brevity,
|
|
|
arranging them on the method both of their natural order and of
|
|
|
mathematical demonstration; sometimes by deduction of the effects
|
|
|
from the causes, and sometimes arguing the causes from the effects;
|
|
|
adding also to my own conclusions some which, though not included in
|
|
|
them, may nevertheless be inferred from them. Thus, if the Lord--who
|
|
|
is the light of all things--vouchsafe to enlighten me, I will treat
|
|
|
of Light; wherefore I will divide the present work into 3 Parts
|
|
|
[Footnote: 10. In the middle ages--for instance, by ROGER BACON, by
|
|
|
VITELLONE, with whose works Leonardo was certainly familiar, and by
|
|
|
all the writers of the Renaissance Perspective and Optics were not
|
|
|
regarded as distinct sciences. Perspective, indeed, is in its widest
|
|
|
application the science of seeing. Although to Leonardo the two
|
|
|
sciences were clearly separate, it is not so as to their names; thus
|
|
|
we find axioms in Optics under the heading Perspective. According to
|
|
|
this arrangement of the materials for the theoretical portion of the
|
|
|
_libro di pittura_ propositions in Perspective and in Optics stand
|
|
|
side by side or occur alternately. Although this particular chapter
|
|
|
deals only with Optics, it is not improbable that the words _partiro
|
|
|
la presente opera in 3 parti_ may refer to the same division into
|
|
|
three sections which is spoken of in chapters 14 to 17.].
|
|
|
|
|
|
The plan of the book on Painting (14--17).
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON THE THREE BRANCHES OF PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are three branches of perspective; the first deals with the
|
|
|
reasons of the (apparent) diminution of objects as they recede from
|
|
|
the eye, and is known as Diminishing Perspective.--The second
|
|
|
contains the way in which colours vary as they recede from the eye.
|
|
|
The third and last is concerned with the explanation of how the
|
|
|
objects [in a picture] ought to be less finished in proportion as
|
|
|
they are remote (and the names are as follows):
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linear Perspective. The Perspective of Colour. The Perspective of
|
|
|
Disappearance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 13. From the character of the handwriting I infer that
|
|
|
this passage was written before the year 1490.].
|
|
|
|
|
|
15.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON PAINTING AND PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The divisions of Perspective are 3, as used in drawing; of these,
|
|
|
the first includes the diminution in size of opaque objects; the
|
|
|
second treats of the diminution and loss of outline in such opaque
|
|
|
objects; the third, of the diminution and loss of colour at long
|
|
|
distances.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The division is here the same as in the previous chapter
|
|
|
No. 14, and this is worthy of note when we connect it with the fact
|
|
|
that a space of about 20 years must have intervened between the
|
|
|
writing of the two passages.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
16.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE DISCOURSE ON PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perspective, as bearing on drawing, is divided into three principal
|
|
|
sections; of which the first treats of the diminution in the size of
|
|
|
bodies at different distances. The second part is that which treats
|
|
|
of the diminution in colour in these objects. The third [deals with]
|
|
|
the diminished distinctness of the forms and outlines displayed by
|
|
|
the objects at various distances.
|
|
|
|
|
|
17.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON THE SECTIONS OF [THE BOOK ON] PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first thing in painting is that the objects it represents should
|
|
|
appear in relief, and that the grounds surrounding them at different
|
|
|
distances shall appear within the vertical plane of the foreground
|
|
|
of the picture by means of the 3 branches of Perspective, which are:
|
|
|
the diminution in the distinctness of the forms of the objects, the
|
|
|
diminution in their magnitude; and the diminution in their colour.
|
|
|
And of these 3 classes of Perspective the first results from [the
|
|
|
structure of] the eye, while the other two are caused by the
|
|
|
atmosphere which intervenes between the eye and the objects seen by
|
|
|
it. The second essential in painting is appropriate action and a due
|
|
|
variety in the figures, so that the men may not all look like
|
|
|
brothers, &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: This and the two foregoing chapters must have been
|
|
|
written in 1513 to 1516. They undoubtedly indicate the scheme which
|
|
|
Leonardo wished to carry out in arranging his researches on
|
|
|
Perspective as applied to Painting. This is important because it is
|
|
|
an evidence against the supposition of H. LUDWIG and others, that
|
|
|
Leonardo had collected his principles of Perspective in one book so
|
|
|
early as before 1500; a Book which, according to the hypothesis,
|
|
|
must have been lost at a very early period, or destroyed possibly,
|
|
|
by the French (!) in 1500 (see H. LUDWIG. L. da Vinci: _Das Buch van
|
|
|
der Malerei_. Vienna 1882 III, 7 and 8).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The use of the book on Painting.
|
|
|
|
|
|
18.
|
|
|
|
|
|
These rules are of use only in correcting the figures; since every
|
|
|
man makes some mistakes in his first compositions and he who knows
|
|
|
them not, cannot amend them. But you, knowing your errors, will
|
|
|
correct your works and where you find mistakes amend them, and
|
|
|
remember never to fall into them again. But if you try to apply
|
|
|
these rules in composition you will never make an end, and will
|
|
|
produce confusion in your works.
|
|
|
|
|
|
These rules will enable you to have a free and sound judgment; since
|
|
|
good judgment is born of clear understanding, and a clear
|
|
|
understanding comes of reasons derived from sound rules, and sound
|
|
|
rules are the issue of sound experience--the common mother of all
|
|
|
the sciences and arts. Hence, bearing in mind the precepts of my
|
|
|
rules, you will be able, merely by your amended judgment, to
|
|
|
criticise and recognise every thing that is out of proportion in a
|
|
|
work, whether in the perspective or in the figures or any thing
|
|
|
else.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Necessity of theoretical knowledge (19. 20).
|
|
|
|
|
|
19.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE MISTAKES MADE BY THOSE WHO PRACTISE WITHOUT KNOWLEDGE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Those who are in love with practice without knowledge are like the
|
|
|
sailor who gets into a ship without rudder or compass and who never
|
|
|
can be certain whether he is going. Practice must always be founded
|
|
|
on sound theory, and to this Perspective is the guide and the
|
|
|
gateway; and without this nothing can be done well in the matter of
|
|
|
drawing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
20.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The painter who draws merely by practice and by eye, without any
|
|
|
reason, is like a mirror which copies every thing placed in front of
|
|
|
it without being conscious of their existence.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function of the eye (21-23).
|
|
|
|
|
|
21.
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTRODUCTION TO PERSPECTIVE:--THAT IS OF THE FUNCTION OF THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Behold here O reader! a thing concerning which we cannot trust our
|
|
|
forefathers, the ancients, who tried to define what the Soul and
|
|
|
Life are--which are beyond proof, whereas those things, which can at
|
|
|
any time be clearly known and proved by experience, remained for
|
|
|
many ages unknown or falsely understood. The eye, whose function we
|
|
|
so certainly know by experience, has, down to my own time, been
|
|
|
defined by an infinite number of authors as one thing; but I find,
|
|
|
by experience, that it is quite another. [Footnote 13: Compare the
|
|
|
note to No. 70.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In section 13 we already find it indicated that the study
|
|
|
of Perspective and of Optics is to be based on that of the functions
|
|
|
of the eye. Leonardo also refers to the science of the eye, in his
|
|
|
astronomical researches, for instance in MS. F 25b '_Ordine del
|
|
|
provare la terra essere una stella: Imprima difinisce l'occhio'_,
|
|
|
&c. Compare also MS. E 15b and F 60b. The principles of astronomical
|
|
|
perspective.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
22.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here [in the eye] forms, here colours, here the character of every
|
|
|
part of the universe are concentrated to a point; and that point is
|
|
|
so marvellous a thing ... Oh! marvellous, O stupendous Necessity--by
|
|
|
thy laws thou dost compel every effect to be the direct result of
|
|
|
its cause, by the shortest path. These [indeed] are miracles;...
|
|
|
|
|
|
In so small a space it can be reproduced and rearranged in its whole
|
|
|
expanse. Describe in your anatomy what proportion there is between
|
|
|
the diameters of all the images in the eye and the distance from
|
|
|
them of the crystalline lens.
|
|
|
|
|
|
23.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE 10 ATTRIBUTES OF THE EYE, ALL CONCERNED IN PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Painting is concerned with all the 10 attributes of sight; which
|
|
|
are:--Darkness, Light, Solidity and Colour, Form and Position,
|
|
|
Distance and Propinquity, Motion and Rest. This little work of mine
|
|
|
will be a tissue [of the studies] of these attributes, reminding the
|
|
|
painter of the rules and methods by which he should use his art to
|
|
|
imitate all the works of Nature which adorn the world.
|
|
|
|
|
|
24.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variability of the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
1st. The pupil of the eye contracts, in proportion to the increase
|
|
|
of light which is reflected in it. 2nd. The pupil of the eye expands
|
|
|
in proportion to the diminution in the day light, or any other
|
|
|
light, that is reflected in it. 3rd. [Footnote: 8. The subject of
|
|
|
this third proposition we find fully discussed in MS. G. 44a.]. The
|
|
|
eye perceives and recognises the objects of its vision with greater
|
|
|
intensity in proportion as the pupil is more widely dilated; and
|
|
|
this can be proved by the case of nocturnal animals, such as cats,
|
|
|
and certain birds--as the owl and others--in which the pupil varies
|
|
|
in a high degree from large to small, &c., when in the dark or in
|
|
|
the light. 4th. The eye [out of doors] in an illuminated atmosphere
|
|
|
sees darkness behind the windows of houses which [nevertheless] are
|
|
|
light. 5th. All colours when placed in the shade appear of an equal
|
|
|
degree of darkness, among themselves. 6th. But all colours when
|
|
|
placed in a full light, never vary from their true and essential
|
|
|
hue.
|
|
|
|
|
|
25.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Focus of sight.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the eye is required to look at an object placed too near to it,
|
|
|
it cannot judge of it well--as happens to a man who tries to see the
|
|
|
tip of his nose. Hence, as a general rule, Nature teaches us that an
|
|
|
object can never be seen perfectly unless the space between it and
|
|
|
the eye is equal, at least, to the length of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Differences of perception by one eye and by both eyes (26-29).
|
|
|
|
|
|
26.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When both eyes direct the pyramid of sight to an object, that object
|
|
|
becomes clearly seen and comprehended by the eyes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
27.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects seen by one and the same eye appear sometimes large, and
|
|
|
sometimes small.
|
|
|
|
|
|
28.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The motion of a spectator who sees an object at rest often makes it
|
|
|
seem as though the object at rest had acquired the motion of the
|
|
|
moving body, while the moving person appears to be at rest.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects in relief, when seen from a short distance with one eye,
|
|
|
look like a perfect picture. If you look with the eye _a_, _b_ at
|
|
|
the spot _c_, this point _c_ will appear to be at _d_, _f_, and if
|
|
|
you look at it with the eye _g_, _h_ will appear to be at _m_. A
|
|
|
picture can never contain in itself both aspects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
29.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let the object in relief _t_ be seen by both eyes; if you will look
|
|
|
at the object with the right eye _m_, keeping the left eye _n_ shut,
|
|
|
the object will appear, or fill up the space, at _a_; and if you
|
|
|
shut the right eye and open the left, the object (will occupy the)
|
|
|
space _b_; and if you open both eyes, the object will no longer
|
|
|
appear at _a_ or _b_, but at _e_, _r_, _f_. Why will not a picture
|
|
|
seen by both eyes produce the effect of relief, as [real] relief
|
|
|
does when seen by both eyes; and why should a picture seen with one
|
|
|
eye give the same effect of relief as real relief would under the
|
|
|
same conditions of light and shade?
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the sketch, _m_ is the left eye and _n_ the right,
|
|
|
while the text reverses this lettering. We must therefore suppose
|
|
|
that the face in which the eyes _m_ and _n_ are placed is opposite
|
|
|
to the spectator.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
30.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The comparative size of the image depends on the amount of light
|
|
|
(30-39).
|
|
|
|
|
|
The eye will hold and retain in itself the image of a luminous body
|
|
|
better than that of a shaded object. The reason is that the eye is
|
|
|
in itself perfectly dark and since two things that are alike cannot
|
|
|
be distinguished, therefore the night, and other dark objects cannot
|
|
|
be seen or recognised by the eye. Light is totally contrary and
|
|
|
gives more distinctness, and counteracts and differs from the usual
|
|
|
darkness of the eye, hence it leaves the impression of its image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
31.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every object we see will appear larger at midnight than at midday,
|
|
|
and larger in the morning than at midday.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This happens because the pupil of the eye is much smaller at midday
|
|
|
than at any other time.
|
|
|
|
|
|
32.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pupil which is largest will see objects the largest. This is
|
|
|
evident when we look at luminous bodies, and particularly at those
|
|
|
in the sky. When the eye comes out of darkness and suddenly looks up
|
|
|
at these bodies, they at first appear larger and then diminish; and
|
|
|
if you were to look at those bodies through a small opening, you
|
|
|
would see them smaller still, because a smaller part of the pupil
|
|
|
would exercise its function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 9. _buso_ in the Lomb. dialect is the same as _buco_.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
33.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the eye, coming out of darkness suddenly sees a luminous body,
|
|
|
it will appear much larger at first sight than after long looking at
|
|
|
it. The illuminated object will look larger and more brilliant, when
|
|
|
seen with two eyes than with only one. A luminous object will appear
|
|
|
smaller in size, when the eye sees it through a smaller opening. A
|
|
|
luminous body of an oval form will appear rounder in proportion as
|
|
|
it is farther from the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
34.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why when the eye has just seen the light, does the half light look
|
|
|
dark to it, and in the same way if it turns from the darkness the
|
|
|
half light look very bright?
|
|
|
|
|
|
35.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the eye, when [out of doors] in the luminous atmosphere, sees a
|
|
|
place in shadow, this will look very much darker than it really is.
|
|
|
This happens only because the eye when out in the air contracts the
|
|
|
pupil in proportion as the atmosphere reflected in it is more
|
|
|
luminous. And the more the pupil contracts, the less luminous do the
|
|
|
objects appear that it sees. But as soon as the eye enters into a
|
|
|
shady place the darkness of the shadow suddenly seems to diminish.
|
|
|
This occurs because the greater the darkness into which the pupil
|
|
|
goes the more its size increases, and this increase makes the
|
|
|
darkness seem less.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 14: _La luce entrera_. _Luce_ occurs here in the sense of
|
|
|
pupil of the eye as in no 51: C. A. 84b; 245a; I--5; and in many
|
|
|
other places.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
36.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The eye which turns from a white object in the light of the sun and
|
|
|
goes into a less fully lighted place will see everything as dark.
|
|
|
And this happens either because the pupils of the eyes which have
|
|
|
rested on this brilliantly lighted white object have contracted so
|
|
|
much that, given at first a certain extent of surface, they will
|
|
|
have lost more than 3/4 of their size; and, lacking in size, they
|
|
|
are also deficient in [seeing] power. Though you might say to me: A
|
|
|
little bird (then) coming down would see comparatively little, and
|
|
|
from the smallness of his pupils the white might seem black! To this
|
|
|
I should reply that here we must have regard to the proportion of
|
|
|
the mass of that portion of the brain which is given up to the sense
|
|
|
of sight and to nothing else. Or--to return--this pupil in Man
|
|
|
dilates and contracts according to the brightness or darkness of
|
|
|
(surrounding) objects; and since it takes some time to dilate and
|
|
|
contract, it cannot see immediately on going out of the light and
|
|
|
into the shade, nor, in the same way, out of the shade into the
|
|
|
light, and this very thing has already deceived me in painting an
|
|
|
eye, and from that I learnt it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
37.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Experiment [showing] the dilatation and contraction of the pupil,
|
|
|
from the motion of the sun and other luminaries. In proportion as
|
|
|
the sky is darker the stars appear of larger size, and if you were
|
|
|
to light up the medium these stars would look smaller; and this
|
|
|
difference arises solely from the pupil which dilates and contracts
|
|
|
with the amount of light in the medium which is interposed between
|
|
|
the eye and the luminous body. Let the experiment be made, by
|
|
|
placing a candle above your head at the same time that you look at a
|
|
|
star; then gradually lower the candle till it is on a level with the
|
|
|
ray that comes from the star to the eye, and then you will see the
|
|
|
star diminish so much that you will almost lose sight of it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: No reference is made in the text to the letters on the
|
|
|
accompanying diagram.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
38.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pupil of the eye, in the open air, changes in size with every
|
|
|
degree of motion from the sun; and at every degree of its changes
|
|
|
one and the same object seen by it will appear of a different size;
|
|
|
although most frequently the relative scale of surrounding objects
|
|
|
does not allow us to detect these variations in any single object we
|
|
|
may look at.
|
|
|
|
|
|
39.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The eye--which sees all objects reversed--retains the images for
|
|
|
some time. This conclusion is proved by the results; because, the
|
|
|
eye having gazed at light retains some impression of it. After
|
|
|
looking (at it) there remain in the eye images of intense
|
|
|
brightness, that make any less brilliant spot seem dark until the
|
|
|
eye has lost the last trace of the impression of the stronger light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_II.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linear Perspective.
|
|
|
|
|
|
We see clearly from the concluding sentence of section 49, where the
|
|
|
author directly addresses the painter, that he must certainly have
|
|
|
intended to include the elements of mathematics in his Book on the
|
|
|
art of Painting. They are therefore here placed at the beginning. In
|
|
|
section 50 the theory of the "Pyramid of Sight" is distinctly and
|
|
|
expressly put forward as the fundamental principle of linear
|
|
|
perspective, and sections 52 to 57 treat of it fully. This theory of
|
|
|
sight can scarcely be traced to any author of antiquity. Such
|
|
|
passages as occur in Euclid for instance, may, it is true, have
|
|
|
proved suggestive to the painters of the Renaissance, but it would
|
|
|
be rash to say any thing decisive on this point.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Leon Battista Alberti treats of the "Pyramid of Sight" at some
|
|
|
length in his first Book of Painting; but his explanation differs
|
|
|
widely from Leonardo's in the details. Leonardo, like Alberti, may
|
|
|
have borrowed the broad lines of his theory from some views commonly
|
|
|
accepted among painters at the time; but he certainly worked out its
|
|
|
application in a perfectly original manner.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The axioms as to the perception of the pyramid of rays are followed
|
|
|
by explanations of its origin, and proofs of its universal
|
|
|
application (58--69). The author recurs to the subject with endless
|
|
|
variations; it is evidently of fundamental importance in his
|
|
|
artistic theory and practice. It is unnecessary to discuss how far
|
|
|
this theory has any scientific value at the present day; so much as
|
|
|
this, at any rate, seems certain: that from the artist's point of
|
|
|
view it may still claim to be of immense practical utility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
According to Leonardo, on one hand, the laws of perspective are an
|
|
|
inalienable condition of the existence of objects in space; on the
|
|
|
other hand, by a natural law, the eye, whatever it sees and wherever
|
|
|
it turns, is subjected to the perception of the pyramid of rays in
|
|
|
the form of a minute target. Thus it sees objects in perspective
|
|
|
independently of the will of the spectator, since the eye receives
|
|
|
the images by means of the pyramid of rays "just as a magnet
|
|
|
attracts iron".
|
|
|
|
|
|
In connection with this we have the function of the eye explained by
|
|
|
the Camera obscura, and this is all the more interesting and
|
|
|
important because no writer previous to Leonardo had treated of this
|
|
|
subject_ (70--73). _Subsequent passages, of no less special interest,
|
|
|
betray his knowledge of refraction and of the inversion of the image
|
|
|
in the camera and in the eye_ (74--82).
|
|
|
|
|
|
_From the principle of the transmission of the image to the eye and
|
|
|
to the camera obscura he deduces the means of producing an
|
|
|
artificial construction of the pyramid of rays or--which is the same
|
|
|
thing--of the image. The fundamental axioms as to the angle of sight
|
|
|
and the vanishing point are thus presented in a manner which is as
|
|
|
complete as it is simple and intelligible_ (86--89).
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Leonardo distinguishes between simple and complex perspective_ (90,
|
|
|
91). _The last sections treat of the apparent size of objects at
|
|
|
various distances and of the way to estimate it_ (92--109).
|
|
|
|
|
|
General remarks on perspective (40-41).
|
|
|
|
|
|
40.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perspective is the best guide to the art of Painting.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 40. Compare 53, 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
41.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The art of perspective is of such a nature as to make what is flat
|
|
|
appear in relief and what is in relief flat.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The elements of perspective--Of the Point (42-46).
|
|
|
|
|
|
42.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All the problems of perspective are made clear by the five terms of
|
|
|
mathematicians, which are:--the point, the line, the angle, the
|
|
|
superficies and the solid. The point is unique of its kind. And the
|
|
|
point has neither height, breadth, length, nor depth, whence it is
|
|
|
to be regarded as indivisible and as having no dimensions in space.
|
|
|
The line is of three kinds, straight, curved and sinuous and it has
|
|
|
neither breadth, height, nor depth. Hence it is indivisible,
|
|
|
excepting in its length, and its ends are two points. The angle is
|
|
|
the junction of two lines in a point.
|
|
|
|
|
|
43.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A point is not part of a line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
44.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE NATURAL POINT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The smallest natural point is larger than all mathematical points,
|
|
|
and this is proved because the natural point has continuity, and any
|
|
|
thing that is continuous is infinitely divisible; but the
|
|
|
mathematical point is indivisible because it has no size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: This definition was inserted by Leonardo on a MS. copy on
|
|
|
parchment of the well-known _"Trattato d'Architettura civile e
|
|
|
militare"_ &c. by FRANCESCO DI GIORGIO; opposite a passage where the
|
|
|
author says: _'In prima he da sapere che punto e quella parie della
|
|
|
quale he nulla--Linia he luncheza senza apieza; &c.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
45.
|
|
|
|
|
|
1, The superficies is a limitation of the body. 2, and the
|
|
|
limitation of a body is no part of that body. 4, and the limitation
|
|
|
of one body is that which begins another. 3, that which is not part
|
|
|
of any body is nothing. Nothing is that which fills no space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If one single point placed in a circle may be the starting point of
|
|
|
an infinite number of lines, and the termination of an infinite
|
|
|
number of lines, there must be an infinite number of points
|
|
|
separable from this point, and these when reunited become one again;
|
|
|
whence it follows that the part may be equal to the whole.
|
|
|
|
|
|
46.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The point, being indivisible, occupies no space. That which occupies
|
|
|
no space is nothing. The limiting surface of one thing is the
|
|
|
beginning of another. 2. That which is no part of any body is called
|
|
|
nothing. 1. That which has no limitations, has no form. The
|
|
|
limitations of two conterminous bodies are interchangeably the
|
|
|
surface of each. All the surfaces of a body are not parts of that
|
|
|
body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of the line (47-48).
|
|
|
|
|
|
47.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DEFINITION OF THE NATURE OF THE LINE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The line has in itself neither matter nor substance and may rather
|
|
|
be called an imaginary idea than a real object; and this being its
|
|
|
nature it occupies no space. Therefore an infinite number of lines
|
|
|
may be conceived of as intersecting each other at a point, which has
|
|
|
no dimensions and is only of the thickness (if thickness it may be
|
|
|
called) of one single line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW WE MAY CONCLUDE THAT A SUPERFICIES TERMINATES IN A POINT?
|
|
|
|
|
|
An angular surface is reduced to a point where it terminates in an
|
|
|
angle. Or, if the sides of that angle are produced in a straight
|
|
|
line, then--beyond that angle--another surface is generated,
|
|
|
smaller, or equal to, or larger than the first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
48.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF DRAWING OUTLINE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Consider with the greatest care the form of the outlines of every
|
|
|
object, and the character of their undulations. And these
|
|
|
undulations must be separately studied, as to whether the curves are
|
|
|
composed of arched convexities or angular concavities.
|
|
|
|
|
|
49.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The nature of the outline.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The boundaries of bodies are the least of all things. The
|
|
|
proposition is proved to be true, because the boundary of a thing is
|
|
|
a surface, which is not part of the body contained within that
|
|
|
surface; nor is it part of the air surrounding that body, but is the
|
|
|
medium interposted between the air and the body, as is proved in its
|
|
|
place. But the lateral boundaries of these bodies is the line
|
|
|
forming the boundary of the surface, which line is of invisible
|
|
|
thickness. Wherefore O painter! do not surround your bodies with
|
|
|
lines, and above all when representing objects smaller than nature;
|
|
|
for not only will their external outlines become indistinct, but
|
|
|
their parts will be invisible from distance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
50.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Definition of Perspective.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Drawing is based upon perspective, which is nothing else than a
|
|
|
thorough knowledge of the function of the eye. And this function
|
|
|
simply consists in receiving in a pyramid the forms and colours of
|
|
|
all the objects placed before it. I say in a pyramid, because there
|
|
|
is no object so small that it will not be larger than the spot where
|
|
|
these pyramids are received into the eye. Therefore, if you extend
|
|
|
the lines from the edges of each body as they converge you will
|
|
|
bring them to a single point, and necessarily the said lines must
|
|
|
form a pyramid.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Perspective is nothing more than a rational demonstration applied
|
|
|
to the consideration of how objects in front of the eye transmit
|
|
|
their image to it, by means of a pyramid of lines. The _Pyramid_ is
|
|
|
the name I apply to the lines which, starting from the surface and
|
|
|
edges of each object, converge from a distance and meet in a single
|
|
|
point.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Perspective is a rational demonstration, by which we may
|
|
|
practically and clearly understand how objects transmit their own
|
|
|
image, by lines forming a Pyramid (centred) in the eye.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perspective is a rational demonstration by which experience confirms
|
|
|
that every object sends its image to the eye by a pyramid of lines;
|
|
|
and bodies of equal size will result in a pyramid of larger or
|
|
|
smaller size, according to the difference in their distance, one
|
|
|
from the other. By a pyramid of lines I mean those which start from
|
|
|
the surface and edges of bodies, and, converging from a distance
|
|
|
meet in a single point. A point is said to be that which [having no
|
|
|
dimensions] cannot be divided, and this point placed in the eye
|
|
|
receives all the points of the cone.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 50. 1-5. Compare with this the Proem. No. 21. The
|
|
|
paragraphs placed in brackets: lines 1-9, 10-14, and 17--20, are
|
|
|
evidently mere sketches and, as such, were cancelled by the writer;
|
|
|
but they serve as a commentary on the final paragraph, lines 22-29.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
51.
|
|
|
|
|
|
IN WHAT WAY THE EYE SEES OBJECTS PLACED IN FRONT OF IT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The perception of the object depends on the direction of the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supposing that the ball figured above is the ball of the eye and let
|
|
|
the small portion of the ball which is cut off by the line _s t_ be
|
|
|
the pupil and all the objects mirrored on the centre of the face of
|
|
|
the eye, by means of the pupil, pass on at once and enter the pupil,
|
|
|
passing through the crystalline humour, which does not interfere in
|
|
|
the pupil with the things seen by means of the light. And the pupil
|
|
|
having received the objects, by means of the light, immediately
|
|
|
refers them and transmits them to the intellect by the line _a b_.
|
|
|
And you must know that the pupil transmits nothing perfectly to the
|
|
|
intellect or common sense excepting when the objects presented to it
|
|
|
by means of light, reach it by the line _a b;_ as, for instance, by
|
|
|
the line _b c_. For although the lines _m n_ and _f g_ may be seen
|
|
|
by the pupil they are not perfectly taken in, because they do not
|
|
|
coincide with the line _a b_. And the proof is this: If the eye,
|
|
|
shown above, wants to count the letters placed in front, the eye
|
|
|
will be obliged to turn from letter to letter, because it cannot
|
|
|
discern them unless they lie in the line _a b;_ as, for instance, in
|
|
|
the line _a c_. All visible objects reach the eye by the lines of a
|
|
|
pyramid, and the point of the pyramid is the apex and centre of it,
|
|
|
in the centre of the pupil, as figured above.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 51. In this problem the eye is conceived of as fixed and
|
|
|
immovable; this is plain from line 11.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Experimental proof of the existence of the pyramid of sight (52-55).
|
|
|
|
|
|
52.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perspective is a rational demonstration, confirmed by experience,
|
|
|
that all objects transmit their image to the eye by a pyramid of
|
|
|
lines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
By a pyramid of lines I understand those lines which start from the
|
|
|
edges of the surface of bodies, and converging from a distance, meet
|
|
|
in a single point; and this point, in the present instance, I will
|
|
|
show to be situated in the eye which is the universal judge of all
|
|
|
objects. By a point I mean that which cannot be divided into parts;
|
|
|
therefore this point, which is situated in the eye, being
|
|
|
indivisible, no body is seen by the eye, that is not larger than
|
|
|
this point. This being the case it is inevitable that the lines
|
|
|
which come from the object to the point must form a pyramid. And if
|
|
|
any man seeks to prove that the sense of sight does not reside in
|
|
|
this point, but rather in the black spot which is visible in the
|
|
|
middle of the pupil, I might reply to him that a small object could
|
|
|
never diminish at any distance, as it might be a grain of millet or
|
|
|
of oats or of some similar thing, and that object, if it were larger
|
|
|
than the said [black] spot would never be seen as a whole; as may be
|
|
|
seen in the diagram below. Let _a_. be the seat of sight, _b e_ the
|
|
|
lines which reach the eye. Let _e d_ be the grains of millet within
|
|
|
these lines. You plainly see that these will never diminish by
|
|
|
distance, and that the body _m n_ could not be entirely covered by
|
|
|
it. Therefore you must confess that the eye contains within itself
|
|
|
one single indivisible point _a_, to which all the points converge
|
|
|
of the pyramid of lines starting from an object, as is shown below.
|
|
|
Let _a_. _b_. be the eye; in the centre of it is the point above
|
|
|
mentioned. If the line _e f_ is to enter as an image into so small
|
|
|
an opening in the eye, you must confess that the smaller object
|
|
|
cannot enter into what is smaller than itself unless it is
|
|
|
diminished, and by diminishing it must take the form of a pyramid.
|
|
|
|
|
|
53.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perspective comes in where judgment fails [as to the distance] in
|
|
|
objects which diminish. The eye can never be a true judge for
|
|
|
determining with exactitude how near one object is to another which
|
|
|
is equal to it [in size], if the top of that other is on the level
|
|
|
of the eye which sees them on that side, excepting by means of the
|
|
|
vertical plane which is the standard and guide of perspective. Let
|
|
|
_n_ be the eye, _e f_ the vertical plane above mentioned. Let _a b c
|
|
|
d_ be the three divisions, one below the other; if the lines _a n_
|
|
|
and _c n_ are of a given length and the eye _n_ is in the centre,
|
|
|
then _a b_ will look as large as _b c. c d_ is lower and farther off
|
|
|
from _n_, therefore it will look smaller. And the same effect will
|
|
|
appear in the three divisions of a face when the eye of the painter
|
|
|
who is drawing it is on a level with the eye of the person he is
|
|
|
painting.
|
|
|
|
|
|
54.
|
|
|
|
|
|
TO PROVE HOW OBJECTS REACH THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you look at the sun or some other luminous body and then shut
|
|
|
your eyes you will see it again inside your eye for a long time.
|
|
|
This is evidence that images enter into the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relations of the distance points to the vanishing point (55-56).
|
|
|
|
|
|
55.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ELEMENTS OF PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All objects transmit their image to the eye in pyramids, and the
|
|
|
nearer to the eye these pyramids are intersected the smaller will
|
|
|
the image appear of the objects which cause them. Therefore, you may
|
|
|
intersect the pyramid with a vertical plane [Footnote 4: _Pariete_.
|
|
|
Compare the definitions in 85, 2-5, 6-27. These lines refer
|
|
|
exclusively to the third diagram. For the better understanding of
|
|
|
this it should be observed that _c s_ must be regarded as
|
|
|
representing the section or profile of a square plane, placed
|
|
|
horizontally (comp. lines 11, 14, 17) for which the word _pianura_
|
|
|
is subsequently employed (20, 22). Lines 6-13 contain certain
|
|
|
preliminary observations to guide the reader in understanding the
|
|
|
diagram; the last three seem to have been added as a supplement.
|
|
|
Leonardo's mistake in writing _t denota_ (line 6) for _f denota_ has
|
|
|
been rectified.] which reaches the base of the pyramid as is shown
|
|
|
in the plane _a n_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The eye _f_ and the eye _t_ are one and the same thing; but the eye
|
|
|
_f_ marks the distance, that is to say how far you are standing from
|
|
|
the object; and the eye _t_ shows you the direction of it; that is
|
|
|
whether you are opposite, or on one side, or at an angle to the
|
|
|
object you are looking at. And remember that the eye _f_ and the eye
|
|
|
_t_ must always be kept on the same level. For example if you raise
|
|
|
or lower the eye from the distance point _f_ you must do the same
|
|
|
with the direction point _t_. And if the point _f_ shows how far the
|
|
|
eye is distant from the square plane but does not show on which side
|
|
|
it is placed--and, if in the same way, the point _t_ show _s_ the
|
|
|
direction and not the distance, in order to ascertain both you must
|
|
|
use both points and they will be one and the same thing. If the eye
|
|
|
_f_ could see a perfect square of which all the sides were equal to
|
|
|
the distance between _s_ and _c_, and if at the nearest end of the
|
|
|
side towards the eye a pole were placed, or some other straight
|
|
|
object, set up by a perpendicular line as shown at _r s_--then, I
|
|
|
say, that if you were to look at the side of the square that is
|
|
|
nearest to you it will appear at the bottom of the vertical plane _r
|
|
|
s_, and then look at the farther side and it would appear to you at
|
|
|
the height of the point _n_ on the vertical plane. Thus, by this
|
|
|
example, you can understand that if the eye is above a number of
|
|
|
objects all placed on the same level, one beyond another, the more
|
|
|
remote they are the higher they will seem, up to the level of the
|
|
|
eye, but no higher; because objects placed upon the level on which
|
|
|
your feet stand, so long as it is flat--even if it be extended into
|
|
|
infinity--would never be seen above the eye; since the eye has in
|
|
|
itself the point towards which all the cones tend and converge which
|
|
|
convey the images of the objects to the eye. And this point always
|
|
|
coincides with the point of diminution which is the extreme of all
|
|
|
we can see. And from the base line of the first pyramid as far as
|
|
|
the diminishing point
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The two diagrams above the chapter are explained by the
|
|
|
first five lines. They have, however, more letters than are referred
|
|
|
to in the text, a circumstance we frequently find occasion to
|
|
|
remark.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
56.
|
|
|
|
|
|
there are only bases without pyramids which constantly diminish up
|
|
|
to this point. And from the first base where the vertical plane is
|
|
|
placed towards the point in the eye there will be only pyramids
|
|
|
without bases; as shown in the example given above. Now, let _a b_
|
|
|
be the said vertical plane and _r_ the point of the pyramid
|
|
|
terminating in the eye, and _n_ the point of diminution which is
|
|
|
always in a straight line opposite the eye and always moves as the
|
|
|
eye moves--just as when a rod is moved its shadow moves, and moves
|
|
|
with it, precisely as the shadow moves with a body. And each point
|
|
|
is the apex of a pyramid, all having a common base with the
|
|
|
intervening vertical plane. But although their bases are equal their
|
|
|
angles are not equal, because the diminishing point is the
|
|
|
termination of a smaller angle than that of the eye. If you ask me:
|
|
|
"By what practical experience can you show me these points?" I
|
|
|
reply--so far as concerns the diminishing point which moves with you
|
|
|
--when you walk by a ploughed field look at the straight furrows
|
|
|
which come down with their ends to the path where you are walking,
|
|
|
and you will see that each pair of furrows will look as though they
|
|
|
tried to get nearer and meet at the [farther] end.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: For the easier understanding of the diagram and of its
|
|
|
connection with the preceding I may here remark that the square
|
|
|
plane shown above in profile by the line _c s_ is here indicated by
|
|
|
_e d o p_. According to lines 1, 3 _a b_ must be imagined as a plane
|
|
|
of glass placed perpendicularly at _o p_.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
57.
|
|
|
|
|
|
How to measure the pyramid of vision.
|
|
|
|
|
|
As regards the point in the eye; it is made more intelligible by
|
|
|
this: If you look into the eye of another person you will see your
|
|
|
own image. Now imagine 2 lines starting from your ears and going to
|
|
|
the ears of that image which you see in the other man's eye; you
|
|
|
will understand that these lines converge in such a way that they
|
|
|
would meet in a point a little way beyond your own image mirrored in
|
|
|
the eye. And if you want to measure the diminution of the pyramid in
|
|
|
the air which occupies the space between the object seen and the
|
|
|
eye, you must do it according to the diagram figured below. Let _m
|
|
|
n_ be a tower, and _e f_ a, rod, which you must move backwards and
|
|
|
forwards till its ends correspond with those of the tower [Footnote
|
|
|
9: _I sua stremi .. della storre_ (its ends ... of the tower) this
|
|
|
is the case at _e f_.]; then bring it nearer to the eye, at _c d_
|
|
|
and you will see that the image of the tower seems smaller, as at _r
|
|
|
o_. Then [again] bring it closer to the eye and you will see the rod
|
|
|
project far beyond the image of the tower from _a_ to _b_ and from
|
|
|
_t_ to _b_, and so you will discern that, a little farther within,
|
|
|
the lines must converge in a point.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Production of pyramid of Vision (58-60).
|
|
|
|
|
|
58.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The instant the atmosphere is illuminated it will be filled with an
|
|
|
infinite number of images which are produced by the various bodies
|
|
|
and colours assembled in it. And the eye is the target, a loadstone,
|
|
|
of these images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
59.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The whole surface of opaque bodies displays its whole image in all
|
|
|
the illuminated atmosphere which surrounds them on all sides.
|
|
|
|
|
|
60.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That the atmosphere attracts to itself, like a loadstone, all the
|
|
|
images of the objects that exist in it, and not their forms merely
|
|
|
but their nature may be clearly seen by the sun, which is a hot and
|
|
|
luminous body. All the atmosphere, which is the all-pervading
|
|
|
matter, absorbs light and heat, and reflects in itself the image of
|
|
|
the source of that heat and splendour and, in each minutest portion,
|
|
|
does the same. The Northpole does the same as the loadstone shows;
|
|
|
and the moon and the other planets, without suffering any
|
|
|
diminution, do the same. Among terrestrial things musk does the same
|
|
|
and other perfumes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
61.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All bodies together, and each by itself, give off to the surrounding
|
|
|
air an infinite number of images which are all-pervading and each
|
|
|
complete, each conveying the nature, colour and form of the body
|
|
|
which produces it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It can clearly be shown that all bodies are, by their images,
|
|
|
all-pervading in the surrounding atmosphere, and each complete in
|
|
|
itself as to substance form and colour; this is seen by the images
|
|
|
of the various bodies which are reproduced in one single perforation
|
|
|
through which they transmit the objects by lines which intersect and
|
|
|
cause reversed pyramids, from the objects, so that they are upside
|
|
|
down on the dark plane where they are first reflected. The reason of
|
|
|
this is--
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram intended to illustrate the statement (Pl. II
|
|
|
No. i) occurs in the original between lines 3 and 4. The three
|
|
|
circles must be understood to represent three luminous bodies which
|
|
|
transmit their images through perforations in a wall into a dark
|
|
|
chamber, according to a law which is more fully explained in 75?81.
|
|
|
So far as concerns the present passage the diagram is only intended
|
|
|
to explain that the images of the three bodies may be made to
|
|
|
coalesce at any given spot. In the circles are written,
|
|
|
giallo--yellow, biacho--white, rosso--red.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The text breaks off at line 8. The paragraph No.40 follows here in
|
|
|
the original MS.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
62.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every point is the termination of an infinite number of lines, which
|
|
|
diverge to form a base, and immediately, from the base the same
|
|
|
lines converge to a pyramid [imaging] both the colour and form. No
|
|
|
sooner is a form created or compounded than suddenly infinite lines
|
|
|
and angles are produced from it; and these lines, distributing
|
|
|
themselves and intersecting each other in the air, give rise to an
|
|
|
infinite number of angles opposite to each other. Given a base, each
|
|
|
opposite angle, will form a triangle having a form and proportion
|
|
|
equal to the larger angle; and if the base goes twice into each of
|
|
|
the 2 lines of the pyramid the smaller triangle will do the same.
|
|
|
|
|
|
63.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every body in light and shade fills the surrounding air with
|
|
|
infinite images of itself; and these, by infinite pyramids diffused
|
|
|
in the air, represent this body throughout space and on every side.
|
|
|
Each pyramid that is composed of a long assemblage of rays includes
|
|
|
within itself an infinite number of pyramids and each has the same
|
|
|
power as all, and all as each. A circle of equidistant pyramids of
|
|
|
vision will give to their object angles of equal size; and an eye at
|
|
|
each point will see the object of the same size. The body of the
|
|
|
atmosphere is full of infinite pyramids composed of radiating
|
|
|
straight lines, which are produced from the surface of the bodies in
|
|
|
light and shade, existing in the air; and the farther they are from
|
|
|
the object which produces them the more acute they become and
|
|
|
although in their distribution they intersect and cross they never
|
|
|
mingle together, but pass through all the surrounding air,
|
|
|
independently converging, spreading, and diffused. And they are all
|
|
|
of equal power [and value]; all equal to each, and each equal to
|
|
|
all. By these the images of objects are transmitted through all
|
|
|
space and in every direction, and each pyramid, in itself, includes,
|
|
|
in each minutest part, the whole form of the body causing it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The body of the atmosphere is full of infinite radiating pyramids
|
|
|
produced by the objects existing in it. These intersect and cross
|
|
|
each other with independent convergence without interfering with
|
|
|
each other and pass through all the surrounding atmosphere; and are
|
|
|
of equal force and value--all being equal to each, each to all. And
|
|
|
by means of these, images of the body are transmitted everywhere and
|
|
|
on all sides, and each receives in itself every minutest portion of
|
|
|
the object that produces it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Proof by experiment (65-66).
|
|
|
|
|
|
65.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The air is filled with endless images of the objects distributed in
|
|
|
it; and all are represented in all, and all in one, and all in each,
|
|
|
whence it happens that if two mirrors are placed in such a manner as
|
|
|
to face each other exactly, the first will be reflected in the
|
|
|
second and the second in the first. The first being reflected in the
|
|
|
second takes to it the image of itself with all the images
|
|
|
represented in it, among which is the image of the second mirror,
|
|
|
and so, image within image, they go on to infinity in such a manner
|
|
|
as that each mirror has within it a mirror, each smaller than the
|
|
|
last and one inside the other. Thus, by this example, it is clearly
|
|
|
proved that every object sends its image to every spot whence the
|
|
|
object itself can be seen; and the converse: That the same object
|
|
|
may receive in itself all the images of the objects that are in
|
|
|
front of it. Hence the eye transmits through the atmosphere its own
|
|
|
image to all the objects that are in front of it and receives them
|
|
|
into itself, that is to say on its surface, whence they are taken in
|
|
|
by the common sense, which considers them and if they are pleasing
|
|
|
commits them to the memory. Whence I am of opinion: That the
|
|
|
invisible images in the eyes are produced towards the object, as the
|
|
|
image of the object to the eye. That the images of the objects must
|
|
|
be disseminated through the air. An instance may be seen in several
|
|
|
mirrors placed in a circle, which will reflect each other endlessly.
|
|
|
When one has reached the other it is returned to the object that
|
|
|
produced it, and thence--being diminished--it is returned again to
|
|
|
the object and then comes back once more, and this happens
|
|
|
endlessly. If you put a light between two flat mirrors with a
|
|
|
distance of 1 braccio between them you will see in each of them an
|
|
|
infinite number of lights, one smaller than another, to the last. If
|
|
|
at night you put a light between the walls of a room, all the parts
|
|
|
of that wall will be tinted with the image of that light. And they
|
|
|
will receive the light and the light will fall on them, mutually,
|
|
|
that is to say, when there is no obstacle to interrupt the
|
|
|
transmission of the images. This same example is seen in a greater
|
|
|
degree in the distribution of the solar rays which all together, and
|
|
|
each by itself, convey to the object the image of the body which
|
|
|
causes it. That each body by itself alone fills with its images the
|
|
|
atmosphere around it, and that the same air is able, at the same
|
|
|
time, to receive the images of the endless other objects which are
|
|
|
in it, this is clearly proved by these examples. And every object is
|
|
|
everywhere visible in the whole of the atmosphere, and the whole in
|
|
|
every smallest part of it; and all the objects in the whole, and all
|
|
|
in each smallest part; each in all and all in every part.
|
|
|
|
|
|
66.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The images of objects are all diffused through the atmosphere which
|
|
|
receives them; and all on every side in it. To prove this, let _a c
|
|
|
e_ be objects of which the images are admitted to a dark chamber by
|
|
|
the small holes _n p_ and thrown upon the plane _f i_ opposite to
|
|
|
these holes. As many images will be produced in the chamber on the
|
|
|
plane as the number of the said holes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
67.
|
|
|
|
|
|
General conclusions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All objects project their whole image and likeness, diffused and
|
|
|
mingled in the whole of the atmosphere, opposite to themselves. The
|
|
|
image of every point of the bodily surface, exists in every part of
|
|
|
the atmosphere. All the images of the objects are in every part of
|
|
|
the atmosphere. The whole, and each part of the image of the
|
|
|
atmosphere is [reflected] in each point of the surface of the bodies
|
|
|
presented to it. Therefore both the part and the whole of the images
|
|
|
of the objects exist, both in the whole and in the parts of the
|
|
|
surface of these visible bodies. Whence we may evidently say that
|
|
|
the image of each object exists, as a whole and in every part, in
|
|
|
each part and in the whole interchangeably in every existing body.
|
|
|
As is seen in two mirrors placed opposite to each other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
68.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That the contrary is impossible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is impossible that the eye should project from itself, by visual
|
|
|
rays, the visual virtue, since, as soon as it opens, that front
|
|
|
portion [of the eye] which would give rise to this emanation would
|
|
|
have to go forth to the object and this it could not do without
|
|
|
time. And this being so, it could not travel so high as the sun in a
|
|
|
month's time when the eye wanted to see it. And if it could reach
|
|
|
the sun it would necessarily follow that it should perpetually
|
|
|
remain in a continuous line from the eye to the sun and should
|
|
|
always diverge in such a way as to form between the sun and the eye
|
|
|
the base and the apex of a pyramid. This being the case, if the eye
|
|
|
consisted of a million worlds, it would not prevent its being
|
|
|
consumed in the projection of its virtue; and if this virtue would
|
|
|
have to travel through the air as perfumes do, the winds would bent
|
|
|
it and carry it into another place. But we do [in fact] see the mass
|
|
|
of the sun with the same rapidity as [an object] at the distance of
|
|
|
a braccio, and the power of sight is not disturbed by the blowing of
|
|
|
the winds nor by any other accident.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The view here refuted by Leonardo was maintained among
|
|
|
others by Bramantino, Leonardo's Milanese contemporary. LOMAZZO
|
|
|
writes as follows in his Trattato dell' Arte della pittura &c.
|
|
|
(Milano 1584. Libr. V cp. XXI): Sovviemmi di aver gia letto in certi
|
|
|
scritti alcune cose di Bramantino milanese, celebratissimo pittore,
|
|
|
attenente alla prospettiva, le quali ho voluto riferire, e quasi
|
|
|
intessere in questo luogo, affinche sappiamo qual fosse l'opinione
|
|
|
di cosi chiaro e famoso pittore intorno alla prospettiva . . Scrive
|
|
|
Bramantino che la prospettiva e una cosa che contrafa il naturale, e
|
|
|
che cio si fa in tre modi
|
|
|
|
|
|
Circa il primo modo che si fa con ragione, per essere la cosa in
|
|
|
poche parole conclusa da Bramantino in maniera che giudico non
|
|
|
potersi dir meglio, contenendovi si tutta Parte del principio al
|
|
|
fine, io riferiro per appunto le proprie parole sue (cp. XXII, Prima
|
|
|
prospettiva di Bramantino). La prima prospettiva fa le cose di
|
|
|
punto, e l'altra non mai, e la terza piu appresso. Adunque la prima
|
|
|
si dimanda prospettiva, cioe ragione, la quale fa l'effetto dell'
|
|
|
occhio, facendo crescere e calare secondo gli effetti degli occhi.
|
|
|
Questo crescere e calare non procede della cosa propria, che in se
|
|
|
per esser lontana, ovvero vicina, per quello effetto non puo
|
|
|
crescere e sminuire, ma procede dagli effetti degli occhi, i quali
|
|
|
sono piccioli, e percio volendo vedere tanto gran cosa_, bisogna che
|
|
|
mandino fuora la virtu visiva, _la quale si dilata in tanta
|
|
|
larghezza, che piglia tutto quello che vuoi vedere, ed_ arrivando a
|
|
|
quella cosa la vede dove e: _e da lei agli occhi per quello circuito
|
|
|
fino all' occhio, e tutto quello termine e pieno di quella cosa_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is worthy of note that Leonardo had made his memorandum refuting
|
|
|
this view, at Milan in 1492]
|
|
|
|
|
|
69.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A parallel case.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Just as a stone flung into the water becomes the centre and cause of
|
|
|
many circles, and as sound diffuses itself in circles in the air: so
|
|
|
any object, placed in the luminous atmosphere, diffuses itself in
|
|
|
circles, and fills the surrounding air with infinite images of
|
|
|
itself. And is repeated, the whole every-where, and the whole in
|
|
|
every smallest part. This can be proved by experiment, since if you
|
|
|
shut a window that faces west and make a hole [Footnote: 6. Here the
|
|
|
text breaks off.] . .
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Compare LIBRI, _Histoire des sciences mathematiques en
|
|
|
Italie_. Tome III, p. 43.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function of the eye as explained by the camera obscura (70. 71).
|
|
|
|
|
|
70.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the object in front of the eye sends its image to the eye, the
|
|
|
eye, on the other hand, sends its image to the object, and no
|
|
|
portion whatever of the object is lost in the images it throws off,
|
|
|
for any reason either in the eye or the object. Therefore we may
|
|
|
rather believe it to be the nature and potency of our luminous
|
|
|
atmosphere which absorbs the images of the objects existing in it,
|
|
|
than the nature of the objects, to send their images through the
|
|
|
air. If the object opposite to the eye were to send its image to the
|
|
|
eye, the eye would have to do the same to the object, whence it
|
|
|
might seem that these images were an emanation. But, if so, it would
|
|
|
be necessary [to admit] that every object became rapidly smaller;
|
|
|
because each object appears by its images in the surrounding
|
|
|
atmosphere. That is: the whole object in the whole atmosphere, and
|
|
|
in each part; and all the objects in the whole atmosphere and all of
|
|
|
them in each part; speaking of that atmosphere which is able to
|
|
|
contain in itself the straight and radiating lines of the images
|
|
|
projected by the objects. From this it seems necessary to admit that
|
|
|
it is in the nature of the atmosphere, which subsists between the
|
|
|
objects, and which attracts the images of things to itself like a
|
|
|
loadstone, being placed between them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PROVE HOW ALL OBJECTS, PLACED IN ONE POSITION, ARE ALL EVERYWHERE
|
|
|
AND ALL IN EACH PART.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I say that if the front of a building--or any open piazza or
|
|
|
field--which is illuminated by the sun has a dwelling opposite to
|
|
|
it, and if, in the front which does not face the sun, you make a
|
|
|
small round hole, all the illuminated objects will project their
|
|
|
images through that hole and be visible inside the dwelling on the
|
|
|
opposite wall which may be made white; and there, in fact, they will
|
|
|
be upside down, and if you make similar openings in several places
|
|
|
in the same wall you will have the same result from each. Hence the
|
|
|
images of the illuminated objects are all everywhere on this wall
|
|
|
and all in each minutest part of it. The reason, as we clearly know,
|
|
|
is that this hole must admit some light to the said dwelling, and
|
|
|
the light admitted by it is derived from one or many luminous
|
|
|
bodies. If these bodies are of various colours and shapes the rays
|
|
|
forming the images are of various colours and shapes, and so will
|
|
|
the representations be on the wall.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 70. 15--23. This section has already been published in the
|
|
|
"_Saggio delle Opere di Leonardo da Vinci_" Milan 1872, pp. 13, 14.
|
|
|
G. Govi observes upon it, that Leonardo is not to be regarded as the
|
|
|
inventor of the Camera obscura, but that he was the first to explain
|
|
|
by it the structure of the eye. An account of the Camera obscura
|
|
|
first occurs in CESARE CESARINI's Italian version of Vitruvius, pub.
|
|
|
1523, four years after Leonardo's death. Cesarini expressly names
|
|
|
Benedettino Don Papnutio as the inventor of the Camera obscura. In
|
|
|
his explanation of the function of the eye by a comparison with the
|
|
|
Camera obscura Leonardo was the precursor of G. CARDANO, Professor
|
|
|
of Medicine at Bologna (died 1576) and it appears highly probable
|
|
|
that this is, in fact, the very discovery which Leonardo ascribes to
|
|
|
himself in section 21 without giving any further details.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
71.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS RECEIVED BY THE EYE INTERSECT WITHIN THE
|
|
|
CRYSTALLINE HUMOUR OF THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An experiment, showing how objects transmit their images or
|
|
|
pictures, intersecting within the eye in the crystalline humour, is
|
|
|
seen when by some small round hole penetrate the images of
|
|
|
illuminated objects into a very dark chamber. Then, receive these
|
|
|
images on a white paper placed within this dark room and rather near
|
|
|
to the hole and you will see all the objects on the paper in their
|
|
|
proper forms and colours, but much smaller; and they will be upside
|
|
|
down by reason of that very intersection. These images being
|
|
|
transmitted from a place illuminated by the sun will seem actually
|
|
|
painted on this paper which must be extremely thin and looked at
|
|
|
from behind. And let the little perforation be made in a very thin
|
|
|
plate of iron. Let _a b e d e_ be the object illuminated by the sun
|
|
|
and _o r_ the front of the dark chamber in which is the said hole at
|
|
|
_n m_. Let _s t_ be the sheet of paper intercepting the rays of the
|
|
|
images of these objects upside down, because the rays being
|
|
|
straight, _a_ on the right hand becomes _k_ on the left, and _e_ on
|
|
|
the left becomes _f_ on the right; and the same takes place inside
|
|
|
the pupil.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: This chapter is already known through a translation into
|
|
|
French by VENTURI. Compare his '_Essai sur les ouvrages
|
|
|
physico-mathematiques de L. da Vinci avec des fragments tires de ses
|
|
|
Manuscrits, apportes de l'Italie. Lu a la premiere classe de
|
|
|
l'Institut national des Sciences et Arts.' Paris, An V_ (1797).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The practice of perspective (72. 73).
|
|
|
|
|
|
72.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the practice of perspective the same rules apply to light and to
|
|
|
the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
73.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The object which is opposite to the pupil of the eye is seen by that
|
|
|
pupil and that which is opposite to the eye is seen by the pupil.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Refraction of the rays falling upon the eye (74. 75)
|
|
|
|
|
|
74.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The lines sent forth by the image of an object to the eye do not
|
|
|
reach the point within the eye in straight lines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
75.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the judgment of the eye is situated within it, the straight lines
|
|
|
of the images are refracted on its surface because they pass through
|
|
|
the rarer to the denser medium. If, when you are under water, you
|
|
|
look at objects in the air you will see them out of their true
|
|
|
place; and the same with objects under water seen from the air.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The intersection of the rays (76-82).
|
|
|
|
|
|
76.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The inversion of the images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All the images of objects which pass through a window [glass pane]
|
|
|
from the free outer air to the air confined within walls, are seen
|
|
|
on the opposite side; and an object which moves in the outer air
|
|
|
from east to west will seem in its shadow, on the wall which is
|
|
|
lighted by this confined air, to have an opposite motion.
|
|
|
|
|
|
77.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE IMAGES OF BODIES PASS IN BETWEEN THE
|
|
|
MARGINS OF THE OPENINGS BY WHICH THEY ENTER.
|
|
|
|
|
|
What difference is there in the way in which images pass through
|
|
|
narrow openings and through large openings, or in those which pass
|
|
|
by the sides of shaded bodies? By moving the edges of the opening
|
|
|
through which the images are admitted, the images of immovable
|
|
|
objects are made to move. And this happens, as is shown in the 9th
|
|
|
which demonstrates: [Footnote 11: _per la 9a che dicie_. When
|
|
|
Leonardo refers thus to a number it serves to indicate marginal
|
|
|
diagrams; this can in some instances be distinctly proved. The ninth
|
|
|
sketch on the page W. L. 145 b corresponds to the middle sketch of
|
|
|
the three reproduced.] the images of any object are all everywhere,
|
|
|
and all in each part of the surrounding air. It follows that if one
|
|
|
of the edges of the hole by which the images are admitted to a dark
|
|
|
chamber is moved it cuts off those rays of the image that were in
|
|
|
contact with it and gets nearer to other rays which previously were
|
|
|
remote from it &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE MOVEMENT OF THE EDGE AT THE RIGHT OR LEFT, OR THE UPPER, OR
|
|
|
LOWER EDGE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you move the right side of the opening the image on the left will
|
|
|
move [being that] of the object which entered on the right side of
|
|
|
the opening; and the same result will happen with all the other
|
|
|
sides of the opening. This can be proved by the 2nd of this which
|
|
|
shows: all the rays which convey the images of objects through the
|
|
|
air are straight lines. Hence, if the images of very large bodies
|
|
|
have to pass through very small holes, and beyond these holes
|
|
|
recover their large size, the lines must necessarily intersect.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 77. 2. In the first of the three diagrams Leonardo had
|
|
|
drawn only one of the two margins, et _m_.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
78.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Necessity has provided that all the images of objects in front of
|
|
|
the eye shall intersect in two places. One of these intersections is
|
|
|
in the pupil, the other in the crystalline lens; and if this were
|
|
|
not the case the eye could not see so great a number of objects as
|
|
|
it does. This can be proved, since all the lines which intersect do
|
|
|
so in a point. Because nothing is seen of objects excepting their
|
|
|
surface; and their edges are lines, in contradistinction to the
|
|
|
definition of a surface. And each minute part of a line is equal to
|
|
|
a point; for _smallest_ is said of that than which nothing can be
|
|
|
smaller, and this definition is equivalent to the definition of the
|
|
|
point. Hence it is possible for the whole circumference of a circle
|
|
|
to transmit its image to the point of intersection, as is shown in
|
|
|
the 4th of this which shows: all the smallest parts of the images
|
|
|
cross each other without interfering with each other. These
|
|
|
demonstrations are to illustrate the eye. No image, even of the
|
|
|
smallest object, enters the eye without being turned upside down;
|
|
|
but as it penetrates into the crystalline lens it is once more
|
|
|
reversed and thus the image is restored to the same position within
|
|
|
the eye as that of the object outside the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
79.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE CENTRAL LINE OF THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Only one line of the image, of all those that reach the visual
|
|
|
virtue, has no intersection; and this has no sensible dimensions
|
|
|
because it is a mathematical line which originates from a
|
|
|
mathematical point, which has no dimensions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
According to my adversary, necessity requires that the central line
|
|
|
of every image that enters by small and narrow openings into a dark
|
|
|
chamber shall be turned upside down, together with the images of the
|
|
|
bodies that surround it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
80.
|
|
|
|
|
|
AS TO WHETHER THE CENTRAL LINE OF THE IMAGE CAN BE INTERSECTED, OR
|
|
|
NOT, WITHIN THE OPENING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is impossible that the line should intersect itself; that is,
|
|
|
that its right should cross over to its left side, and so, its left
|
|
|
side become its right side. Because such an intersection demands two
|
|
|
lines, one from each side; for there can be no motion from right to
|
|
|
left or from left to right in itself without such extension and
|
|
|
thickness as admit of such motion. And if there is extension it is
|
|
|
no longer a line but a surface, and we are investigating the
|
|
|
properties of a line, and not of a surface. And as the line, having
|
|
|
no centre of thickness cannot be divided, we must conclude that the
|
|
|
line can have no sides to intersect each other. This is proved by
|
|
|
the movement of the line _a f_ to _a b_ and of the line _e b_ to _e
|
|
|
f_, which are the sides of the surface _a f e b_. But if you move
|
|
|
the line _a b_ and the line _e f_, with the frontends _a e_, to the
|
|
|
spot _c_, you will have moved the opposite ends _f b_ towards each
|
|
|
other at the point _d_. And from the two lines you will have drawn
|
|
|
the straight line _c d_ which cuts the middle of the intersection of
|
|
|
these two lines at the point _n_ without any intersection. For, you
|
|
|
imagine these two lines as having breadth, it is evident that by
|
|
|
this motion the first will entirely cover the other--being equal
|
|
|
with it--without any intersection, in the position _c d_. And this
|
|
|
is sufficient to prove our proposition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
81.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW THE INNUMERABLE RAYS FROM INNUMERABLE IMAGES CAN CONVERGE TO A
|
|
|
POINT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Just as all lines can meet at a point without interfering with each
|
|
|
other--being without breadth or thickness--in the same way all the
|
|
|
images of surfaces can meet there; and as each given point faces the
|
|
|
object opposite to it and each object faces an opposite point, the
|
|
|
converging rays of the image can pass through the point and diverge
|
|
|
again beyond it to reproduce and re-magnify the real size of that
|
|
|
image. But their impressions will appear reversed--as is shown in
|
|
|
the first, above; where it is said that every image intersects as it
|
|
|
enters the narrow openings made in a very thin substance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Read the marginal text on the other side.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In proportion as the opening is smaller than the shaded body, so
|
|
|
much less will the images transmitted through this opening intersect
|
|
|
each other. The sides of images which pass through openings into a
|
|
|
dark room intersect at a point which is nearer to the opening in
|
|
|
proportion as the opening is narrower. To prove this let _a b_ be an
|
|
|
object in light and shade which sends not its shadow but the image
|
|
|
of its darkened form through the opening _d e_ which is as wide as
|
|
|
this shaded body; and its sides _a b_, being straight lines (as has
|
|
|
been proved) must intersect between the shaded object and the
|
|
|
opening; but nearer to the opening in proportion as it is smaller
|
|
|
than the object in shade. As is shown, on your right hand and your
|
|
|
left hand, in the two diagrams _a_ _b_ _c_ _n_ _m_ _o_ where, the
|
|
|
right opening _d_ _e_, being equal in width to the shaded object _a_
|
|
|
_b_, the intersection of the sides of the said shaded object occurs
|
|
|
half way between the opening and the shaded object at the point _c_.
|
|
|
But this cannot happen in the left hand figure, the opening _o_
|
|
|
being much smaller than the shaded object _n_ _m_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is impossible that the images of objects should be seen between
|
|
|
the objects and the openings through which the images of these
|
|
|
bodies are admitted; and this is plain, because where the atmosphere
|
|
|
is illuminated these images are not formed visibly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the images are made double by mutually crossing each other they
|
|
|
are invariably doubly as dark in tone. To prove this let _d_ _e_ _h_
|
|
|
be such a doubling which although it is only seen within the space
|
|
|
between the bodies in _b_ and _i_ this will not hinder its being
|
|
|
seen from _f_ _g_ or from _f_ _m_; being composed of the images _a_
|
|
|
_b_ _i_ _k_ which run together in _d_ _e_ _h_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 81. On the original diagram at the beginning of this
|
|
|
chapter Leonardo has written "_azurro_" (blue) where in the
|
|
|
facsimile I have marked _A_, and "_giallo_" (yellow) where _B_
|
|
|
stands.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 15--23. These lines stand between the diagrams I and III.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 24--53. These lines stand between the diagrams I and II.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 54--97 are written along the left side of diagram I.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
82.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An experiment showing that though the pupil may not be moved from
|
|
|
its position the objects seen by it may appear to move from their
|
|
|
places.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you look at an object at some distance from you and which is
|
|
|
below the eye, and fix both your eyes upon it and with one hand
|
|
|
firmly hold the upper lid open while with the other you push up the
|
|
|
under lid--still keeping your eyes fixed on the object gazed at--you
|
|
|
will see that object double; one [image] remaining steady, and the
|
|
|
other moving in a contrary direction to the pressure of your finger
|
|
|
on the lower eyelid. How false the opinion is of those who say that
|
|
|
this happens because the pupil of the eye is displaced from its
|
|
|
position.
|
|
|
|
|
|
How the above mentioned facts prove that the pupil acts upside down
|
|
|
in seeing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 82. 14--17. The subject indicated by these two headings is
|
|
|
fully discussed in the two chapters that follow them in the
|
|
|
original; but it did not seem to me appropriate to include them
|
|
|
here.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Demostration of perspective by means of a vertical glass plane
|
|
|
(83-85).
|
|
|
|
|
|
83.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE PLANE OF GLASS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perspective is nothing else than seeing place [or objects] behind a
|
|
|
plane of glass, quite transparent, on the surface of which the
|
|
|
objects behind that glass are to be drawn. These can be traced in
|
|
|
pyramids to the point in the eye, and these pyramids are intersected
|
|
|
on the glass plane.
|
|
|
|
|
|
84.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pictorial perspective can never make an object at the same distance,
|
|
|
look of the same size as it appears to the eye. You see that the
|
|
|
apex of the pyramid _f c d_ is as far from the object _c_ _d_ as the
|
|
|
same point _f_ is from the object _a_ _b_; and yet _c_ _d_, which is
|
|
|
the base made by the painter's point, is smaller than _a_ _b_ which
|
|
|
is the base of the lines from the objects converging in the eye and
|
|
|
refracted at _s_ _t_, the surface of the eye. This may be proved by
|
|
|
experiment, by the lines of vision and then by the lines of the
|
|
|
painter's plumbline by cutting the real lines of vision on one and
|
|
|
the same plane and measuring on it one and the same object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
85.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The vertical plane is a perpendicular line, imagined as in front of
|
|
|
the central point where the apex of the pyramids converge. And this
|
|
|
plane bears the same relation to this point as a plane of glass
|
|
|
would, through which you might see the various objects and draw them
|
|
|
on it. And the objects thus drawn would be smaller than the
|
|
|
originals, in proportion as the distance between the glass and the
|
|
|
eye was smaller than that between the glass and the objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The different converging pyramids produced by the objects, will
|
|
|
show, on the plane, the various sizes and remoteness of the objects
|
|
|
causing them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All those horizontal planes of which the extremes are met by
|
|
|
perpendicular lines forming right angles, if they are of equal width
|
|
|
the more they rise to the level of eye the less this is seen, and
|
|
|
the more the eye is above them the more will their real width be
|
|
|
seen.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The farther a spherical body is from the eye the more you will see
|
|
|
of it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The angle of sight varies with the distance (86-88)
|
|
|
|
|
|
86.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A simple and natural method; showing how objects appear to the eye
|
|
|
without any other medium.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The object that is nearest to the eye always seems larger than
|
|
|
another of the same size at greater distance. The eye _m_, seeing
|
|
|
the spaces _o v x_, hardly detects the difference between them, and
|
|
|
the. reason of this is that it is close to them [Footnote 6: It is
|
|
|
quite inconceivable to me why M. RAVAISSON, in a note to his French
|
|
|
translation of this simple passage should have remarked: _Il est
|
|
|
clair que c'est par erreur que Leonard a ecrit_ per esser visino _au
|
|
|
lieu de_ per non esser visino. (See his printed ed. of MS. A. p.
|
|
|
38.)]; but if these spaces are marked on the vertical plane _n o_
|
|
|
the space _o v_ will be seen at _o r_, and in the same way the space
|
|
|
_v x_ will appear at _r q_. And if you carry this out in any place
|
|
|
where you can walk round, it will look out of proportion by reason
|
|
|
of the great difference in the spaces _o r_ and _r q_. And this
|
|
|
proceeds from the eye being so much below [near] the plane that the
|
|
|
plane is foreshortened. Hence, if you wanted to carry it out, you
|
|
|
would have [to arrange] to see the perspective through a single hole
|
|
|
which must be at the point _m_, or else you must go to a distance of
|
|
|
at least 3 times the height of the object you see. The plane _o p_
|
|
|
being always equally remote from the eye will reproduce the objects
|
|
|
in a satisfactory way, so that they may be seen from place to place.
|
|
|
|
|
|
87.
|
|
|
|
|
|
How every large mass sends forth its images, which may diminish
|
|
|
through infinity.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The images of any large mass being infinitely divisible may be
|
|
|
infinitely diminished.
|
|
|
|
|
|
88.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects of equal size, situated in various places, will be seen by
|
|
|
different pyramids which will each be smaller in proportion as the
|
|
|
object is farther off.
|
|
|
|
|
|
89.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perspective, in dealing with distances, makes use of two opposite
|
|
|
pyramids, one of which has its apex in the eye and the base as
|
|
|
distant as the horizon. The other has the base towards the eye and
|
|
|
the apex on the horizon. Now, the first includes the [visible]
|
|
|
universe, embracing all the mass of the objects that lie in front of
|
|
|
the eye; as it might be a vast landscape seen through a very small
|
|
|
opening; for the more remote the objects are from the eye, the
|
|
|
greater number can be seen through the opening, and thus the pyramid
|
|
|
is constructed with the base on the horizon and the apex in the eye,
|
|
|
as has been said. The second pyramid is extended to a spot which is
|
|
|
smaller in proportion as it is farther from the eye; and this second
|
|
|
perspective [= pyramid] results from the first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
90.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SIMPLE PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Simple perspective is that which is constructed by art on a vertical
|
|
|
plane which is equally distant from the eye in every part. Complex
|
|
|
perspective is that which is constructed on a ground-plan in which
|
|
|
none of the parts are equally distant from the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
91.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No surface can be seen exactly as it is, if the eye that sees it is
|
|
|
not equally remote from all its edges.
|
|
|
|
|
|
92.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHY WHEN AN OBJECT IS PLACED CLOSE TO THE EYE ITS EDGES ARE
|
|
|
INDISTINCT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When an object opposite the eye is brought too close to it, its
|
|
|
edges must become too confused to be distinguished; as it happens
|
|
|
with objects close to a light, which cast a large and indistinct
|
|
|
shadow, so is it with an eye which estimates objects opposite to it;
|
|
|
in all cases of linear perspective, the eye acts in the same way as
|
|
|
the light. And the reason is that the eye has one leading line (of
|
|
|
vision) which dilates with distance and embraces with true
|
|
|
discernment large objects at a distance as well as small ones that
|
|
|
are close. But since the eye sends out a multitude of lines which
|
|
|
surround this chief central one and since these which are farthest
|
|
|
from the centre in this cone of lines are less able to discern with
|
|
|
accuracy, it follows that an object brought close to the eye is not
|
|
|
at a due distance, but is too near for the central line to be able
|
|
|
to discern the outlines of the object. So the edges fall within the
|
|
|
lines of weaker discerning power, and these are to the function of
|
|
|
the eye like dogs in the chase which can put up the game but cannot
|
|
|
take it. Thus these cannot take in the objects, but induce the
|
|
|
central line of sight to turn upon them, when they have put them up.
|
|
|
Hence the objects which are seen with these lines of sight have
|
|
|
confused outlines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relative size of objects with regard to their distance from the
|
|
|
eye (93-98).
|
|
|
|
|
|
93.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Small objects close at hand and large ones at a distance, being seen
|
|
|
within equal angles, will appear of the same size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
94.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is no object so large but that at a great distance from the
|
|
|
eye it does not appear smaller than a smaller object near.
|
|
|
|
|
|
95.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Among objects of equal size that which is most remote from the eye
|
|
|
will look the smallest. [Footnote: This axiom, sufficiently clear in
|
|
|
itself, is in the original illustrated by a very large diagram,
|
|
|
constructed like that here reproduced under No. 108.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The same idea is repeated in C. A. I a; I a, stated as follows:
|
|
|
_Infra le cose d'equal grandeza quella si dimostra di minor figura
|
|
|
che sara piu distante dall' ochio_.--]
|
|
|
|
|
|
96.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why an object is less distinct when brought near to the eye, and why
|
|
|
with spectacles, or without the naked eye sees badly either close or
|
|
|
far off [as the case may be].
|
|
|
|
|
|
97.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Among objects of equal size, that which is most remote from the eye
|
|
|
will look the smallest.
|
|
|
|
|
|
98.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No second object can be so much lower than the first as that the eye
|
|
|
will not see it higher than the first, if the eye is above the
|
|
|
second.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And this second object will never be so much higher than the first
|
|
|
as that the eye, being below them, will not see the second as lower
|
|
|
than the first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the eye sees a second square through the centre of a smaller one,
|
|
|
that is nearer, the second, larger square will appear to be
|
|
|
surrounded by the smaller one.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE--PROPOSITION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects that are farther off can never be so large but that those in
|
|
|
front, though smaller, will conceal or surround them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DEFINITION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This proposition can be proved by experiment. For if you look
|
|
|
through a small hole there is nothing so large that it cannot be
|
|
|
seen through it and the object so seen appears surrounded and
|
|
|
enclosed by the outline of the sides of the hole. And if you stop it
|
|
|
up, this small stopping will conceal the view of the largest object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The apparent size of objects defined by calculation (99-105)
|
|
|
|
|
|
99.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LINEAR PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linear Perspective deals with the action of the lines of sight, in
|
|
|
proving by measurement how much smaller is a second object than the
|
|
|
first, and how much the third is smaller than the second; and so on
|
|
|
by degrees to the end of things visible. I find by experience that
|
|
|
if a second object is as far beyond the first as the first is from
|
|
|
the eye, although they are of the same size, the second will seem
|
|
|
half the size of the first and if the third object is of the same
|
|
|
size as the 2nd, and the 3rd is as far beyond the second as the 2nd
|
|
|
from the first, it will appear of half the size of the second; and
|
|
|
so on by degrees, at equal distances, the next farthest will be half
|
|
|
the size of the former object. So long as the space does not exceed
|
|
|
the length of 20 braccia. But, beyond 20 braccia figures of equal
|
|
|
size will lose 2/4 and at 40 braccia they will lose 9/10, and 19/20
|
|
|
at 60 braccia, and so on diminishing by degrees. This is if the
|
|
|
picture plane is distant from you twice your own height. If it is
|
|
|
only as far off as your own height, there will be a great difference
|
|
|
between the first braccia and the second.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: This chapter is included in DUFRESNE'S and MANZI'S
|
|
|
editions of the Treatise on Painting. H. LUDWIG, in his commentary,
|
|
|
calls this chapter "_eines der wichtigsten im ganzen Tractat_", but
|
|
|
at the same time he asserts that its substance has been so
|
|
|
completely disfigured in the best MS. copies that we ought not to
|
|
|
regard Leonardo as responsible for it. However, in the case of this
|
|
|
chapter, the old MS. copies agree with the original as it is
|
|
|
reproduced above. From the chapters given later in this edition,
|
|
|
which were written at a subsequent date, it would appear that
|
|
|
Leonardo corrected himself on these points.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
100.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE DIMINUTION OF OBJECTS AT VARIOUS DISTANCES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A second object as far distant from the first as the first is from
|
|
|
the eye will appear half the size of the first, though they be of
|
|
|
the same size really.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE DEGREES OF DIMINUTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you place the vertical plane at one braccio from the eye, the
|
|
|
first object, being at a distance of 4 braccia from your eye will
|
|
|
diminish to 3/4 of its height at that plane; and if it is 8 braccia
|
|
|
from the eye, to 7/8; and if it is 16 braccia off, it will diminish
|
|
|
to 15/16 of its height and so on by degrees, as the space doubles
|
|
|
the diminution will double.
|
|
|
|
|
|
101.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Begin from the line _m f_ with the eye below; then go up and do the
|
|
|
same with the line _n f_, then with the eye above and close to the 2
|
|
|
gauges on the ground look at _m n_; then as _c m_ is to _m n_ so
|
|
|
will _n m_ be to _n s_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If _a n_ goes 3 times into _f b, m p_ will do the same into _p g_.
|
|
|
Then go backwards so far as that _c d_ goes twice into _a n_ and _p
|
|
|
g_ will be equal to _g h_. And _m p_ will go into _h p_ as often as
|
|
|
_d c_ into _o p_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The first three lines are unfortunately very obscure.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
102.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I GIVE THE DEGREES OF THE OBJECTS SEEN BY THE EYE AS THE MUSICIAN
|
|
|
DOES THE NOTES HEARD BY THE EAR.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Although the objects seen by the eye do, in fact, touch each other
|
|
|
as they recede, I will nevertheless found my rule on spaces of 20
|
|
|
braccia each; as a musician does with notes, which, though they can
|
|
|
be carried on one into the next, he divides into degrees from note
|
|
|
to note calling them 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th; and has affixed a name
|
|
|
to each degree in raising or lowering the voice.
|
|
|
|
|
|
103.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let _f_ be the level and distance of the eye; and _a_ the vertical
|
|
|
plane, as high as a man; let _e_ be a man, then I say that on the
|
|
|
plane this will be the distance from the plane to the 2nd man.
|
|
|
|
|
|
104.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The differences in the diminution of objects of equal size in
|
|
|
consequence of their various remoteness from the eye will bear among
|
|
|
themselves the same proportions as those of the spaces between the
|
|
|
eye and the different objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Find out how much a man diminishes at a certain distance and what
|
|
|
its length is; and then at twice that distance and at 3 times, and
|
|
|
so make your general rule.
|
|
|
|
|
|
105.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The eye cannot judge where an object high up ought to descend.
|
|
|
|
|
|
106.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If two similar and equal objects are placed one beyond the other at
|
|
|
a given distance the difference in their size will appear greater in
|
|
|
proportion as they are nearer to the eye that sees them. And
|
|
|
conversely there will seem to be less difference in their size in
|
|
|
proportion as they are remote from the eve.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is proved by the proportions of their distances among
|
|
|
themselves; for, if the first of these two objects were as far from
|
|
|
the eye, as the 2nd from the first this would be called the second
|
|
|
proportion: since, if the first is at 1 braccia from the eye and the
|
|
|
2nd at two braccia, two being twice as much as one, the first object
|
|
|
will look twice as large as the second. But if you place the first
|
|
|
at a hundred braccia from you and the second at a hundred and one,
|
|
|
you will find that the first is only so much larger than the second
|
|
|
as 100 is less than 101; and the converse is equally true. And
|
|
|
again, the same thing is proved by the 4th of this book which shows
|
|
|
that among objects that are equal, there is the same proportion in
|
|
|
the diminution of the size as in the increase in the distance from
|
|
|
the eye of the spectator.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On natural perspective (107--109).
|
|
|
|
|
|
107.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF EQUAL OBJECTS THE MOST REMOTE LOOK THE SMALLEST.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The practice of perspective may be divided into ... parts [Footnote
|
|
|
4: _in_ ... _parte_. The space for the number is left blank in the
|
|
|
original.], of which the first treats of objects seen by the eye at
|
|
|
any distance; and it shows all these objects just as the eye sees
|
|
|
them diminished, without obliging a man to stand in one place rather
|
|
|
than another so long as the plane does not produce a second
|
|
|
foreshortening.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But the second practice is a combination of perspective derived
|
|
|
partly from art and partly from nature and the work done by its
|
|
|
rules is in every portion of it, influenced by natural perspective
|
|
|
and artificial perspective. By natural perspective I mean that the
|
|
|
plane on which this perspective is represented is a flat surface,
|
|
|
and this plane, although it is parallel both in length and height,
|
|
|
is forced to diminish in its remoter parts more than in its nearer
|
|
|
ones. And this is proved by the first of what has been said above,
|
|
|
and its diminution is natural. But artificial perspective, that is
|
|
|
that which is devised by art, does the contrary; for objects equal
|
|
|
in size increase on the plane where it is foreshortened in
|
|
|
proportion as the eye is more natural and nearer to the plane, and
|
|
|
as the part of the plane on which it is figured is farther from the
|
|
|
eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And let this plane be _d e_ on which are seen 3 equal circles which
|
|
|
are beyond this plane _d e_, that is the circles _a b c_. Now you
|
|
|
see that the eye _h_ sees on the vertical plane the sections of the
|
|
|
images, largest of those that are farthest and smallest of the
|
|
|
nearest.
|
|
|
|
|
|
108.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here follows what is wanting in the margin at the foot on the other
|
|
|
side of this page.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Natural perspective acts in a contrary way; for, at greater
|
|
|
distances the object seen appears smaller, and at a smaller distance
|
|
|
the object appears larger. But this said invention requires the
|
|
|
spectator to stand with his eye at a small hole and then, at that
|
|
|
small hole, it will be very plain. But since many (men's) eyes
|
|
|
endeavour at the same time to see one and the same picture produced
|
|
|
by this artifice only one can see clearly the effect of this
|
|
|
perspective and all the others will see confusion. It is well
|
|
|
therefore to avoid such complex perspective and hold to simple
|
|
|
perspective which does not regard planes as foreshortened, but as
|
|
|
much as possible in their proper form. This simple perspective, in
|
|
|
which the plane intersects the pyramids by which the images are
|
|
|
conveyed to the eye at an equal distance from the eye is our
|
|
|
constant experience, from the curved form of the pupil of the eye on
|
|
|
which the pyramids are intersected at an equal distance from the
|
|
|
visual virtue.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 24: _la prima di sopra_ i. e. the first of the three
|
|
|
diagrams which, in the original MS., are placed in the margin at the
|
|
|
beginning of this chapter.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
109.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF A MIXTURE OF NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This diagram distinguishes natural from artificial perspective. But
|
|
|
before proceeding any farther I will define what is natural and what
|
|
|
is artificial perspective. Natural perspective says that the more
|
|
|
remote of a series of objects of equal size will look the smaller,
|
|
|
and conversely, the nearer will look the larger and the apparent
|
|
|
size will diminish in proportion to the distance. But in artificial
|
|
|
perspective when objects of unequal size are placed at various
|
|
|
distances, the smallest is nearer to the eye than the largest and
|
|
|
the greatest distance looks as though it were the least of all; and
|
|
|
the cause of this is the plane on which the objects are represented;
|
|
|
and which is at unequal distances from the eye throughout its
|
|
|
length. And this diminution of the plane is natural, but the
|
|
|
perspective shown upon it is artificial since it nowhere agrees with
|
|
|
the true diminution of the said plane. Whence it follows, that when
|
|
|
the eye is somewhat removed from the [station point of the]
|
|
|
perspective that it has been gazing at, all the objects represented
|
|
|
look monstrous, and this does not occur in natural perspective,
|
|
|
which has been defined above. Let us say then, that the square _a b
|
|
|
c d_ figured above is foreshortened being seen by the eye situated
|
|
|
in the centre of the side which is in front. But a mixture of
|
|
|
artificial and natural perspective will be seen in this tetragon
|
|
|
called _el main_ [Footnote 20: _el main_ is quite legibly written in
|
|
|
the original; the meaning and derivation of the word are equally
|
|
|
doubtful.], that is to say _e f g h_ which must appear to the eye of
|
|
|
the spectator to be equal to _a b c d_ so long as the eye remains in
|
|
|
its first position between _c_ and _d_. And this will be seen to
|
|
|
have a good effect, because the natural perspective of the plane
|
|
|
will conceal the defects which would [otherwise] seem monstrous.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_III._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Six books on Light and Shade._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Linear Perspective cannot be immediately followed by either the_
|
|
|
"prospettiva de' perdimenti" _or the_ "prospettiva de' colori" _or
|
|
|
the aerial perspective; since these branches of the subject
|
|
|
presuppose a knowledge of the principles of Light and Shade. No
|
|
|
apology, therefore, is here needed for placing these immediately
|
|
|
after Linear Perspective._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_We have various plans suggested by Leonardo for the arrangement of
|
|
|
the mass of materials treating of this subject. Among these I have
|
|
|
given the preference to a scheme propounded in No._ III, _because,
|
|
|
in all probability, we have here a final and definite purpose
|
|
|
expressed. Several authors have expressed it as their opinion that
|
|
|
the Paris Manuscript_ C _is a complete and finished treatise on
|
|
|
Light and Shade. Certainly, the Principles of Light and Shade form
|
|
|
by far the larger portion of this MS. which consists of two separate
|
|
|
parts; still, the materials are far from being finally arranged. It
|
|
|
is also evident that he here investigates the subject from the point
|
|
|
of view of the Physicist rather than from that of the Painter._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_The plan of a scheme of arrangement suggested in No._ III _and
|
|
|
adopted by me has been strictly adhered to for the first four Books.
|
|
|
For the three last, however, few materials have come down to us; and
|
|
|
it must be admitted that these three Books would find a far more
|
|
|
appropriate place in a work on Physics than in a treatise on
|
|
|
Painting. For this reason I have collected in Book V all the
|
|
|
chapters on Reflections, and in Book VI I have put together and
|
|
|
arranged all the sections of MS._ C _that belong to the book on
|
|
|
Painting, so far as they relate to Light and Shade, while the
|
|
|
sections of the same MS. which treat of the_ "Prospettiva de'
|
|
|
perdimenti" _have, of course, been excluded from the series on Light
|
|
|
and Shade._
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote III: This text has already been published with some slight
|
|
|
variations in Dozio's pamphlet _Degli scritti e disegni di Leonardo
|
|
|
da Vinci_, Milan 1871, pp. 30--31. Dozio did not transcribe it from
|
|
|
the original MS. which seems to have remained unknown to him, but
|
|
|
from an old copy (MS. H. 227 in the Ambrosian Library).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
GENERAL INTRODUCTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prolegomena.
|
|
|
|
|
|
110.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You must first explain the theory and then the practice. First you
|
|
|
must describe the shadows and lights on opaque objects, and then on
|
|
|
transparent bodies.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Scheme of the books on Light and shade.
|
|
|
|
|
|
111.
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTRODUCTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Having already treated of the nature of shadows and the way in
|
|
|
which they are cast [Footnote 2: _Avendo io tractato._--We may
|
|
|
suppose that he here refers to some particular MS., possibly Paris
|
|
|
C.], I will now consider the places on which they fall; and their
|
|
|
curvature, obliquity, flatness or, in short, any character I may be
|
|
|
able to detect in them.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow is the obstruction of light. Shadows appear to me to be of
|
|
|
supreme importance in perspective, because, without them opaque and
|
|
|
solid bodies will be ill defined; that which is contained within
|
|
|
their outlines and their boundaries themselves will be
|
|
|
ill-understood unless they are shown against a background of a
|
|
|
different tone from themselves. And therefore in my first
|
|
|
proposition concerning shadow I state that every opaque body is
|
|
|
surrounded and its whole surface enveloped in shadow and light. And
|
|
|
on this proposition I build up the first Book. Besides this, shadows
|
|
|
have in themselves various degrees of darkness, because they are
|
|
|
caused by the absence of a variable amount of the luminous rays; and
|
|
|
these I call Primary shadows because they are the first, and
|
|
|
inseparable from the object to which they belong. And on this I will
|
|
|
found my second Book. From these primary shadows there result
|
|
|
certain shaded rays which are diffused through the atmosphere and
|
|
|
these vary in character according to that of the primary shadows
|
|
|
whence they are derived. I shall therefore call these shadows
|
|
|
Derived shadows because they are produced by other shadows; and the
|
|
|
third Book will treat of these. Again these derived shadows, where
|
|
|
they are intercepted by various objects, produce effects as various
|
|
|
as the places where they are cast and of this I will treat in the
|
|
|
fourth Book. And since all round the derived shadows, where the
|
|
|
derived shadows are intercepted, there is always a space where the
|
|
|
light falls and by reflected dispersion is thrown back towards its
|
|
|
cause, it meets the original shadow and mingles with it and modifies
|
|
|
it somewhat in its nature; and on this I will compose my fifth Book.
|
|
|
Besides this, in the sixth Book I will investigate the many and
|
|
|
various diversities of reflections resulting from these rays which
|
|
|
will modify the original [shadow] by [imparting] some of the various
|
|
|
colours from the different objects whence these reflected rays are
|
|
|
derived. Again, the seventh Book will treat of the various distances
|
|
|
that may exist between the spot where the reflected rays fall and
|
|
|
that where they originate, and the various shades of colour which
|
|
|
they will acquire in falling on opaque bodies.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Different principles and plans of treatment (112--116).
|
|
|
|
|
|
112.
|
|
|
|
|
|
First I will treat of light falling through windows which I will
|
|
|
call Restricted [Light] and then I will treat of light in the open
|
|
|
country, to which I will give the name of diffused Light. Then I
|
|
|
will treat of the light of luminous bodies.
|
|
|
|
|
|
113.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The conditions of shadow and light [as seen] by the eye are 3. Of
|
|
|
these the first is when the eye and the light are on the same side
|
|
|
of the object seen; the 2nd is when the eye is in front of the
|
|
|
object and the light is behind it. The 3rd is when the eye is in
|
|
|
front of the object and the light is on one side, in such a way as
|
|
|
that a line drawn from the object to the eye and one from the object
|
|
|
to the light should form a right angle where they meet.
|
|
|
|
|
|
114.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is another section: that is, of the nature of a reflection
|
|
|
(from) an object placed between the eye and the light under various
|
|
|
aspects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
115.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
As regards all visible objects 3 things must be considered. These
|
|
|
are the position of the eye which sees: that of the object seen
|
|
|
[with regard] to the light, and the position of the light which
|
|
|
illuminates the object, _b_ is the eye, _a_ the object seen, _c_ the
|
|
|
light, _a_ is the eye, _b_ the illuminating body, _c_ is the
|
|
|
illuminated object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
116.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let _a_ be the light, _b_ the eye, _c_ the object seen by the eye
|
|
|
and in the light. These show, first, the eye between the light and
|
|
|
the body; the 2nd, the light between the eye and the body; the 3rd
|
|
|
the body between the eye and the light, _a_ is the eye, _b_ the
|
|
|
illuminated object, _c_ the light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
117.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE THREE KINDS OF LIGHT THAT ILLUMINATE OPAQUE BODIES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first kind of Light which may illuminate opaque bodies is called
|
|
|
Direct light--as that of the sun or any other light from a window or
|
|
|
flame. The second is Diffused [universal] light, such as we see in
|
|
|
cloudy weather or in mist and the like. The 3rd is Subdued light,
|
|
|
that is when the sun is entirely below the horizon, either in the
|
|
|
evening or morning.
|
|
|
|
|
|
118.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The lights which may illuminate opaque bodies are of 4 kinds. These
|
|
|
are: diffused light as that of the atmosphere, within our horizon.
|
|
|
And Direct, as that of the sun, or of a window or door or other
|
|
|
opening. The third is Reflected light; and there is a 4th which is
|
|
|
that which passes through [semi] transparent bodies, as linen or
|
|
|
paper or the like, but not transparent like glass, or crystal, or
|
|
|
other diaphanous bodies, which produce the same effect as though
|
|
|
nothing intervened between the shaded object and the light that
|
|
|
falls upon it; and this we will discuss fully in our discourse.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Definition of the nature of shadows (119--122).
|
|
|
|
|
|
119.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHAT LIGHT AND SHADOW ARE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow is the absence of light, merely the obstruction of the
|
|
|
luminous rays by an opaque body. Shadow is of the nature of
|
|
|
darkness. Light [on an object] is of the nature of a luminous body;
|
|
|
one conceals and the other reveals. They are always associated and
|
|
|
inseparable from all objects. But shadow is a more powerful agent
|
|
|
than light, for it can impede and entirely deprive bodies of their
|
|
|
light, while light can never entirely expel shadow from a body, that
|
|
|
is from an opaque body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
120.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow is the diminution of light by the intervention of an opaque
|
|
|
body. Shadow is the counterpart of the luminous rays which are cut
|
|
|
off by an opaque body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is proved because the shadow cast is the same in shape and size
|
|
|
as the luminous rays were which are transformed into a shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
121.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow is the diminution alike of light and of darkness, and stands
|
|
|
between darkness and light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A shadow may be infinitely dark, and also of infinite degrees of
|
|
|
absence of darkness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The beginnings and ends of shadow lie between the light and darkness
|
|
|
and may be infinitely diminished and infinitely increased. Shadow is
|
|
|
the means by which bodies display their form.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The forms of bodies could not be understood in detail but for
|
|
|
shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
122.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE NATURE OF SHADOW.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow partakes of the nature of universal matter. All such matters
|
|
|
are more powerful in their beginning and grow weaker towards the
|
|
|
end, I say at the beginning, whatever their form or condition may be
|
|
|
and whether visible or invisible. And it is not from small
|
|
|
beginnings that they grow to a great size in time; as it might be a
|
|
|
great oak which has a feeble beginning from a small acorn. Yet I may
|
|
|
say that the oak is most powerful at its beginning, that is where it
|
|
|
springs from the earth, which is where it is largest (To return:)
|
|
|
Darkness, then, is the strongest degree of shadow and light is its
|
|
|
least. Therefore, O Painter, make your shadow darkest close to the
|
|
|
object that casts it, and make the end of it fading into light,
|
|
|
seeming to have no end.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of the various kinds of shadows. (123-125).
|
|
|
|
|
|
123.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Darkness is absence of light. Shadow is diminution of light.
|
|
|
Primitive shadow is that which is inseparable from a body not in the
|
|
|
light. Derived shadow is that which is disengaged from a body in
|
|
|
shadow and pervades the air. A cast transparent shadow is that which
|
|
|
is surrounded by an illuminated surface. A simple shadow is one
|
|
|
which receives no light from the luminous body which causes it. A
|
|
|
simple shadow begins within the line which starts from the edge of
|
|
|
the luminous body _a b_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
124.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A simple shadow is one where no light at all interferes with it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A compound shadow is one which is somewhat illuminated by one or
|
|
|
more lights.
|
|
|
|
|
|
125.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A SHADOW THAT IS INSEPARABLE FROM A
|
|
|
BODY AND A CAST SHADOW?
|
|
|
|
|
|
An inseparable shadow is that which is never absent from the
|
|
|
illuminated body. As, for instance a ball, which so long as it is in
|
|
|
the light always has one side in shadow which never leaves it for
|
|
|
any movement or change of position in the ball. A separate shadow
|
|
|
may be and may not be produced by the body itself. Suppose the ball
|
|
|
to be one braccia distant from a wall with a light on the opposite
|
|
|
side of it; this light will throw upon the wall exactly as broad a
|
|
|
shadow as is to be seen on the side of the ball that is turned
|
|
|
towards the wall. That portion of the cast shadow will not be
|
|
|
visible when the light is below the ball and the shadow is thrown up
|
|
|
towards the sky and finding no obstruction on its way is lost.
|
|
|
|
|
|
126.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW THERE ARE 2 KINDS OF LIGHT, ONE SEPARABLE FROM, AND THE OTHER
|
|
|
INSEPARABLE FROM BODIES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of the various kinds of light (126, 127).
|
|
|
|
|
|
Separate light is that which falls upon the body. Inseparable light
|
|
|
is the side of the body that is illuminated by that light. One is
|
|
|
called primary, the other derived. And, in the same way there are
|
|
|
two kinds of shadow:--One primary and the other derived. The primary
|
|
|
is that which is inseparable from the body, the derived is that
|
|
|
which proceeds from the body conveying to the surface of the wall
|
|
|
the form of the body causing it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
127.
|
|
|
|
|
|
How there are 2 different kinds of light; one being called diffused,
|
|
|
the other restricted. The diffused is that which freely illuminates
|
|
|
objects. The restricted is that which being admitted through an
|
|
|
opening or window illuminates them on that side only.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: At the spot marked _A_ in the first diagram Leonardo
|
|
|
wrote _lume costretto_ (restricted light). At the spot _B_ on the
|
|
|
second diagram he wrote _lume libero_ (diffused light).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
General remarks (128. 129).
|
|
|
|
|
|
128.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Light is the chaser away of darkness. Shade is the obstruction of
|
|
|
light. Primary light is that which falls on objects and causes light
|
|
|
and shade. And derived lights are those portions of a body which are
|
|
|
illuminated by the primary light. A primary shadow is that side of a
|
|
|
body on which the light cannot fall.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The general distribution of shadow and light is that sum total of
|
|
|
the rays thrown off by a shaded or illuminated body passing through
|
|
|
the air without any interference and the spot which intercepts and
|
|
|
cuts off the distribution of the dark and light rays.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And the eye can best distinguish the forms of objects when it is
|
|
|
placed between the shaded and the illuminated parts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
129.
|
|
|
|
|
|
MEMORANDUM OF THINGS I REQUIRE TO HAVE GRANTED [AS AXIOMS] IN MY
|
|
|
EXPLANATION OF PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I ask to have this much granted me--to assert that every ray
|
|
|
passing through air of equal density throughout, travels in a
|
|
|
straight line from its cause to the object or place it falls upon.
|
|
|
|
|
|
FIRST BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the nature of light (130. 131).
|
|
|
|
|
|
130.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The reason by which we know that a light radiates from a single
|
|
|
centre is this: We plainly see that a large light is often much
|
|
|
broader than some small object which nevertheless--and although the
|
|
|
rays [of the large light] are much more than twice the extent [of
|
|
|
the small body]--always has its shadow cast on the nearest surface
|
|
|
very visibly. Let _c f_ be a broad light and _n_ be the object in
|
|
|
front of it, casting a shadow on the plane, and let _a b_ be the
|
|
|
plane. It is clear that it is not the broad light that will cast the
|
|
|
shadow _n_ on the plane, but that the light has within it a centre
|
|
|
is shown by this experiment. The shadow falls on the plane as is
|
|
|
shown at _m o t r_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 13: In the original MS. no explanatory text is placed
|
|
|
after this title-line; but a space is left for it and the text
|
|
|
beginning at line 15 comes next.] Why, to two [eyes] or in front of
|
|
|
two eyes do 3 objects appear as two?
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why, when you estimate the direction of an object with two sights
|
|
|
the nearer appears confused. I say that the eye projects an infinite
|
|
|
number of lines which mingle or join those reaching it which come to
|
|
|
it from the object looked at. And it is only the central and
|
|
|
sensible line that can discern and discriminate colours and objects;
|
|
|
all the others are false and illusory. And if you place 2 objects at
|
|
|
half an arm's length apart if the nearer of the two is close to the
|
|
|
eye its form will remain far more confused than that of the second;
|
|
|
the reason is that the first is overcome by a greater number of
|
|
|
false lines than the second and so is rendered vague.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Light acts in the same manner, for in the effects of its lines
|
|
|
(=rays), and particularly in perspective, it much resembles the eye;
|
|
|
and its central rays are what cast the true shadow. When the object
|
|
|
in front of it is too quickly overcome with dim rays it will cast a
|
|
|
broad and disproportionate shadow, ill defined; but when the object
|
|
|
which is to cast the shadow and cuts off the rays near to the place
|
|
|
where the shadow falls, then the shadow is distinct; and the more so
|
|
|
in proportion as the light is far off, because at a long distance
|
|
|
the central ray is less overcome by false rays; because the lines
|
|
|
from the eye and the solar and other luminous rays passing through
|
|
|
the atmosphere are obliged to travel in straight lines. Unless they
|
|
|
are deflected by a denser or rarer air, when they will be bent at
|
|
|
some point, but so long as the air is free from grossness or
|
|
|
moisture they will preserve their direct course, always carrying the
|
|
|
image of the object that intercepts them back to their point of
|
|
|
origin. And if this is the eye, the intercepting object will be seen
|
|
|
by its colour, as well as by form and size. But if the intercepting
|
|
|
plane has in it some small perforation opening into a darker
|
|
|
chamber--not darker in colour, but by absence of light--you will see
|
|
|
the rays enter through this hole and transmitting to the plane
|
|
|
beyond all the details of the object they proceed from both as to
|
|
|
colour and form; only every thing will be upside down. But the size
|
|
|
[of the image] where the lines are reconstructed will be in
|
|
|
proportion to the relative distance of the aperture from the plane
|
|
|
on which the lines fall [on one hand] and from their origin [on the
|
|
|
other]. There they intersect and form 2 pyramids with their point
|
|
|
meeting [a common apex] and their bases opposite. Let _a b_ be the
|
|
|
point of origin of the lines, _d e_ the first plane, and _c_ the
|
|
|
aperture with the intersection of the lines; _f g_ is the inner
|
|
|
plane. You will find that _a_ falls upon the inner plane below at
|
|
|
_g_, and _b_ which is below will go up to the spot _f_; it will be
|
|
|
quite evident to experimenters that every luminous body has in
|
|
|
itself a core or centre, from which and to which all the lines
|
|
|
radiate which are sent forth by the surface of the luminous body and
|
|
|
reflected back to it; or which, having been thrown out and not
|
|
|
intercepted, are dispersed in the air.
|
|
|
|
|
|
131.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE RAYS WHETHER SHADED OR LUMINOUS HAVE GREATER STRENGTH AND EFFECT
|
|
|
AT THEIR POINTS THAN AT THEIR SIDES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Although the points of luminous pyramids may extend into shaded
|
|
|
places and those of pyramids of shadow into illuminated places, and
|
|
|
though among the luminous pyramids one may start from a broader base
|
|
|
than another; nevertheless, if by reason of their various length
|
|
|
these luminous pyramids acquire angles of equal size their light
|
|
|
will be equal; and the case will be the same with the pyramids of
|
|
|
shadow; as may be seen in the intersected pyramids _a b c_ and _d e
|
|
|
f_, which though their bases differ in size are equal as to breadth
|
|
|
and light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 51--55: This supplementary paragraph is indicated as being
|
|
|
a continuation of line 45, by two small crosses.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The difference between light and lustre (132--135).
|
|
|
|
|
|
132.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of the difference between light and lustre; and that lustre is not
|
|
|
included among colours, but is saturation of whiteness, and derived
|
|
|
from the surface of wet bodies; light partakes of the colour of the
|
|
|
object which reflects it (to the eye) as gold or silver or the like.
|
|
|
|
|
|
133.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE HIGHEST LIGHTS WHICH TURN AND MOVE AS THE EYE MOVES WHICH
|
|
|
SEES THE OBJECT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Suppose the body to be the round object figured here and let the
|
|
|
light be at the point _a_, and let the illuminated side of the
|
|
|
object be _b c_ and the eye at the point _d_: I say that, as lustre
|
|
|
is every where and complete in each part, if you stand at the point
|
|
|
_d_ the lustre will appear at _c_, and in proportion as the eye
|
|
|
moves from _d_ to _a_, the lustre will move from _c_ to _n_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
134.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Heigh light or lustre on any object is not situated [necessarily] in
|
|
|
the middle of an illuminated object, but moves as and where the eye
|
|
|
moves in looking at it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
135.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LIGHT AND LUSTRE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
What is the difference between light and the lustre which is seen on
|
|
|
the polished surface of opaque bodies?
|
|
|
|
|
|
The lights which are produced from the polished surface of opaque
|
|
|
bodies will be stationary on stationary objects even if the eye on
|
|
|
which they strike moves. But reflected lights will, on those same
|
|
|
objects, appear in as many different places on the surface as
|
|
|
different positions are taken by the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHAT BODIES HAVE LIGHT UPON THEM WITHOUT LUSTRE?
|
|
|
|
|
|
Opaque bodies which have a hard and rough surface never display any
|
|
|
lustre in any portion of the side on which the light falls.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHAT BODIES WILL DISPLAY LUSTRE BUT NOT LOOK ILLUMINATED?
|
|
|
|
|
|
Those bodies which are opaque and hard with a hard surface reflect
|
|
|
light [lustre] from every spot on the illuminated side which is in a
|
|
|
position to receive light at the same angle of incidence as they
|
|
|
occupy with regard to the eye; but, as the surface mirrors all the
|
|
|
surrounding objects, the illuminated [body] is not recognisable in
|
|
|
these portions of the illuminated body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
136.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relations of luminous to illuminated bodies.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The middle of the light and shade on an object in light and shade is
|
|
|
opposite to the middle of the primary light. All light and shadow
|
|
|
expresses itself in pyramidal lines. The middle of the shadow on any
|
|
|
object must necessarily be opposite the middle of its light, with a
|
|
|
direct line passing through the centre of the body. The middle of
|
|
|
the light will be at _a_, that of the shadow at _b_. [Again, in
|
|
|
bodies shown in light and shade the middle of each must coincide
|
|
|
with the centre of the body, and a straight line will pass through
|
|
|
both and through that centre.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the original MS., at the spot marked _a_ of the first
|
|
|
diagram Leonardo wrote _primitiuo_, and at the spot marked
|
|
|
_c_--_primitiva_ (primary); at the spot marked _b_ he wrote
|
|
|
_dirivatiuo_ and at _d deriuatiua_ (derived).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Experiments on the relation of light and shadow within a room
|
|
|
(137--140).
|
|
|
|
|
|
137.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SHOWS HOW LIGHT FROM ANY SIDE CONVERGES TO ONE POINT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Although the balls _a b c_ are lighted from one window,
|
|
|
nevertheless, if you follow the lines of their shadows you will see
|
|
|
they intersect at a point forming the angle _n_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this passage is slightly
|
|
|
sketched on Pl. XXXII; a square with three balls below it. The first
|
|
|
three lines of the text belonging to it are written above the sketch
|
|
|
and the six others below it.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
138.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every shadow cast by a body has a central line directed to a single
|
|
|
point produced by the intersection of luminous lines in the middle
|
|
|
of the opening and thickness of the window. The proposition stated
|
|
|
above, is plainly seen by experiment. Thus if you draw a place with
|
|
|
a window looking northwards, and let this be _s f_, you will see a
|
|
|
line starting from the horizon to the east, which, touching the 2
|
|
|
angles of the window _o f_, reaches _d_; and from the horizon on the
|
|
|
west another line, touching the other 2 angles _r s_, and ending at
|
|
|
_c_; and their intersection falls exactly in the middle of the
|
|
|
opening and thickness of the window. Again, you can still better
|
|
|
confirm this proof by placing two sticks, as shown at _g h_; and you
|
|
|
will see the line drawn from the centre of the shadow directed to
|
|
|
the centre _m_ and prolonged to the horizon _n f_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: _B_ here stands for _cerchio del' orizonte tramontano_ on
|
|
|
the original diagram (the circle of the horizon towards the North);
|
|
|
_A_ for _levante_ (East) and _C_ for _ponete_ (West).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
139.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every shadow with all its variations, which becomes larger as its
|
|
|
distance from the object is greater, has its external lines
|
|
|
intersecting in the middle, between the light and the object. This
|
|
|
proposition is very evident and is confirmed by experience. For, if
|
|
|
_a b_ is a window without any object interposed, the luminous
|
|
|
atmosphere to the right hand at _a_ is seen to the left at _d_. And
|
|
|
the atmosphere at the left illuminates on the right at _c_, and the
|
|
|
lines intersect at the point _m_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: _A_ here stands for _levante_ (East), _B_ for _ponente_
|
|
|
(West).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
140.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every body in light and shade is situated between 2 pyramids one
|
|
|
dark and the other luminous, one is visible the other is not. But
|
|
|
this only happens when the light enters by a window. Supposing _a b_
|
|
|
to be the window and _r_ the body in light and shade, the light to
|
|
|
the right hand _z_ will pass the object to the left and go on to
|
|
|
_p_; the light to the left at _k_ will pass to the right of the
|
|
|
object at _i_ and go on to _m_ and the two lines will intersect at
|
|
|
_c_ and form a pyramid. Then again _a_ _b_ falls on the shaded body
|
|
|
at _i_ _g_ and forms a pyramid _f_ _i_ _g_. _f_ will be dark because
|
|
|
the light _a_ _b_ can never fall there; _i_ _g_ _c_ will be
|
|
|
illuminated because the light falls upon it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Light and shadow with regard to the position of the eye (141--145).
|
|
|
|
|
|
141.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every shaded body that is larger than the pupil and that interposes
|
|
|
between the luminous body and the eye will be seen dark.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the eye is placed between the luminous body and the objects
|
|
|
illuminated by it, these objects will be seen without any shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram which in the original stands above line 1 is
|
|
|
given on Plate II, No 2. Then, after a blank space of about eight
|
|
|
lines, the diagram Plate II No 3 is placed in the original. There is
|
|
|
no explanation of it beyond the one line written under it.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
142.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why the 2 lights one on each side of a body having two pyramidal
|
|
|
sides of an obtuse apex leave it devoid of shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The sketch illustrating this is on Plate XLI No 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
143.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A body in shadow situated between the light and the eye can never
|
|
|
display its illuminated portion unless the eye can see the whole of
|
|
|
the primary light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: _A_ stands for _corpo_ (body), _B_ for _lume_ (light).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
144.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The eye which looks (at a spot) half way between the shadow and the
|
|
|
light which surrounds the body in shadow will see that the deepest
|
|
|
shadows on that body will meet the eye at equal angles, that is at
|
|
|
the same angle as that of sight.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In both these diagrams _A_ stands for _lume_ (light) _B_
|
|
|
for _ombra_ (shadow).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
145.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE DIFFERENT LIGHT AND SHADE IN VARIOUS ASPECTS AND OF OBJECTS
|
|
|
PLACED IN THEM.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the sun is in the East and you look towards the West you will see
|
|
|
every thing in full light and totally without shadow because you see
|
|
|
them from the same side as the sun: and if you look towards the
|
|
|
South or North you will see all objects in light and shade, because
|
|
|
you see both the side towards the sun and the side away from it; and
|
|
|
if you look towards the coming of the sun all objects will show you
|
|
|
their shaded side, because on that side the sun cannot fall upon
|
|
|
them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The law of the incidence of light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
146.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The edges of a window which are illuminated by 2 lights of equal
|
|
|
degrees of brightness will not reflect light of equal brightness
|
|
|
into the chamber within.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If _b_ is a candle and _a c_ our hemisphere both will illuminate the
|
|
|
edges of the window _m_ _n_, but light _b_ will only illuminate _f
|
|
|
g_ and the hemisphere _a_ will light all of _d e_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
147.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That part of a body which receives the luminous rays at equal angles
|
|
|
will be in a higher light than any other part of it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And the part which the luminous rays strike between less equal
|
|
|
angles will be less strongly illuminated.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECOND BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Gradations of strength in the shadows (148. 149).
|
|
|
|
|
|
148.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THAT PORTION OF A BODY IN LIGHT AND SHADE WILL BE LEAST LUMINOUS
|
|
|
WHICH IS SEEN UNDER THE LEAST AMOUNT OF LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That part of the object which is marked _m_ is in the highest light
|
|
|
because it faces the window _a d_ by the line _a f_; _n_ is in the
|
|
|
second grade because the light _b d_ strikes it by the line _b e_;
|
|
|
_o_ is in the third grade, as the light falls on it from _c d_ by
|
|
|
the line _c h_; _p_ is the lowest light but one as _c d_ falls on it
|
|
|
by the line _d v_; _q_ is the deepest shadow for no light falls on
|
|
|
it from any part of the window.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In proportion as _c d_ goes into _a d_ so will _n r s_ be darker
|
|
|
than _m_, and all the rest is space without shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this chapter is No. 1 on Plate
|
|
|
III. The letters _a b e d_ and _r_ are not reproduced in facsimile
|
|
|
of the original, but have been replaced by ordinary type in the
|
|
|
margin. 5-12. The original text of these lines is reproduced within
|
|
|
the diagram.--Compare No 275.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
149.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The light which falls on a shaded body at the acutest angle receives
|
|
|
the highest light, and the darkest portion is that which receives it
|
|
|
at an obtuse angle and both the light and the shadow form pyramids.
|
|
|
The angle _c_ receives the highest grade of light because it is
|
|
|
directly in front of the window _a b_ and the whole horizon of the
|
|
|
sky _m x_. The angle _a_ differs but little from _c_ because the
|
|
|
angles which divide it are not so unequal as those below, and only
|
|
|
that portion of the horizon is intercepted which lies between _y_
|
|
|
and _x_. Although it gains as much on the other side its line is
|
|
|
nevertheless not very strong because one angle is smaller than its
|
|
|
fellow. The angles _e i_ will have less light because they do not
|
|
|
see much of the light _m s_ and the light _v x_ and their angles are
|
|
|
very unequal. Yhe angle _k_ and the angle _f_ are each placed
|
|
|
between very unequal angles and therefore have but little light,
|
|
|
because at _k_ it has only the light _p t_, and at _f_ only _t q_;
|
|
|
_o g_ is the lowest grade of light because this part has no light at
|
|
|
all from the sky; and thence come the lines which will reconstruct a
|
|
|
pyramid that is the counterpart of the pyramid _c_; and this pyramid
|
|
|
_l_ is in the first grade of shadow; for this too is placed between
|
|
|
equal angles directly opposite to each other on either side of a
|
|
|
straight line which passes through the centre of the body and goes
|
|
|
to the centre of the light. The several luminous images cast within
|
|
|
the frame of the window at the points _a_ and _b_ make a light which
|
|
|
surrounds the derived shadow cast by the solid body at the points 4
|
|
|
and 6. The shaded images increase from _o g_ and end at 7 and 8.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this chapter is No. 2 on Plate
|
|
|
III. In the original it is placed between lines 3 and 4, and in the
|
|
|
reproduction these are shown in part. The semi circle above is
|
|
|
marked _orizonte_ (horizon). The number 6 at the left hand side,
|
|
|
outside the facsimile, is in the place of a figure which has become
|
|
|
indistinct in the original.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the intensity of shadows as dependent on the distance from the
|
|
|
light (150-152).
|
|
|
|
|
|
150.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The smaller the light that falls upon an object the more shadow it
|
|
|
will display. And the light will illuminate a smaller portion of the
|
|
|
object in proportion as it is nearer to it; and conversely, a larger
|
|
|
extent of it in proportion as it is farther off.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A light which is smaller than the object on which it falls will
|
|
|
light up a smaller extent of it in proportion as it is nearer to it,
|
|
|
and the converse, as it is farther from it. But when the light is
|
|
|
larger than the object illuminated it will light a larger extent of
|
|
|
the object in proportion as it is nearer and the converse when they
|
|
|
are farther apart.
|
|
|
|
|
|
151.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That portion of an illuminated object which is nearest to the source
|
|
|
of light will be the most strongly illuminated.
|
|
|
|
|
|
152.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That portion of the primary shadow will be least dark which is
|
|
|
farthest from the edges.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The derived shadow will be darker than the primary shadow where it
|
|
|
is contiguous with it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the proportion of light and shade (153-157).
|
|
|
|
|
|
153.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That portion of an opaque body will be more in shade or more in
|
|
|
light, which is nearer to the dark body, by which it is shaded, or
|
|
|
to the light that illuminates it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects seen in light and shade show in greater relief than those
|
|
|
which are wholly in light or in shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
154.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shaded and illuminated sides of opaque objects will display the
|
|
|
same proportion of light and darkness as their objects [Footnote 6:
|
|
|
The meaning of _obbietti_ (objects) is explained in no 153, lines
|
|
|
1-4.--Between the title-line and the next there is, in the
|
|
|
original, a small diagram representing a circle described round a
|
|
|
square.].
|
|
|
|
|
|
155.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The outlines and form of any part of a body in light and shade are
|
|
|
indistinct in the shadows and in the high lights; but in the
|
|
|
portions between the light and the shadows they are highly
|
|
|
conspicuous.
|
|
|
|
|
|
156.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Among objects in various degrees of shade, when the light proceeds
|
|
|
from a single source, there will be the same proportion in their
|
|
|
shadows as in the natural diminution of the light and the same must
|
|
|
be understood of the degrees of light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
157.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A single and distinct luminous body causes stronger relief in the
|
|
|
object than a diffused light; as may be seen by comparing one side
|
|
|
of a landscape illuminated by the sun, and one overshadowed by
|
|
|
clouds, and so illuminated only by the diffused light of the
|
|
|
atmosphere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THIRD BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Definition of derived shadow (158. 159).
|
|
|
|
|
|
158.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Derived shadow cannot exist without primary shadow. This is proved
|
|
|
by the first of this which says: Darkness is the total absence of
|
|
|
light, and shadow is an alleviation of darkness and of light, and it
|
|
|
is more or less dark or light in proportion as the darkness is
|
|
|
modified by the light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
159.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow is diminution of light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Darkness is absence of light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow is divided into two kinds, of which the first is called
|
|
|
primary shadow, the second is derived shadow. The primary shadow is
|
|
|
always the basis of the derived shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The edges of the derived shadow are straight lines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The theory of the _ombra_ dirivativa_--a technical
|
|
|
expression for which there is no precise English equivalent is
|
|
|
elaborately treated by Leonardo. But both text and diagrams (as Pl.
|
|
|
IV, 1-3 and Pl. V) must at once convince the student that the
|
|
|
distinction he makes between _ombra primitiva_ and _ombra
|
|
|
dirivativa_ is not merely justifiable but scientific. _Ombra
|
|
|
dirivativa_ is by no means a mere abstract idea. This is easily
|
|
|
proved by repeating the experiment made by Leonardo, and by filling
|
|
|
with smoke the room in which the existence of the _ombra dirivativa_
|
|
|
is investigated, when the shadow becomes visible. Nor is it
|
|
|
difficult to perceive how much of Leonardo's teaching depended on
|
|
|
this theory. The recognised, but extremely complicated science of
|
|
|
cast shadows--_percussione dell' ombre dirivative_ as Leonardo
|
|
|
calls them--is thus rendered more intelligible if not actually
|
|
|
simpler, and we must assume this theory as our chief guide through
|
|
|
the investigations which follow.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The darkness of the derived shadow diminishes in proportion as it is
|
|
|
remote from the primary shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Different sorts of derived shadows (160-162).
|
|
|
|
|
|
160.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SHADOW AND LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The forms of shadows are three: inasmuch as if the solid body which
|
|
|
casts the shadow is equal (in size) to the light, the shadow
|
|
|
resembles a column without any termination (in length). If the body
|
|
|
is larger than the light the shadow resembles a truncated and
|
|
|
inverted pyramid, and its length has also no defined termination.
|
|
|
But if the body is smaller than the light, the shadow will resemble
|
|
|
a pyramid and come to an end, as is seen in eclipses of the moon.
|
|
|
|
|
|
161.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF SIMPLE DERIVED SHADOWS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The simple derived shadow is of two kinds: one kind which has its
|
|
|
length defined, and two kinds which are undefined; and the defined
|
|
|
shadow is pyramidal. Of the two undefined, one is a column and the
|
|
|
other spreads out; and all three have rectilinear outlines. But the
|
|
|
converging, that is the pyramidal, shadow proceeds from a body that
|
|
|
is smaller than the light, and the columnar from a body equal in
|
|
|
size to the light, and the spreading shadow from a body larger than
|
|
|
the light; &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF COMPOUND DERIVED SHADOWS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compound derived shadows are of two kinds; that is columnar and
|
|
|
spreading.
|
|
|
|
|
|
162.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF SHADOW.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Derived shadows are of three kinds of which one is spreading, the
|
|
|
second columnar, the third converging to the point where the two
|
|
|
sides meet and intersect, and beyond this intersection the sides are
|
|
|
infinitely prolonged or straight lines. And if you say, this shadow
|
|
|
must terminate at the angle where the sides meet and extend no
|
|
|
farther, I deny this, because above in the first on shadow I have
|
|
|
proved: that a thing is completely terminated when no portion of it
|
|
|
goes beyond its terminating lines. Now here, in this shadow, we see
|
|
|
the converse of this, in as much as where this derived shadow
|
|
|
originates we obviously have the figures of two pyramids of shadow
|
|
|
which meet at their angles. Hence, if, as [my] opponent says, the
|
|
|
first pyramid of shadow terminates the derivative shadow at the
|
|
|
angle whence it starts, then the second pyramid of shadow--so says
|
|
|
the adversary--must be caused by the angle and not from the body in
|
|
|
shadow; and this is disproved with the help of the 2nd of this which
|
|
|
says: Shadow is a condition produced by a body casting a shadow, and
|
|
|
interposed between this shadow and the luminous body. By this it is
|
|
|
made clear that the shadow is not produced by the angle of the
|
|
|
derived shadow but only by the body casting the shadow; &c. If a
|
|
|
spherical solid body is illuminated by a light of elongated form the
|
|
|
shadow produced by the longest portion of this light will have less
|
|
|
defined outlines than that which is produced by the breadth of the
|
|
|
same light. And this is proved by what was said before, which is:
|
|
|
That a shadow will have less defined outlines in proportion as the
|
|
|
light which causes it is larger, and conversely, the outlines are
|
|
|
clearer in proportion as it is smaller.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The two diagrams to this chapter are on Plate IV, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the relation of derived and primary shadow (163-165).
|
|
|
|
|
|
163.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The derived shadow can never resemble the body from which it
|
|
|
proceeds unless the light is of the same form and size as the body
|
|
|
causing the shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The derived shadow cannot be of the same form as the primary shadow
|
|
|
unless it is intercepted by a plane parallel to it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
164.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW A CAST SHADOW CAN NEVER BE OF THE SAME SIZE AS THE BODY THAT
|
|
|
CASTS IT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the rays of light proceed, as experience shows, from a single
|
|
|
point and are diffused in a sphere round this point, radiating and
|
|
|
dispersed through the air, the farther they spread the wider they
|
|
|
must spread; and an object placed between the light and a wall is
|
|
|
always imaged larger in its shadow, because the rays that strike it
|
|
|
[Footnote: 7. The following lines are wanting to complete the
|
|
|
logical connection.] would, by the time they have reached the wall,
|
|
|
have become larger.
|
|
|
|
|
|
165.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Any shadow cast by a body in light and shade is of the same nature
|
|
|
and character as that which is inseparable from the body. The centre
|
|
|
of the length of a shadow always corresponds to that of the luminous
|
|
|
body [Footnote 6: This second statement of the same idea as in the
|
|
|
former sentence, but in different words, does not, in the original,
|
|
|
come next to the foregoing; sections 172 and 127 are placed between
|
|
|
them.]. It is inevitable that every shadow must have its centre in a
|
|
|
line with the centre of the light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the shape of derived shadows (166-174).
|
|
|
|
|
|
166.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE PYRAMIDAL SHADOW.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pyramidal shadow produced by a columnar body will be narrower
|
|
|
than the body itself in proportion as the simple derived shadow is
|
|
|
intersected farther from the body which casts it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 166: Compare the first diagram to No. 161. If we here
|
|
|
conceive of the outlines of the pyramid of shadow on the ground as
|
|
|
prolonged beyond its apex this gives rise to a second pyramid; this
|
|
|
is what is spoken of at the beginning of No. 166.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
167.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The cast shadow will be longest when the light is lowest.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The cast shadow will be shortest when the light is highest.
|
|
|
|
|
|
168.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Both the primary and derived shadow will be larger when caused by
|
|
|
the light of a candle than by diffused light. The difference between
|
|
|
the larger and smaller shadows will be in inverse proportion to the
|
|
|
larger and smaller lights causing them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the diagrams _A_ stands for _celo_ (sky), _B_ for
|
|
|
_cadela_ (candle).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
169.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ALL BODIES, IN PROPORTION AS THEY ARE NEARER TO, OR FARTHER FROM THE
|
|
|
SOURCE OF LIGHT, WILL PRODUCE LONGER OR SHORTER DERIVED SHADOWS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Among bodies of equal size, that one which is illuminated by the
|
|
|
largest light will have the shortest shadow. Experiment confirms
|
|
|
this proposition. Thus the body _m_ _n_ is surrounded by a larger
|
|
|
amount of light than the body _p q_, as is shown above. Let us say
|
|
|
that _v c a b d x_ is the sky, the source of light, and that _s t_
|
|
|
is a window by which the luminous rays enter, and so _m n_ and _p q_
|
|
|
are bodies in light and shade as exposed to this light; _m n_ will
|
|
|
have a small derived shadow, because its original shadow will be
|
|
|
small; and the derivative light will be large, again, because the
|
|
|
original light _c d_ will be large and _p q_ will have more derived
|
|
|
shadow because its original shadow will be larger, and its derived
|
|
|
light will be smaller than that of the body _m n_ because that
|
|
|
portion of the hemisphere _a b_ which illuminates it is smaller than
|
|
|
the hemisphere _c d_ which illuminates the body _m n_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram, given on Pl. IV, No. 2, stands in the
|
|
|
original between lines 2 and 7, while the text of lines 3 to 6 is
|
|
|
written on its left side. In the reproduction of this diagram the
|
|
|
letter _v_ at the outer right-hand end has been omitted.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
170.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadow _m_ bears the same proportion to the shadow _n_ as the
|
|
|
line _b c_ to the line _f c_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
171.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of different shadows of equal strength that which is nearest the eye
|
|
|
will seem the least strong.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why is the shadow _e a b_ in the first grade of strength, _b c_ in
|
|
|
the second; _c d_ in the third? The reason is that as from _e a b_
|
|
|
the sky is nowhere visible, it gets no light whatever from the sky,
|
|
|
and so has no direct [primary] light. _b c_ faces the portion of the
|
|
|
sky _f g_ and is illuminated by it. _c d_ faces the sky at _h k_. _c
|
|
|
d_, being exposed to a larger extent of sky than _b c_, it is
|
|
|
reasonable that it should be more lighted. And thus, up to a certain
|
|
|
distance, the wall _a d_ will grow lighter for the reasons here
|
|
|
given, until the darkness of the room overpowers the light from the
|
|
|
window.
|
|
|
|
|
|
172.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the light of the atmosphere is restricted [by an opening] and
|
|
|
illuminates bodies which cast shadows, these bodies being equally
|
|
|
distant from the centre of the window, that which is most obliquely
|
|
|
placed will cast the largest shadow beyond it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
173.
|
|
|
|
|
|
These bodies standing apart in a room lighted by a single window
|
|
|
will have derivative shadows more or less short according as they
|
|
|
are more or less opposite to the window. Among the shadows cast by
|
|
|
bodies of equal mass but at unequal distances from the opening by
|
|
|
which they are illuminated, that shadow will be the longest of the
|
|
|
body which is least in the light. And in proportion as one body is
|
|
|
better illuminated than another its shadow will be shorter than
|
|
|
another. The proportion _n m_ and _e v k_ bear to _r t_ and _v x_
|
|
|
corresponds with that of the shadow _x_ to 4 and _y_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The reason why those bodies which are placed most in front of the
|
|
|
middle of the window throw shorter shadows than those obliquely
|
|
|
situated is:--That the window appears in its proper form and to the
|
|
|
obliquely placed ones it appears foreshortened; to those in the
|
|
|
middle, the window shows its full size, to the oblique ones it
|
|
|
appears smaller; the one in the middle faces the whole hemisphere
|
|
|
that is _e f_ and those on the side have only a strip; that is _q r_
|
|
|
faces _a b_; and _m n_ faces _c d_; the body in the middle having a
|
|
|
larger quantity of light than those at the sides is lighted from a
|
|
|
point much below its centre, and thus the shadow is shorter. And the
|
|
|
pyramid _g_ 4 goes into _l y_ exactly as often as _a b_ goes into _e
|
|
|
f_. The axis of every derivative shadow passes through 6 1/2
|
|
|
[Footnote 31: _passa per_ 6 1/2 (passes through 6 1/2). The meaning
|
|
|
of these words is probably this: Each of the three axes of the
|
|
|
derived shadow intersects the centre (_mezzo_) of the primary shadow
|
|
|
(_ombra originale_) and, by prolongation upwards crosses six lines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is self evident only in the middle diagram; but it is equally
|
|
|
true of the side figures if we conceive of the lines 4 _f_, _x n v
|
|
|
m_, _y l k v_, and 4 _e_, as prolonged beyond the semicircle of the
|
|
|
horizon.] and is in a straight line with the centre of the primary
|
|
|
shadow, with the centre of the body casting it and of the derivative
|
|
|
light and with the centre of the window and, finally, with the
|
|
|
centre of that portion of the source of light which is the celestial
|
|
|
hemisphere, _y h_ is the centre of the derived shade, _l h_ of the
|
|
|
primary shadow, _l_ of the body throwing it, _l k_ of the derived
|
|
|
light, _v_ is the centre of the window, _e_ is the final centre of
|
|
|
the original light afforded by that portion of the hemisphere of the
|
|
|
sky which illuminates the solid body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Compare the diagram on Pl. IV, No. 3. In the original
|
|
|
this drawing is placed between lines 3 and 22; the rest, from line 4
|
|
|
to line 21, is written on the left hand margin.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
174.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE FARTHER THE DERIVED SHADOW IS PROLONGED THE LIGHTER IT BECOMES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will find that the proportion of the diameter of the derived
|
|
|
shadow to that of the primary shadow will be the same as that
|
|
|
between the darkness of the primary shadow and that of the derived
|
|
|
shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 6: Compare No. 177.] Let _a b_ be the diameter of the
|
|
|
primary shadow and _c d_ that of the derived shadow, I say that _a
|
|
|
b_ going, as you see, three times into _d c_, the shadow _d c_ will
|
|
|
be three times as light as the shadow _a b_. [Footnote 8: Compare
|
|
|
No. 177.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the size of the illuminating body is larger than that of the
|
|
|
illuminated body an intersection of shadow will occur, beyond which
|
|
|
the shadows will run off in two opposite directions as if they were
|
|
|
caused by two separate lights.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the relative intensity of derived shadows (175-179).
|
|
|
|
|
|
175.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The derived shadow is stronger in proportion as it is nearer to its
|
|
|
place of origin.
|
|
|
|
|
|
176.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW SHADOWS FADE AWAY AT LONG DISTANCES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadows fade and are lost at long distances because the larger
|
|
|
quantity of illuminated air which lies between the eye and the
|
|
|
object seen tints the shadow with its own colour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
177.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b_ will be darker than _c d_ in proportion as _c d_ is broader
|
|
|
than _a b_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the original MS. the word _lume_ (light) is written at
|
|
|
the apex of the pyramid.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
178.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It can be proved why the shadow _o p c h_ is darker in proportion as
|
|
|
it is nearer to the line _p h_ and is lighter in proportion as it is
|
|
|
nearer to the line _o c_. Let the light _a b_, be a window, and let
|
|
|
the dark wall in which this window is, be _b s_, that is, one of the
|
|
|
sides of the wall.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then we may say that the line _p h_ is darker than any other part of
|
|
|
the space _o p c h_, because this line faces the whole surface in
|
|
|
shadow of [Footnote: In the original the diagram is placed between
|
|
|
lines 27 and 28.] the wall _b s_. The line _o c_ is lighter than the
|
|
|
other part of this space _o p c h_, because this line faces the
|
|
|
luminous space _a b_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where the shadow is larger, or smaller, or equal the body which
|
|
|
casts it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[First of the character of divided lights. [Footnote 14: _lumi
|
|
|
divisi_. The text here breaks off abruptly.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE COMPOUND SHADOW _F, R, C, H_ CAUSED BY A SINGLE LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadow _f r c h_ is under such conditions as that where it is
|
|
|
farthest from its inner side it loses depth in proportion. To prove
|
|
|
this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let _d a_, be the light and _f n_ the solid body, and let _a e_ be
|
|
|
one of the side walls of the window that is _d a_. Then I
|
|
|
say--according to the 2nd [proposition]: that the surface of any
|
|
|
body is affected by the tone of the objects surrounding it,--that
|
|
|
the side _r c_, which faces the dark wall _a e_ must participate of
|
|
|
its darkness and, in the same way that the outer surface which faces
|
|
|
the light _d a_ participates of the light; thus we get the outlines
|
|
|
of the extremes on each side of the centre included between them.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is divided into four parts. The first the extremes, which
|
|
|
include the compound shadow, secondly the compound shadow between
|
|
|
these extremes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
179.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE ACTION OF THE LIGHT AS FROM ITS CENTRE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If it were the whole of the light that caused the shadows beyond the
|
|
|
bodies placed in front of it, it would follow that any body much
|
|
|
smaller than the light would cast a pyramidal shadow; but experience
|
|
|
not showing this, it must be the centre of the light that produces
|
|
|
this effect.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this passage is between lines 4
|
|
|
and 5 in the original. Comp. the reproduction Pl. IV, No. 4. The
|
|
|
text and drawing of this chapter have already been published with
|
|
|
tolerable accuracy. See M. JORDAN: "_Das Malerbuch des Leonardo da
|
|
|
Vinci_". Leipzig 1873, P. 90.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
PROOF.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let _a b_ be the width of the light from a window, which falls on a
|
|
|
stick set up at one foot from _a c_ [Footnote 6: _bastone_ (stick).
|
|
|
The diagram has a sphere in place of a stick.]. And let _a d_ be the
|
|
|
space where all the light from the window is visible. At _c e_ that
|
|
|
part of the window which is between _l b_ cannot be seen. In the
|
|
|
same way _a m_ cannot be seen from _d f_ and therefore in these two
|
|
|
portions the light begins to fail.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow as produced by two lights of different size (180. 181).
|
|
|
|
|
|
180.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A body in light and shade placed between two equal lights side by
|
|
|
side will cast shadows in proportion to the [amount of] light. And
|
|
|
the shadows will be one darker than the other in proportion as one
|
|
|
light is nearer to the said body than the other on the opposite
|
|
|
side.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A body placed at an equal distance between two lights will cast two
|
|
|
shadows, one deeper than the other in proportion, as the light which
|
|
|
causes it is brighter than the other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the MS. the larger diagram is placed above the first
|
|
|
line; the smaller one between l. 4 & 5.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
181.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A light which is smaller than the body it illuminates produces
|
|
|
shadows of which the outlines end within [the surface of] the body,
|
|
|
and not much compound shadow; and falls on less than half of it. A
|
|
|
light which is larger than the body it illuminates, falls on more
|
|
|
than half of it, and produces much compound shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The effect of light at different distances.
|
|
|
|
|
|
182.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE SHADOW CAST BY A BODY PLACED BETWEEN 2 EQUAL LIGHTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A body placed between 2 equal lights will cast 2 shadows of itself
|
|
|
in the direction of the lines of the 2 lights; and if you move this
|
|
|
body placing it nearer to one of the lights the shadow cast towards
|
|
|
the nearer light will be less deep than that which falls towards the
|
|
|
more distant one.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Further complications in the derived shadows (183-187).
|
|
|
|
|
|
183.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The greatest depth of shadow is in the simple derived shadow because
|
|
|
it is not lighted by either of the two lights _a b, c d_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The next less deep shadow is the derived shadow _e f n_; and in this
|
|
|
the shadow is less by half, because it is illuminated by a single
|
|
|
light, that is _c d_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is uniform in natural tone because it is lighted throughout by
|
|
|
one only of the two luminous bodies [10]. But it varies with the
|
|
|
conditions of shadow, inasmuch as the farther it is away from the
|
|
|
light the less it is illuminated by it [13].
|
|
|
|
|
|
The third degree of depth is the middle shadow [Footnote 15: We
|
|
|
gather from what follows that _q g r_ here means _ombra media_ (the
|
|
|
middle shadow).]. But this is not uniform in natural tone; because
|
|
|
the nearer it gets to the simple derived shadow the deeper it is
|
|
|
[Footnote 18: Compare lines 10-13], and it is the uniformly gradual
|
|
|
diminution by increase of distance which is what modifies it
|
|
|
[Footnote 20: See Footnote 18]: that is to say the depth of a shadow
|
|
|
increases in proportion to the distance from the two lights.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The fourth is the shadow _k r s_ and this is all the darker in
|
|
|
natural tone in proportion as it is nearer to _k s_, because it gets
|
|
|
less of the light _a o_, but by the accident [of distance] it is
|
|
|
rendered less deep, because it is nearer to the light _c d_, and
|
|
|
thus is always exposed to both lights.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The fifth is less deep in shadow than either of the others because
|
|
|
it is always entirely exposed to one of the lights and to the whole
|
|
|
or part of the other; and it is less deep in proportion as it is
|
|
|
nearer to the two lights, and in proportion as it is turned towards
|
|
|
the outer side _x t_; because it is more exposed to the second light
|
|
|
_a b_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram to this section is given on Pl. V. To the
|
|
|
left is the facsimile of the beginning of the text belonging to it.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
184.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF SIMPLE SHADOWS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why, at the intersections _a_, _b_ of the two compound shadows _e f_
|
|
|
and _m e_, is a simple shadow pfoduced as at _e h_ and _m g_, while
|
|
|
no such simple shadow is produced at the other two intersections _c
|
|
|
d_ made by the very same compound shadows?
|
|
|
|
|
|
ANSWER.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compound shadow are a mixture of light and shade and simple shadows
|
|
|
are simply darkness. Hence, of the two lights _n_ and _o_, one falls
|
|
|
on the compound shadow from one side, and the other on the compound
|
|
|
shadow from the other side, but where they intersect no light falls,
|
|
|
as at _a b_; therefore it is a simple shadow. Where there is a
|
|
|
compound shadow one light or the other falls; and here a difficulty
|
|
|
arises for my adversary since he says that, where the compound
|
|
|
shadows intersect, both the lights which produce the shadows must of
|
|
|
necessity fall and therefore these shadows ought to be neutralised;
|
|
|
inasmuch as the two lights do not fall there, we say that the shadow
|
|
|
is a simple one and where only one of the two lights falls, we say
|
|
|
the shadow is compound, and where both the lights fall the shadow is
|
|
|
neutralised; for where both lights fall, no shadow of any kind is
|
|
|
produced, but only a light background limiting the shadow. Here I
|
|
|
shall say that what my adversary said was true: but he only mentions
|
|
|
such truths as are in his favour; and if we go on to the rest he
|
|
|
must conclude that my proposition is true. And that is: That if both
|
|
|
lights fell on the point of intersection, the shadows would be
|
|
|
neutralised. This I confess to be true if [neither of] the two
|
|
|
shadows fell in the same spot; because, where a shadow and a light
|
|
|
fall, a compound shadow is produced, and wherever two shadows or two
|
|
|
equal lights fall, the shadow cannot vary in any part of it, the
|
|
|
shadows and the lights both being equal. And this is proved in the
|
|
|
eighth [proposition] on proportion where it is said that if a given
|
|
|
quantity has a single unit of force and resistance, a double
|
|
|
quantity will have double force and double resistance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DEFINITION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The intersection _n_ is produced by the shadows caused by the light
|
|
|
_b_, because this light _b_ produces the shadow _x b_, and the
|
|
|
shadow _s b_, but the intersection _m_ is produced by the light _a_
|
|
|
which causes the shadow _s a_, and the shadow _x a_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But if you uncover both the lights _a b_, then you get the two
|
|
|
shadows _n m_ both at once, and besides these, two other, simple
|
|
|
shadows are produced at _r o_ where neither of the two lights falls
|
|
|
at all. The grades of depth in compound shadows are fewer in
|
|
|
proportion as the lights falling on, and crossing them are less
|
|
|
numerous.
|
|
|
|
|
|
186.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why the intersections at _n_ being composed of two compound derived
|
|
|
shadows, forms a compound shadow and not a simple one, as happens
|
|
|
with other intersections of compound shadows. This occurs, according
|
|
|
to the 2nd [diagram] of this [prop.] which says:--The intersection
|
|
|
of derived shadows when produced by the intersection of columnar
|
|
|
shadows caused by a single light does not produce a simple shadow.
|
|
|
And this is the corollary of the 1st [prop.] which says:--The
|
|
|
intersection of simple derived shadows never results in a deeper
|
|
|
shadow, because the deepest shadows all added together cannot be
|
|
|
darker than one by itself. Since, if many deepest shadows increased
|
|
|
in depth by their duplication, they could not be called the
|
|
|
_deepest_ shadows, but only part-shadows. But if such intersections
|
|
|
are illuminated by a second light placed between the eye and the
|
|
|
intersecting bodies, then those shadows would become compound
|
|
|
shadows and be uniformly dark just as much at the intersection as
|
|
|
throughout the rest. In the 1st and 2nd above, the intersections _i
|
|
|
k_ will not be doubled in depth as it is doubled in quantity. But in
|
|
|
this 3rd, at the intersections _g n_ they will be double in depth
|
|
|
and in quantity.
|
|
|
|
|
|
187.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW AND WHEN THE SURROUNDINGS IN SHADOW MINGLE THEIR DERIVED SHADOW
|
|
|
WITH THE LIGHT DERIVED FROM THE LUMINOUS BODY.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The derived shadow of the dark walls on each side of the bright
|
|
|
light of the window are what mingle their various degrees of shade
|
|
|
with the light derived from the window; and these various depths of
|
|
|
shade modify every portion of the light, except where it is
|
|
|
strongest, at _c_. To prove this let _d a_ be the primary shadow
|
|
|
which is turned towards the point _e_, and darkens it by its derived
|
|
|
shadow; as may be seen by the triangle _a e d_, in which the
|
|
|
angle _e_ faces the darkened base _d a e_; the point _v_ faces the
|
|
|
dark shadow _a s_ which is part of _a d_, and as the whole is
|
|
|
greater than a part, _e_ which faces the whole base [of the
|
|
|
triangle], will be in deeper shadow than _v_ which only faces part
|
|
|
of it. In consequence of the conclusion [shown] in the above
|
|
|
diagram, _t_ will be less darkened than _v_, because the base of the
|
|
|
_t_ is part of the base of the _v_; and in the same way it follows
|
|
|
that _p_ is less in shadow than _t_, because the base of the _p_ is
|
|
|
part of the base of the _t_. And _c_ is the terminal point of the
|
|
|
derived shadow and the chief beginning of the highest light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram on Pl. IV, No. 5 belongs to this passage; but
|
|
|
it must be noted that the text explains only the figure on the
|
|
|
right-hand side.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
FOURTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the shape of the cast shadows (188-191).
|
|
|
|
|
|
188.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The form of the shadow cast by any body of uniform density can never
|
|
|
be the same as that of the body producing it. [Footnote: Comp. the
|
|
|
drawing on PI. XXVIII, No. 5.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
189.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No cast shadow can produce the true image of the body which casts it
|
|
|
on a vertical plane unless the centre of the light is equally
|
|
|
distant from all the edges of that body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
190.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a window _a b_ admits the sunlight into a room, the sunlight will
|
|
|
magnify the size of the window and diminish the shadow of a man in
|
|
|
such a way as that when the man makes that dim shadow of himself,
|
|
|
approach to that which defines the real size of the window, he will
|
|
|
see the shadows where they come into contact, dim and confused from
|
|
|
the strength of the light, shutting off and not allowing the solar
|
|
|
rays to pass; the effect of the shadow of the man cast by this
|
|
|
contact will be exactly that figured above.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: It is scarcely possible to render the meaning of this
|
|
|
sentence with strict accuracy; mainly because the grammatical
|
|
|
construction is defective in the most important part--line 4. In the
|
|
|
very slight original sketch the shadow touches the upper arch of the
|
|
|
window and the correction, here given is perhaps not justified.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
191.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A shadow is never seen as of uniform depth on the surface which
|
|
|
intercepts it unless every portion of that surface is equidistant
|
|
|
from the luminous body. This is proved by the 7th which says:--The
|
|
|
shadow will appear lighter or stronger as it is surrounded by a
|
|
|
darker or a lighter background. And by the 8th of this:--The
|
|
|
background will be in parts darker or lighter, in proportion as it
|
|
|
is farther from or nearer to the luminous body. And:--Of various
|
|
|
spots equally distant from the luminous body those will always be in
|
|
|
the highest light on which the rays fall at the smallest angles: The
|
|
|
outline of the shadow as it falls on inequalities in the surface
|
|
|
will be seen with all the contours similar to those of the body that
|
|
|
casts it, if the eye is placed just where the centre of the light
|
|
|
was.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadow will look darkest where it is farthest from the body that
|
|
|
casts it. The shadow _c d_, cast by the body in shadow _a b_ which
|
|
|
is equally distant in all parts, is not of equal depth because it is
|
|
|
seen on a back ground of varying brightness. [Footnote: Compare the
|
|
|
three diagrams on Pl. VI, no 1 which, in the original accompany this
|
|
|
section.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the outlines of cast shadows (192-195).
|
|
|
|
|
|
192.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The edges of a derived shadow will be most distinct where it is cast
|
|
|
nearest to the primary shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
193.
|
|
|
|
|
|
As the derived shadow gets more distant from the primary shadow, the
|
|
|
more the cast shadow differs from the primary shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
194.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF SHADOWS WHICH NEVER COME TO AN END.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The greater the difference between a light and the body lighted by
|
|
|
it, the light being the larger, the more vague will be the outlines
|
|
|
of the shadow of that object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The derived shadow will be most confused towards the edges of its
|
|
|
interception by a plane, where it is remotest from the body casting
|
|
|
it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
195.
|
|
|
|
|
|
What is the cause which makes the outlines of the shadow vague and
|
|
|
confused?
|
|
|
|
|
|
Whether it is possible to give clear and definite outlines to the
|
|
|
edges of shadows.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the relative size of shadows (196. 197).
|
|
|
|
|
|
196.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE BODY WHICH IS NEAREST TO THE LIGHT CASTS THE LARGEST SHADOW, AND
|
|
|
WHY?
|
|
|
|
|
|
If an object placed in front of a single light is very close to it
|
|
|
you will see that it casts a very large shadow on the opposite wall,
|
|
|
and the farther you remove the object from the light the smaller
|
|
|
will the image of the shadow become.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHY A SHADOW LARGER THAN THE BODY THAT PRODUCES IT BECOMES OUT OF
|
|
|
PROPORTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The disproportion of a shadow which is larger than the body
|
|
|
producing it, results from the light being smaller than the body, so
|
|
|
that it cannot be at an equal distance from the edges of the body
|
|
|
[Footnote 11: H. LUDWIG in his edition of the old copies, in the
|
|
|
Vatican library--in which this chapter is included under Nos. 612,
|
|
|
613 and 614 alters this passage as follows: _quella parte ch'e piu
|
|
|
propinqua piu cresce che le distanti_, although the Vatican copy
|
|
|
agrees with the original MS. in having _distante_ in the former and
|
|
|
_propinque_ in the latter place. This supposed amendment seems to me
|
|
|
to invert the facts. Supposing for instance, that on Pl. XXXI No. 3.
|
|
|
_f_ is the spot where the light is that illuminates the figure there
|
|
|
represented, and that the line behind the figure represents a wall
|
|
|
on which the shadow of the figure is thrown. It is evident, that in
|
|
|
that case the nearest portion, in this case the under part of the
|
|
|
thigh, is very little magnified in the shadow, and the remoter
|
|
|
parts, for instance the head, are more magnified.]; and the portions
|
|
|
which are most remote are made larger than the nearer portions for
|
|
|
this reason [Footnote 12: See Footnote 11].
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHY A SHADOW WHICH IS LARGER THAN THE BODY CAUSING IT HAS
|
|
|
ILL-DEFINED OUTLINES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The atmosphere which surrounds a light is almost like light itself
|
|
|
for brightness and colour; but the farther off it is the more it
|
|
|
loses this resemblance. An object which casts a large shadow and is
|
|
|
near to the light, is illuminated both by that light by the luminous
|
|
|
atmosphere; hence this diffused light gives the shadow ill-defined
|
|
|
edges.
|
|
|
|
|
|
197.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A luminous body which is long and narrow in shape gives more
|
|
|
confused outlines to the derived shadow than a spherical light, and
|
|
|
this contradicts the proposition next following: A shadow will have
|
|
|
its outlines more clearly defined in proportion as it is nearer to
|
|
|
the primary shadow or, I should say, the body casting the shadow;
|
|
|
[Footnote 14: The lettering refers to the lower diagram, Pl. XLI,
|
|
|
No. 5.] the cause of this is the elongated form of the luminous body
|
|
|
_a c_, &c. [Footnote 16: See Footnote 14].
|
|
|
|
|
|
Effects on cast shadows by the tone of the back ground.
|
|
|
|
|
|
198.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF MODIFIED SHADOWS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Modified shadows are those which are cast on light walls or other
|
|
|
illuminated objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A shadow looks darkest against a light background. The outlines of a
|
|
|
derived shadow will be clearer as they are nearer to the primary
|
|
|
shadow. A derived shadow will be most defined in shape where it is
|
|
|
intercepted, where the plane intercepts it at the most equal angle.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Those parts of a shadow will appear darkest which have darker
|
|
|
objects opposite to them. And they will appear less dark when they
|
|
|
face lighter objects. And the larger the light object opposite, the
|
|
|
more the shadow will be lightened.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And the larger the surface of the dark object the more it will
|
|
|
darken the derived shadow where it is intercepted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A disputed proposition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
199.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE OPINION OF SOME THAT A TRIANGLE CASTS NO SHADOW ON A PLANE
|
|
|
SURFACE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Certain mathematicians have maintained that a triangle, of which the
|
|
|
base is turned to the light, casts no shadow on a plane; and this
|
|
|
they prove by saying [5] that no spherical body smaller than the
|
|
|
light can reach the middle with the shadow. The lines of radiant
|
|
|
light are straight lines [6]; therefore, suppose the light to be _g
|
|
|
h_ and the triangle _l m n_, and let the plane be _i k_; they say
|
|
|
the light _g_ falls on the side of the triangle _l n_, and the
|
|
|
portion of the plane _i q_. Thus again _h_ like _g_ falls on the
|
|
|
side _l m_, and then on _m n_ and the plane _p k_; and if the whole
|
|
|
plane thus faces the lights _g h_, it is evident that the triangle
|
|
|
has no shadow; and that which has no shadow can cast none. This, in
|
|
|
this case appears credible. But if the triangle _n p g_ were not
|
|
|
illuminated by the two lights _g_ and _h_, but by _i p_ and _g_ and
|
|
|
_k_ neither side is lighted by more than one single light: that is
|
|
|
_i p_ is invisible to _h g_ and _k_ will never be lighted by _g_;
|
|
|
hence _p q_ will be twice as light as the two visible portions that
|
|
|
are in shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 5--6. This passage is so obscure that it would be rash to
|
|
|
offer an explanation. Several words seem to have been omitted.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the relative depth of cast shadows (200-202).
|
|
|
|
|
|
200.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A spot is most in the shade when a large number of darkened rays
|
|
|
fall upon it. The spot which receives the rays at the widest angle
|
|
|
and by darkened rays will be most in the dark; a will be twice as
|
|
|
dark as b, because it originates from twice as large a base at an
|
|
|
equal distance. A spot is most illuminated when a large number of
|
|
|
luminous rays fall upon it. d is the beginning of the shadow _d f_,
|
|
|
and tinges _c_ but _a_ little; _d e_ is half of the shadow _d f_ and
|
|
|
gives a deeper tone where it is cast at _b_ than at _f_. And the
|
|
|
whole shaded space _e_ gives its tone to the spot _a_. [Footnote:
|
|
|
The diagram here referred to is on Pl. XLI, No. 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
201.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_A n_ will be darker than _c r_ in proportion to the number of times
|
|
|
that _a b_ goes into _c d_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
202.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadow cast by an object on a plane will be smaller in
|
|
|
proportion as that object is lighted by feebler rays. Let _d e_ be
|
|
|
the object and _d c_ the plane surface; the number of times that _d
|
|
|
e_ will go into _f g_ gives the proportion of light at _f h_ to _d
|
|
|
c_. The ray of light will be weaker in proportion to its distance
|
|
|
from the hole through which it falls.
|
|
|
|
|
|
FIFTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Principles of reflection (203. 204).
|
|
|
|
|
|
203.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE WAY IN WHICH THE SHADOWS CAST BY OBJECTS OUGHT TO BE DEFINED.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the object is the mountain here figured, and the light is at the
|
|
|
point _a_, I say that from _b d_ and also from _c f_ there will be
|
|
|
no light but from reflected rays. And this results from the fact
|
|
|
that rays of light can only act in straight lines; and the same is
|
|
|
the case with the secondary or reflected rays.
|
|
|
|
|
|
204.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The edges of the derived shadow are defined by the hues of the
|
|
|
illuminated objects surrounding the luminous body which produces the
|
|
|
shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On reverberation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
205.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF REVERBERATION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reverberation is caused by bodies of a bright nature with a flat and
|
|
|
semi opaque surface which, when the light strikes upon them, throw
|
|
|
it back again, like the rebound of a ball, to the former object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHERE THERE CAN BE NO REFLECTED LIGHTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All dense bodies have their surfaces occupied by various degrees of
|
|
|
light and shade. The lights are of two kinds, one called original,
|
|
|
the other borrowed. Original light is that which is inherent in the
|
|
|
flame of fire or the light of the sun or of the atmosphere. Borrowed
|
|
|
light will be reflected light; but to return to the promised
|
|
|
definition: I say that this luminous reverberation is not produced
|
|
|
by those portions of a body which are turned towards darkened
|
|
|
objects, such as shaded spots, fields with grass of various height,
|
|
|
woods whether green or bare; in which, though that side of each
|
|
|
branch which is turned towards the original light has a share of
|
|
|
that light, nevertheless the shadows cast by each branch separately
|
|
|
are so numerous, as well as those cast by one branch on the others,
|
|
|
that finally so much shadow is the result that the light counts for
|
|
|
nothing. Hence objects of this kind cannot throw any reflected light
|
|
|
on opposite objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reflection on water (206. 207).
|
|
|
|
|
|
206.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadow or object mirrored in water in motion, that is to say in
|
|
|
small wavelets, will always be larger than the external object
|
|
|
producing it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
207.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is impossible that an object mirrored on water should correspond
|
|
|
in form to the object mirrored, since the centre of the eye is above
|
|
|
the surface of the water.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is made plain in the figure here given, which demonstrates that
|
|
|
the eye sees the surface _a b_, and cannot see it at _l f_, and at
|
|
|
_r t_; it sees the surface of the image at _r t_, and does not see
|
|
|
it in the real object _c d_. Hence it is impossible to see it, as
|
|
|
has been said above unless the eye itself is situated on the surface
|
|
|
of the water as is shown below [13].
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: _A_ stands for _ochio_ [eye], _B_ for _aria_ [air], _C_
|
|
|
for _acqua_ [water], _D_ for _cateto_ [cathetus].--In the original
|
|
|
MS. the second diagram is placed below line 13.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Experiments with the mirror (208-210).
|
|
|
|
|
|
208.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE MIRROR.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the illuminated object is of the same size as the luminous body
|
|
|
and as that in which the light is reflected, the amount of the
|
|
|
reflected light will bear the same proportion to the intermediate
|
|
|
light as this second light will bear to the first, if both bodies
|
|
|
are smooth and white.
|
|
|
|
|
|
209.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Describe how it is that no object has its limitation in the mirror
|
|
|
but in the eye which sees it in the mirror. For if you look at your
|
|
|
face in the mirror, the part resembles the whole in as much as the
|
|
|
part is everywhere in the mirror, and the whole is in every part of
|
|
|
the same mirror; and the same is true of the whole image of any
|
|
|
object placed opposite to this mirror, &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
210.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No man can see the image of another man in a mirror in its proper
|
|
|
place with regard to the objects; because every object falls on [the
|
|
|
surface of] the mirror at equal angles. And if the one man, who sees
|
|
|
the other in the mirror, is not in a direct line with the image he
|
|
|
will not see it in the place where it really falls; and if he gets
|
|
|
into the line, he covers the other man and puts himself in the place
|
|
|
occupied by his image. Let _n o_ be the mirror, _b_ the eye of your
|
|
|
friend and _d_ your own eye. Your friend's eye will appear to you at
|
|
|
_a_, and to him it will seem that yours is at _c_, and the
|
|
|
intersection of the visual rays will occur at _m_, so that either of
|
|
|
you touching _m_ will touch the eye of the other man which shall be
|
|
|
open. And if you touch the eye of the other man in the mirror it
|
|
|
will seem to him that you are touching your own.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Appendix:--On shadows in movement (211. 212).
|
|
|
|
|
|
211.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE SHADOW AND ITS MOTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When two bodies casting shadows, and one in front of the other, are
|
|
|
between a window and the wall with some space between them, the
|
|
|
shadow of the body which is nearest to the plane of the wall will
|
|
|
move if the body nearest to the window is put in transverse motion
|
|
|
across the window. To prove this let _a_ and _b_ be two bodies
|
|
|
placed between the window _n m_ and the plane surface _o p_ with
|
|
|
sufficient space between them as shown by the space _a b_. I say
|
|
|
that if the body _a_ is moved towards _s_ the shadow of the body _b_
|
|
|
which is at _c_ will move towards _d_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
212.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE MOTION OF SHADOWS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The motion of a shadow is always more rapid than that of the body
|
|
|
which produces it if the light is stationary. To prove this let _a_
|
|
|
be the luminous body, and _b_ the body casting the shadow, and _d_
|
|
|
the shadow. Then I say that in the time while the solid body moves
|
|
|
from _b_ to _c_, the shadow _d_ will move to _e_; and this
|
|
|
proportion in the rapidity of the movements made in the same space
|
|
|
of time, is equal to that in the length of the space moved over.
|
|
|
Thus, given the proportion of the space moved over by the body _b_
|
|
|
to _c_, to that moved over by the shadow _d_ to _e_, the proportion
|
|
|
in the rapidity of their movements will be the same.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But if the luminous body is also in movement with a velocity equal
|
|
|
to that of the solid body, then the shadow and the body that casts
|
|
|
it will move with equal speed. And if the luminous body moves more
|
|
|
rapidly than the solid body, the motion of the shadow will be slower
|
|
|
than that of the body casting it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But if the luminous body moves more slowly than the solid body, then
|
|
|
the shadow will move more rapidly than that body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SIXTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The effect of rays passing through holes (213. 214).
|
|
|
|
|
|
213.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you transmit the rays of the sun through a hole in the shape of a
|
|
|
star you will see a beautiful effect of perspective in the spot
|
|
|
where the sun's rays fall.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In this and the following chapters of MS. C the order of
|
|
|
the original paging has been adhered to, and is shown in
|
|
|
parenthesis. Leonardo himself has but rarely worked out the subject
|
|
|
of these propositions. The space left for the purpose has
|
|
|
occasionally been made use of for quite different matter. Even the
|
|
|
numerous diagrams, most of them very delicately sketched, lettered
|
|
|
and numbered, which occur on these pages, are hardly ever explained,
|
|
|
with the exception of those few which are here given.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
214.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No small hole can so modify the convergence of rays of light as to
|
|
|
prevent, at a long distance, the transmission of the true form of
|
|
|
the luminous body causing them. It is impossible that rays of light
|
|
|
passing through a parallel [slit], should not display the form of
|
|
|
the body causing them, since all the effects produced by a luminous
|
|
|
body are [in fact] the reflection of that body: The moon, shaped
|
|
|
like a boat, if transmitted through a hole is figured in the surface
|
|
|
[it falls on] as a boatshaped object. [Footnote 8: In the MS. a
|
|
|
blank space is left after this question.] Why the eye sees bodies at
|
|
|
a distance, larger than they measure on the vertical plane?.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: This chapter, taken from another MS. may, as an
|
|
|
exception, be placed here, as it refers to the same subject as the
|
|
|
preceding section.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On gradation of shadows (215. 216).
|
|
|
|
|
|
215.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Although the breadth and length of lights and shadow will be
|
|
|
narrower and shorter in foreshortening, the quality and quantity of
|
|
|
the light and shade is not increased nor diminished.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[3]The function of shade and light when diminished by
|
|
|
foreshortening, will be to give shadow and to illuminate an object
|
|
|
opposite, according to the quality and quantity in which they fall
|
|
|
on the body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[5]In proportion as a derived shadow is nearer to its penultimate
|
|
|
extremities the deeper it will appear, _g z_ beyond the intersection
|
|
|
faces only the part of the shadow [marked] _y z_; this by
|
|
|
intersection takes the shadow from _m n_ but by direct line it takes
|
|
|
the shadow _a m_ hence it is twice as deep as _g z_. _Y x_, by
|
|
|
intersection takes the shadow _n o_, but by direct line the shadow
|
|
|
_n m a_, therefore _x y_ is three times as dark as _z g_; _x f_, by
|
|
|
intersection faces _o b_ and by direct line _o n m a_, therefore we
|
|
|
must say that the shadow between _f x_ will be four times as dark as
|
|
|
the shadow _z g_, because it faces four times as much shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let _a b_ be the side where the primary shadow is, and _b c_ the
|
|
|
primary light, _d_ will be the spot where it is intercepted,_f g_
|
|
|
the derived shadow and _f e_ the derived light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And this must be at the beginning of the explanation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the original MS. the text of No. 252 precedes the one
|
|
|
given here. In the text of No. 215 there is a blank space of about
|
|
|
four lines between the lines 2 and 3. The diagram given on Pl. VI,
|
|
|
No. 2 is placed between lines 4 and 5. Between lines 5 and 6 there
|
|
|
is another space of about three lines and one line left blank
|
|
|
between lines 8 and 9. The reader will find the meaning of the whole
|
|
|
passage much clearer if he first reads the final lines 11--13.
|
|
|
Compare also line 4 of No. 270.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On relative proportion of light and shadows (216--221).
|
|
|
|
|
|
216.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That part of the surface of a body on which the images [reflection]
|
|
|
from other bodies placed opposite fall at the largest angle will
|
|
|
assume their hue most strongly. In the diagram below, 8 is a larger
|
|
|
angle than 4, since its base _a n_ is larger than _e n_ the base of
|
|
|
4. This diagram below should end at _a n_ 4 8. [4]That portion of
|
|
|
the illuminated surface on which a shadow is cast will be brightest
|
|
|
which lies contiguous to the cast shadow. Just as an object which is
|
|
|
lighted up by a greater quantity of luminous rays becomes brighter,
|
|
|
so one on which a greater quantity of shadow falls, will be darker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let 4 be the side of an illuminated surface 4 8, surrounding the
|
|
|
cast shadow _g e_ 4. And this spot 4 will be lighter than 8, because
|
|
|
less shadow falls on it than on 8. Since 4 faces only the shadow _i
|
|
|
n_; and 8 faces and receives the shadow _a e_ as well as _i n_ which
|
|
|
makes it twice as dark. And the same thing happens when you put the
|
|
|
atmosphere and the sun in the place of shade and light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[12] The distribution of shadow, originating in, and limited by,
|
|
|
plane surfaces placed near to each other, equal in tone and directly
|
|
|
opposite, will be darker at the ends than at the beginning, which
|
|
|
will be determined by the incidence of the luminous rays. You will
|
|
|
find the same proportion in the depth of the derived shadows _a n_
|
|
|
as in the nearness of the luminous bodies _m b_, which cause them;
|
|
|
and if the luminous bodies were of equal size you would still
|
|
|
farther find the same proportion in the light cast by the luminous
|
|
|
circles and their shadows as in the distance of the said luminous
|
|
|
bodies.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram originally placed between lines 3 and 4 is on
|
|
|
Pl. VI, No. 3. In the diagram given above line 14 of the original,
|
|
|
and here printed in the text, the words _corpo luminoso_ [luminous
|
|
|
body] are written in the circle _m_, _luminoso_ in the circle _b_
|
|
|
and _ombroso_ [body in shadow] in the circle _o_.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
217.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THAT PART OF THE REFLECTION WILL BE BRIGHTEST WHERE THE REFLECTED
|
|
|
RAYS ARE SHORTEST.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[2] The darkness occasioned by the casting of combined shadows will
|
|
|
be in conformity with its cause, which will originate and terminate
|
|
|
between two plane surfaces near together, alike in tone and directly
|
|
|
opposite each other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[4] In proportion as the source of light is larger, the luminous and
|
|
|
shadow rays will be more mixed together. This result is produced
|
|
|
because wherever there is a larger quantity of luminous rays, there
|
|
|
is most light, but where there are fewer there is least light,
|
|
|
consequently the shadow rays come in and mingle with them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Diagrams are inserted before lines 2 and 4.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
218.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In all the proportions I lay down it must be understood that the
|
|
|
medium between the bodies is always the same. [2] The smaller the
|
|
|
luminous body the more distinct will the transmission of the shadows
|
|
|
be.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[3] When of two opposite shadows, produced by the same body, one is
|
|
|
twice as dark as the other though similar in form, one of the two
|
|
|
lights causing them must have twice the diameter that the other has
|
|
|
and be at twice the distance from the opaque body. If the object is
|
|
|
lowly moved across the luminous body, and the shadow is intercepted
|
|
|
at some distance from the object, there will be the same relative
|
|
|
proportion between the motion of the derived shadow and the motion
|
|
|
of the primary shadow, as between the distance from the object to
|
|
|
the light, and that from the object to the spot where the shadow is
|
|
|
intercepted; so that though the object is moved slowly the shadow
|
|
|
moves fast.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: There are diagrams inserted before lines 2 and 3 but they
|
|
|
are not reproduced here. The diagram above line 6 is written upon as
|
|
|
follows: at _A lume_ (light), at _B obbietto_ (body), at _C ombra
|
|
|
d'obbietto_ (shadow of the object).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
219.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A luminous body will appear less brilliant when surrounded by a
|
|
|
bright background.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[2] I have found that the stars which are nearest to the horizon
|
|
|
look larger than the others because light falls upon them from a
|
|
|
larger proportion of the solar body than when they are above us; and
|
|
|
having more light from the sun they give more light, and the bodies
|
|
|
which are most luminous appear the largest. As may be seen by the
|
|
|
sun through a mist, and overhead; it appears larger where there is
|
|
|
no mist and diminished through mist. No portion of the luminous body
|
|
|
is ever visible from any spot within the pyramid of pure derived
|
|
|
shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Between lines 1 and 2 there is in the original a large
|
|
|
diagram which does not refer to this text. ]
|
|
|
|
|
|
220.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A body on which the solar rays fall between the thin branches of
|
|
|
trees far apart will cast but a single shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[2] If an opaque body and a luminous one are (both) spherical the
|
|
|
base of the pyramid of rays will bear the same proportion to the
|
|
|
luminous body as the base of the pyramid of shade to the opaque
|
|
|
body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[4] When the transmitted shadow is intercepted by a plane surface
|
|
|
placed opposite to it and farther away from the luminous body than
|
|
|
from the object [which casts it] it will appear proportionately
|
|
|
darker and the edges more distinct.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram which, in the original, is placed above line
|
|
|
2, is similar to the one, here given on page 73 (section 120).--The
|
|
|
diagram here given in the margin stands, in the original, between
|
|
|
lines 3 and 4.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
221.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A body illuminated by the solar rays passing between the thick
|
|
|
branches of trees will produce as many shadows as there are branches
|
|
|
between the sun and itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where the shadow-rays from an opaque pyramidal body are intercepted
|
|
|
they will cast a shadow of bifurcate outline and various depth at
|
|
|
the points. A light which is broader than the apex but narrower than
|
|
|
the base of an opaque pyramidal body placed in front of it, will
|
|
|
cause that pyramid to cast a shadow of bifurcate form and various
|
|
|
degrees of depth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If an opaque body, smaller than the light, casts two shadows and if
|
|
|
it is the same size or larger, casts but one, it follows that a
|
|
|
pyramidal body, of which part is smaller, part equal to, and part
|
|
|
larger than, the luminous body, will cast a bifurcate shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Between lines 2 and 3 there are in the original two large
|
|
|
diagrams.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
_IV._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Perspective of Disappearance._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_The theory of the_ "Prospettiva de' perdimenti" _would, in many
|
|
|
important details, be quite unintelligible if it had not been led up
|
|
|
by the principles of light and shade on which it is based. The word_
|
|
|
"Prospettiva" _in the language of the time included the principles
|
|
|
of optics; what Leonardo understood by_ "Perdimenti" _will be
|
|
|
clearly seen in the early chapters, Nos._ 222--224. _It is in the
|
|
|
very nature of the case that the farther explanations given in the
|
|
|
subsequent chapters must be limited to general rules. The sections
|
|
|
given as_ 227--231 _"On indistinctness at short distances" have, it
|
|
|
is true, only an indirect bearing on the subject; but on the other
|
|
|
hand, the following chapters,_ 232--234, _"On indistinctness at
|
|
|
great distances," go fully into the matter, and in chapters_
|
|
|
235--239, _which treat "Of the importance of light and shade in the
|
|
|
Perspective of Disappearance", the practical issues are distinctly
|
|
|
insisted on in their relation to the theory. This is naturally
|
|
|
followed by the statements as to "the effect of light or dark
|
|
|
backgrounds on the apparent size of bodies"_ (_Nos._ 240--250). _At
|
|
|
the end I have placed, in the order of the original, those sections
|
|
|
from the MS._ C _which treat of the "Perspective of Disappearance"
|
|
|
and serve to some extent to complete the treatment of the subject_
|
|
|
(251--262).
|
|
|
|
|
|
Definition (222. 223).
|
|
|
|
|
|
222.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE DIMINISHED DISTINCTNESS OF THE OUTLINES OF OPAQUE BODIES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the real outlines of opaque bodies are indistinguishable at even
|
|
|
a very short distance, they will be more so at long distances; and,
|
|
|
since it is by its outlines that we are able to know the real form
|
|
|
of any opaque body, when by its remoteness we fail to discern it as
|
|
|
a whole, much more must we fail to discern its parts and outlines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
223.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE DIMINUTION IN PERSPECTIVE OF OPAQUE OBJECTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Among opaque objects of equal size the apparent diminution of size
|
|
|
will be in proportion to their distance from the eye of the
|
|
|
spectator; but it is an inverse proportion, since, where the
|
|
|
distance is greater, the opaque body will appear smaller, and the
|
|
|
less the distance the larger will the object appear. And this is the
|
|
|
fundamental principle of linear perspective and it
|
|
|
follows:--[11]every object as it becomes more remote loses first
|
|
|
those parts which are smallest. Thus of a horse, we should lose the
|
|
|
legs before the head, because the legs are thinner than the head;
|
|
|
and the neck before the body for the same reason. Hence it follows
|
|
|
that the last part of the horse which would be discernible by the
|
|
|
eye would be the mass of the body in an oval form, or rather in a
|
|
|
cylindrical form and this would lose its apparent thickness before
|
|
|
its length--according to the 2nd rule given above, &c. [Footnote 23:
|
|
|
Compare line 11.].
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the eye remains stationary the perspective terminates in the
|
|
|
distance in a point. But if the eye moves in a straight [horizontal]
|
|
|
line the perspective terminates in a line and the reason is that
|
|
|
this line is generated by the motion of the point and our sight;
|
|
|
therefore it follows that as we move our sight [eye], the point
|
|
|
moves, and as we move the point, the line is generated, &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An illustration by experiment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
224.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every visible body, in so far as it affects the eye, includes three
|
|
|
attributes; that is to say: mass, form and colour; and the mass is
|
|
|
recognisable at a greater distance from the place of its actual
|
|
|
existence than either colour or form. Again, colour is discernible
|
|
|
at a greater distance than form, but this law does not apply to
|
|
|
luminous bodies.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The above proposition is plainly shown and proved by experiment;
|
|
|
because: if you see a man close to you, you discern the exact
|
|
|
appearance of the mass and of the form and also of the colouring; if
|
|
|
he goes to some distance you will not recognise who he is, because
|
|
|
the character of the details will disappear, if he goes still
|
|
|
farther you will not be able to distinguish his colouring, but he
|
|
|
will appear as a dark object, and still farther he will appear as a
|
|
|
very small dark rounded object. It appears rounded because distance
|
|
|
so greatly diminishes the various details that nothing remains
|
|
|
visible but the larger mass. And the reason is this: We know very
|
|
|
well that all the images of objects reach the senses by a small
|
|
|
aperture in the eye; hence, if the whole horizon _a d_ is admitted
|
|
|
through such an aperture, the object _b c_ being but a very small
|
|
|
fraction of this horizon what space can it fill in that minute image
|
|
|
of so vast a hemisphere? And because luminous bodies have more power
|
|
|
in darkness than any others, it is evident that, as the chamber of
|
|
|
the eye is very dark, as is the nature of all colored cavities, the
|
|
|
images of distant objects are confused and lost in the great light
|
|
|
of the sky; and if they are visible at all, appear dark and black,
|
|
|
as every small body must when seen in the diffused light of the
|
|
|
atmosphere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram belonging to this passage is placed between
|
|
|
lines 5 and 6; it is No. 4 on Pl. VI. ]
|
|
|
|
|
|
A guiding rule.
|
|
|
|
|
|
225.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE ATMOSPHERE THAT INTERPOSES BETWEEN THE EYE AND VISIBLE
|
|
|
OBJECTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An object will appear more or less distinct at the same distance, in
|
|
|
proportion as the atmosphere existing between the eye and that
|
|
|
object is more or less clear. Hence, as I know that the greater or
|
|
|
less quantity of the air that lies between the eye and the object
|
|
|
makes the outlines of that object more or less indistinct, you must
|
|
|
diminish the definiteness of outline of those objects in proportion
|
|
|
to their increasing distance from the eye of the spectator.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An experiment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
226.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When I was once in a place on the sea, at an equal distance from the
|
|
|
shore and the mountains, the distance from the shore looked much
|
|
|
greater than that from the mountains.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On indistinctness at short distances (227-231).
|
|
|
|
|
|
227.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you place an opaque object in front of your eye at a distance of
|
|
|
four fingers' breadth, if it is smaller than the space between the
|
|
|
two eyes it will not interfere with your seeing any thing that may
|
|
|
be beyond it. No object situated beyond another object seen by the
|
|
|
eye can be concealed by this [nearer] object if it is smaller than
|
|
|
the space from eye to eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
228.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The eye cannot take in a luminous angle which is too close to it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
229.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That part of a surface will be better lighted on which the light
|
|
|
falls at the greater angle. And that part, on which the shadow falls
|
|
|
at the greatest angle, will receive from those rays least of the
|
|
|
benefit of the light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
230.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The edges of an object placed in front of the pupil of the eye will
|
|
|
be less distinct in proportion as they are closer to the eye. This
|
|
|
is shown by the edge of the object _n_ placed in front of the pupil
|
|
|
_d_; in looking at this edge the pupil also sees all the space _a c_
|
|
|
which is beyond the edge; and the images the eye receives from that
|
|
|
space are mingled with the images of the edge, so that one image
|
|
|
confuses the other, and this confusion hinders the pupil from
|
|
|
distinguishing the edge.
|
|
|
|
|
|
231.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The outlines of objects will be least clear when they are nearest to
|
|
|
the eye, and therefore remoter outlines will be clearer. Among
|
|
|
objects which are smaller than the pupil of the eye those will be
|
|
|
less distinct which are nearer to the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On indistinctness at great distances (232-234).
|
|
|
|
|
|
232.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects near to the eye will appear larger than those at a distance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects seen with two eyes will appear rounder than if they are seen
|
|
|
with only one.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Objects seen between light and shadow will show the most relief.
|
|
|
|
|
|
233.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Our true perception of an object diminishes in proportion as its
|
|
|
size is diminished by distance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
234.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why objects seen at a distance appear large to the eye and in the
|
|
|
image on the vertical plane they appear small.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I ask how far away the eye can discern a non-luminous body, as, for
|
|
|
instance, a mountain. It will be very plainly visible if the sun is
|
|
|
behind it; and could be seen at a greater or less distance according
|
|
|
to the sun's place in the sky.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The clue to the solution of this problem (lines 1-3) is
|
|
|
given in lines 4-6, No. 232. Objects seen with both eyes appear
|
|
|
solid since they are seen from two distinct points of sight
|
|
|
separated by the distance between the eyes, but this solidity cannot
|
|
|
be represented in a flat drawing. Compare No. 535.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The importance of light and shade in the perspective of
|
|
|
disappearance (235-239).
|
|
|
|
|
|
235.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An opaque body seen in a line in which the light falls will reveal
|
|
|
no prominences to the eye. For instance, let _a_ be the solid body
|
|
|
and _c_ the light; _c m_ and _c n_ will be the lines of incidence of
|
|
|
the light, that is to say the lines which transmit the light to the
|
|
|
object _a_. The eye being at the point _b_, I say that since the
|
|
|
light _c_ falls on the whole part _m n_ the portions in relief on
|
|
|
that side will all be illuminated. Hence the eye placed at _c_
|
|
|
cannot see any light and shade and, not seeing it, every portion
|
|
|
will appear of the same tone, therefore the relief in the prominent
|
|
|
or rounded parts will not be visible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
236.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you represent in your work shadows which you can only discern
|
|
|
with difficulty, and of which you cannot distinguish the edges so
|
|
|
that you apprehend them confusedly, you must not make them sharp or
|
|
|
definite lest your work should have a wooden effect.
|
|
|
|
|
|
237.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will observe in drawing that among the shadows some are of
|
|
|
undistinguishable gradation and form, as is shown in the 3rd
|
|
|
[proposition] which says: Rounded surfaces display as many degrees
|
|
|
of light and shade as there are varieties of brightness and darkness
|
|
|
reflected from the surrounding objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
238.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You who draw from nature, look (carefully) at the extent, the
|
|
|
degree, and the form of the lights and shadows on each muscle; and
|
|
|
in their position lengthwise observe towards which muscle the axis
|
|
|
of the central line is directed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
239.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An object which is [so brilliantly illuminated as to be] almost as
|
|
|
bright as light will be visible at a greater distance, and of larger
|
|
|
apparent size than is natural to objects so remote.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The effect of light or dark backgrounds on the apparent size of
|
|
|
objects (240-250).
|
|
|
|
|
|
240.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A shadow will appear dark in proportion to the brilliancy of the
|
|
|
light surrounding it and conversely it will be less conspicuous
|
|
|
where it is seen against a darker background.
|
|
|
|
|
|
241.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF ORDINARY PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An object of equal breadth and colour throughout, seen against a
|
|
|
background of various colours will appear unequal in breadth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And if an object of equal breadth throughout, but of various
|
|
|
colours, is seen against a background of uniform colour, that object
|
|
|
will appear of various breadth. And the more the colours of the
|
|
|
background or of the object seen against the ground vary, the
|
|
|
greater will the apparent variations in the breadth be though the
|
|
|
objects seen against the ground be of equal breadth [throughout].
|
|
|
|
|
|
242.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A dark object seen against a bright background will appear smaller
|
|
|
than it is.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A light object will look larger when it is seen against a background
|
|
|
darker than itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
243.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A luminous body when obscured by a dense atmosphere will appear
|
|
|
smaller; as may be seen by the moon or sun veiled by mists.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of several luminous bodies of equal size and brilliancy and at an
|
|
|
equal distance, that will look the largest which is surrounded by
|
|
|
the darkest background.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I find that any luminous body when seen through a dense and thick
|
|
|
mist diminishes in proportion to its distance from the eye. Thus it
|
|
|
is with the sun by day, as well as the moon and the other eternal
|
|
|
lights by night. And when the air is clear, these luminaries appear
|
|
|
larger in proportion as they are farther from the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
244.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That portion of a body of uniform breadth which is against a lighter
|
|
|
background will look narrower [than the rest].
|
|
|
|
|
|
[4] _e_ is a given object, itself dark and of uniform breadth; _a b_
|
|
|
and _c d_ are two backgrounds one darker than the other; _b c_ is a
|
|
|
bright background, as it might be a spot lighted by the sun through
|
|
|
an aperture in a dark room. Then I say that the object _e g_ will
|
|
|
appear larger at _e f_ than at _g h_; because _e f_ has a darker
|
|
|
background than _g h_; and again at _f g_ it will look narrower from
|
|
|
being seen by the eye _o_, on the light background _b c_. [Footnote
|
|
|
12: The diagram to which the text, lines 1-11, refers, is placed in
|
|
|
the original between lines 3 and 4, and is given on Pl. XLI, No. 3.
|
|
|
Lines 12 to 14 are explained by the lower of the two diagrams on Pl.
|
|
|
XLI, No. 4. In the original these are placed after line 14.] That
|
|
|
part of a luminous body, of equal breadth and brilliancy throughout,
|
|
|
will look largest which is seen against the darkest background; and
|
|
|
the luminous body will seem on fire.
|
|
|
|
|
|
245.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHY BODIES IN LIGHT AND SHADE HAVE THEIR OUTLINES ALTERED BY THE
|
|
|
COLOUR AND BRIGHTNESS OF THE OBJECTS SERVING AS A BACKGROUND TO
|
|
|
THEM.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you look at a body of which the illuminated portion lies and ends
|
|
|
against a dark background, that part of the light which will look
|
|
|
brightest will be that which lies against the dark [background] at
|
|
|
_d_. But if this brighter part lies against a light background, the
|
|
|
edge of the object, which is itself light, will be less distinct
|
|
|
than before, and the highest light will appear to be between the
|
|
|
limit of the background _m f_ and the shadow. The same thing is seen
|
|
|
with regard to the dark [side], inasmuch as that edge of the shaded
|
|
|
portion of the object which lies against a light background, as at
|
|
|
_l_, it looks much darker than the rest. But if this shadow lies
|
|
|
against a dark background, the edge of the shaded part will appear
|
|
|
lighter than before, and the deepest shade will appear between the
|
|
|
edge and the light at the point _o_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the original diagram _o_ is inside the shaded surface
|
|
|
at the level of _d_.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
246.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An opaque body will appear smaller when it is surrounded by a highly
|
|
|
luminous background, and a light body will appear larger when it is
|
|
|
seen against a darker background. This may be seen in the height of
|
|
|
buildings at night, when lightning flashes behind them; it suddenly
|
|
|
seems, when it lightens, as though the height of the building were
|
|
|
diminished. For the same reason such buildings look larger in a
|
|
|
mist, or by night than when the atmosphere is clear and light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
247.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ON LIGHT BETWEEN SHADOWS
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you are drawing any object, remember, in comparing the grades
|
|
|
of light in the illuminated portions, that the eye is often deceived
|
|
|
by seeing things lighter than they are. And the reason lies in our
|
|
|
comparing those parts with the contiguous parts. Since if two
|
|
|
[separate] parts are in different grades of light and if the less
|
|
|
bright is conterminous with a dark portion and the brighter is
|
|
|
conterminous with a light background--as the sky or something
|
|
|
equally bright--, then that which is less light, or I should say
|
|
|
less radiant, will look the brighter and the brighter will seem the
|
|
|
darker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
248.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of objects equally dark in themselves and situated at a considerable
|
|
|
and equal distance, that will look the darkest which is farthest
|
|
|
above the earth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
249.
|
|
|
|
|
|
TO PROVE HOW IT IS THAT LUMINOUS BODIES APPEAR LARGER, AT A
|
|
|
DISTANCE, THAN THEY ARE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you place two lighted candles side by side half a braccio apart,
|
|
|
and go from them to a distance 200 braccia you will see that by the
|
|
|
increased size of each they will appear as a single luminous body
|
|
|
with the light of the two flames, one braccio wide.
|
|
|
|
|
|
TO PROVE HOW YOU MAY SEE THE REAL SIZE OF LUMINOUS BODIES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you wish to see the real size of these luminous bodies, take a
|
|
|
very thin board and make in it a hole no bigger than the tag of a
|
|
|
lace and place it as close to your eye as possible, so that when you
|
|
|
look through this hole, at the said light, you can see a large space
|
|
|
of air round it. Then by rapidly moving this board backwards and
|
|
|
forwards before your eye you will see the light increase [and
|
|
|
diminish].
|
|
|
|
|
|
Propositions on perspective of disappearance from MS. C. (250-262).
|
|
|
|
|
|
250.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of several bodies of equal size and equally distant from the eye,
|
|
|
those will look the smallest which are against the lightest
|
|
|
background.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every visible object must be surrounded by light and shade. A
|
|
|
perfectly spherical body surrounded by light and shade will appear
|
|
|
to have one side larger than the other in proportion as one is more
|
|
|
highly lighted than the other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
251.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No visible object can be well understood and comprehended by the
|
|
|
human eye excepting from the difference of the background against
|
|
|
which the edges of the object terminate and by which they are
|
|
|
bounded, and no object will appear [to stand out] separate from that
|
|
|
background so far as the outlines of its borders are concerned. The
|
|
|
moon, though it is at a great distance from the sun, when, in an
|
|
|
eclipse, it comes between our eyes and the sun, appears to the eyes
|
|
|
of men to be close to the sun and affixed to it, because the sun is
|
|
|
then the background to the moon.
|
|
|
|
|
|
252.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A luminous body will appear more brilliant in proportion as it is
|
|
|
surrounded by deeper shadow. [Footnote: The diagram which, in the
|
|
|
original, is placed after this text, has no connection with it.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
253.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The straight edges of a body will appear broken when they are
|
|
|
conterminous with a dark space streaked with rays of light.
|
|
|
[Footnote: Here again the diagrams in the original have no
|
|
|
connection with the text.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
254.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of several bodies, all equally large and equally distant, that which
|
|
|
is most brightly illuminated will appear to the eye nearest and
|
|
|
largest. [Footnote: Here again the diagrams in the original have no
|
|
|
connection with the text.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
255.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If several luminous bodies are seen from a great distance although
|
|
|
they are really separate they will appear united as one body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
256.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If several objects in shadow, standing very close together, are seen
|
|
|
against a bright background they will appear separated by wide
|
|
|
intervals.
|
|
|
|
|
|
257.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of several bodies of equal size and tone, that which is farthest
|
|
|
will appear the lightest and smallest.
|
|
|
|
|
|
258.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of several objects equal in size, brightness of background and
|
|
|
length that which has the flattest surface will look the largest. A
|
|
|
bar of iron equally thick throughout and of which half is red hot,
|
|
|
affords an example, for the red hot part looks thicker than the
|
|
|
rest.
|
|
|
|
|
|
259.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of several bodies of equal size and length, and alike in form and in
|
|
|
depth of shade, that will appear smallest which is surrounded by the
|
|
|
most luminous background.
|
|
|
|
|
|
260.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DIFFERENT PORTIONS OF A WALL SURFACE WILL BE DARKER OR BRIGHTER IN
|
|
|
PROPORTION AS THE LIGHT OR SHADOW FALLS ON THEM AT A LARGER ANGLE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The foregoing proposition can be clearly proved in this way. Let us
|
|
|
say that _m q_ is the luminous body, then _f g_ will be the opaque
|
|
|
body; and let _a e_ be the above-mentioned plane on which the said
|
|
|
angles fall, showing [plainly] the nature and character of their
|
|
|
bases. Then: _a_ will be more luminous than _b_; the base of the
|
|
|
angle _a_ is larger than that of _b_ and it therefore makes a
|
|
|
greater angle which will be _a m q_; and the pyramid _b p m_ will be
|
|
|
narrower and _m o c_ will be still finer, and so on by degrees, in
|
|
|
proportion as they are nearer to _e_, the pyramids will become
|
|
|
narrower and darker. That portion of the wall will be the darkest
|
|
|
where the breadth of the pyramid of shadow is greater than the
|
|
|
breadth of the pyramid of light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
At the point _a_ the pyramid of light is equal in strength to the
|
|
|
pyramid of shadow, because the base _f g_ is equal to the base _r
|
|
|
f_. At the point _d_ the pyramid of light is narrower than the
|
|
|
pyramid of shadow by so much as the base _s f_ is less than the base
|
|
|
_f g_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Divide the foregoing proposition into two diagrams, one with the
|
|
|
pyramids of light and shadow, the other with the pyramids of light
|
|
|
[only].
|
|
|
|
|
|
261.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Among shadows of equal depth those which are nearest to the eye will
|
|
|
look least deep.
|
|
|
|
|
|
262.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The more brilliant the light given by a luminous body, the deeper
|
|
|
will the shadows be cast by the objects it illuminates.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_V._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Theory of colours._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Leonardo's theory of colours is even more intimately connected with
|
|
|
his principles of light and shade than his Perspective of
|
|
|
Disappearance and is in fact merely an appendix or supplement to
|
|
|
those principles, as we gather from the titles to sections_ 264,
|
|
|
267_, and _276_, while others again_ (_Nos._ 281, 282_) are headed_
|
|
|
Prospettiva.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_A very few of these chapters are to be found in the oldest copies
|
|
|
and editions of the Treatise on Painting, and although the material
|
|
|
they afford is but meager and the connection between them but
|
|
|
slight, we must still attribute to them a special theoretical value
|
|
|
as well as practical utility--all the more so because our knowledge
|
|
|
of the theory and use of colours at the time of the Renaissance is
|
|
|
still extremely limited._
|
|
|
|
|
|
The reciprocal effects of colours on objects placed opposite each
|
|
|
other (263-272).
|
|
|
|
|
|
263.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The hue of an illuminated object is affected by that of the luminous
|
|
|
body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
264.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF SHADOW.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The surface of any opaque body is affected by the colour of
|
|
|
surrounding objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
265.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A shadow is always affected by the colour of the surface on which it
|
|
|
is cast.
|
|
|
|
|
|
266.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An image produced in a mirror is affected by the colour of the
|
|
|
mirror.
|
|
|
|
|
|
267.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF LIGHT AND SHADE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every portion of the surface of a body is varied [in hue] by the
|
|
|
[reflected] colour of the object that may be opposite to it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXAMPLE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you place a spherical body between various objects that is to say
|
|
|
with [direct] sunlight on one side of it, and on the other a wall
|
|
|
illuminated by the sun, which wall may be green or of any other
|
|
|
colour, while the surface on which it is placed may be red, and the
|
|
|
two lateral sides are in shadow, you will see that the natural
|
|
|
colour of that body will assume something of the hue reflected from
|
|
|
those objects. The strongest will be [given by] the luminous body;
|
|
|
the second by the illuminated wall, the third by the shadows. There
|
|
|
will still be a portion which will take a tint from the colour of
|
|
|
the edges.
|
|
|
|
|
|
268.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The surface of every opaque body is affected by the colour of the
|
|
|
objects surrounding it. But this effect will be strong or weak in
|
|
|
proportion as those objects are more or less remote and more or less
|
|
|
strongly [coloured].
|
|
|
|
|
|
269.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The surface of every opaque body assumes the hues reflected from
|
|
|
surrounding objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The surface of an opaque body assumes the hues of surrounding
|
|
|
objects more strongly in proportion as the rays that form the images
|
|
|
of those objects strike the surface at more equal angles.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And the surface of an opaque body assumes a stronger hue from the
|
|
|
surrounding objects in proportion as that surface is whiter and the
|
|
|
colour of the object brighter or more highly illuminated.
|
|
|
|
|
|
270.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE RAYS WHICH CONVEY THROUGH THE AIR THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All the minutest parts of the image intersect each other without
|
|
|
interfering with each other. To prove this let _r_ be one of the
|
|
|
sides of the hole, opposite to which let _s_ be the eye which sees
|
|
|
the lower end _o_ of the line _n o_. The other extremity cannot
|
|
|
transmit its image to the eye _s_ as it has to strike the end _r_
|
|
|
and it is the same with regard to _m_ at the middle of the line. The
|
|
|
case is the same with the upper extremity _n_ and the eye _u_. And
|
|
|
if the end _n_ is red the eye _u_ on that side of the holes will not
|
|
|
see the green colour of _o_, but only the red of _n_ according to
|
|
|
the 7th of this where it is said: Every form projects images from
|
|
|
itself by the shortest line, which necessarily is a straight line,
|
|
|
&c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: 13. This probably refers to the diagram given under No.
|
|
|
66.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
271.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The surface of a body assumes in some degree the hue of those around
|
|
|
it. The colours of illuminated objects are reflected from the
|
|
|
surfaces of one to the other in various spots, according to the
|
|
|
various positions of those objects. Let _o_ be a blue object in full
|
|
|
light, facing all by itself the space _b c_ on the white sphere _a b
|
|
|
e d e f_, and it will give it a blue tinge, _m_ is a yellow body
|
|
|
reflected onto the space _a b_ at the same time as _o_ the blue
|
|
|
body, and they give it a green colour (by the 2nd [proposition] of
|
|
|
this which shows that blue and yellow make a beautiful green &c.)
|
|
|
And the rest will be set forth in the Book on Painting. In that Book
|
|
|
it will be shown, that, by transmitting the images of objects and
|
|
|
the colours of bodies illuminated by sunlight through a small round
|
|
|
perforation and into a dark chamber onto a plane surface, which
|
|
|
itself is quite white, &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But every thing will be upside down.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Combination of different colours in cast shadows.
|
|
|
|
|
|
272.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That which casts the shadow does not face it, because the shadows
|
|
|
are produced by the light which causes and surrounds the shadows.
|
|
|
The shadow caused by the light _e_, which is yellow, has a blue
|
|
|
tinge, because the shadow of the body _a_ is cast upon the pavement
|
|
|
at _b_, where the blue light falls; and the shadow produced by the
|
|
|
light _d_, which is blue, will be yellow at _c_, because the yellow
|
|
|
light falls there and the surrounding background to these shadows _b
|
|
|
c_ will, besides its natural colour, assume a hue compounded of
|
|
|
yellow and blue, because it is lighted by the yellow light and by
|
|
|
the blue light both at once.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadows of various colours, as affected by the lights falling on
|
|
|
them. That light which causes the shadow does not face it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the original diagram we find in the circle _e_
|
|
|
"_giallo_" (yellow) and the cirle _d_ "_azurro"_ (blue) and also
|
|
|
under the circle of shadow to the left "_giallo_" is written and
|
|
|
under that to the right "_azurro_".
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the second diagram where four circles are placed in a row we find
|
|
|
written, beginning at the left hand, "_giallo_" (yellow), "_azurro_"
|
|
|
(blue), "_verde_" (green), "_rosso_" (red).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The effect of colours in the camera obscura (273-274).
|
|
|
|
|
|
273.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The edges of a colour(ed object) transmitted through a small hole
|
|
|
are more conspicuous than the central portions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The edges of the images, of whatever colour, which are transmitted
|
|
|
through a small aperture into a dark chamber will always be stronger
|
|
|
than the middle portions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
274.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE INTERSECTIONS OF THE IMAGES IN THE PUPIL OF THE EYE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The intersections of the images as they enter the pupil do not
|
|
|
mingle in confusion in the space where that intersection unites
|
|
|
them; as is evident, since, if the rays of the sun pass through two
|
|
|
panes of glass in close contact, of which one is blue and the other
|
|
|
yellow, the rays, in penetrating them, do not become blue or yellow
|
|
|
but a beautiful green. And the same thing would happen in the eye,
|
|
|
if the images which were yellow or green should mingle where they
|
|
|
[meet and] intersect as they enter the pupil. As this does not
|
|
|
happen such a mingling does not exist.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE NATURE OF THE RAYS COMPOSED OF THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS, AND OF
|
|
|
THEIR INTERSECTIONS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The directness of the rays which transmit the forms and colours of
|
|
|
the bodies whence they proceed does not tinge the air nor can they
|
|
|
affect each other by contact where they intersect. They affect only
|
|
|
the spot where they vanish and cease to exist, because that spot
|
|
|
faces and is faced by the original source of these rays, and no
|
|
|
other object, which surrounds that original source can be seen by
|
|
|
the eye where these rays are cut off and destroyed, leaving there
|
|
|
the spoil they have conveyed to it. And this is proved by the 4th
|
|
|
[proposition], on the colour of bodies, which says: The surface of
|
|
|
every opaque body is affected by the colour of surrounding objects;
|
|
|
hence we may conclude that the spot which, by means of the rays
|
|
|
which convey the image, faces--and is faced by the cause of the
|
|
|
image, assumes the colour of that object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the colours of derived shadows (275. 276).
|
|
|
|
|
|
275.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ANY SHADOW CAST BY AN OPAQUE BODY SMALLER THAN THE LIGHT CAUSING THE
|
|
|
SHADOW WILL THROW A DERIVED SHADOW WHICH IS TINGED BY THE COLOUR OF
|
|
|
THE LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let _n_ be the source of the shadow _e f_; it will assume its hue.
|
|
|
Let _o_ be the source of _h e_ which will in the same way be tinged
|
|
|
by its hue and so also the colour of _v h_ will be affected by _p_
|
|
|
which causes it; and the shadow of the triangle _z k y_ will be
|
|
|
affected by the colour of _q_, because it is produced by it. [7] In
|
|
|
proportion as _c d_ goes into _a d_, will _n r s_ be darker than
|
|
|
_m_; and the rest of the space will be shadowless [11]. _f g_ is
|
|
|
the highest light, because here the whole light of the window _a d_
|
|
|
falls; and thus on the opaque body _m e_ is in equally high light;
|
|
|
_z k y_ is a triangle which includes the deepest shadow, because the
|
|
|
light _a d_ cannot reach any part of it. _x h_ is the 2nd grade of
|
|
|
shadow, because it receives only 1/3 of the light from the window,
|
|
|
that is _c d_. The third grade of shadow is _h e_, where two thirds
|
|
|
of the light from the window is visible. The last grade of shadow is
|
|
|
_b d e f_, because the highest grade of light from the window falls
|
|
|
at _f_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The diagram Pl. III, No. 1 belongs to this chapter as
|
|
|
well as the text given in No. 148. Lines 7-11 (compare lines 8-12 of
|
|
|
No. 148) which are written within the diagram, evidently apply to
|
|
|
both sections and have therefore been inserted in both.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
276.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE COLOURS OF SIMPLE DERIVED SHADOWS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The colour of derived shadows is always affected by that of the body
|
|
|
towards which they are cast. To prove this: let an opaque body be
|
|
|
placed between the plane _s c t d_ and the blue light _d e_ and the
|
|
|
red light _a b_, then I say that _d e_, the blue light, will fall on
|
|
|
the whole surface _s c t d_ excepting at _o p_ which is covered by
|
|
|
the shadow of the body _q r_, as is shown by the straight lines _d q
|
|
|
o e r p_. And the same occurs with the light _a b_ which falls on
|
|
|
the whole surface _s c t d_ excepting at the spot obscured by the
|
|
|
shadow _q r_; as is shown by the lines _d q o_, and _e r p_. Hence
|
|
|
we may conclude that the shadow _n m_ is exposed to the blue light
|
|
|
_d e_; but, as the red light _a b_ cannot fall there, _n m_ will
|
|
|
appear as a blue shadow on a red background tinted with blue,
|
|
|
because on the surface _s c t d_ both lights can fall. But in the
|
|
|
shadows only one single light falls; for this reason these shadows
|
|
|
are of medium depth, since, if no light whatever mingled with the
|
|
|
shadow, it would be of the first degree of darkness &c. But in the
|
|
|
shadow at _o p_ the blue light does not fall, because the body _q r_
|
|
|
interposes and intercepts it there. Only the red light _a b_ falls
|
|
|
there and tinges the shadow of a red hue and so a ruddy shadow
|
|
|
appears on the background of mingled red and blue.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadow of _q r_ at _o p_ is red, being caused by the blue light
|
|
|
_d e_; and the shadow of _q r_ at _o' p'_ is blue being caused by
|
|
|
the red light _a b_. Hence we say that the blue light in this
|
|
|
instance causes a red derived shadow from the opaque body _q' r'_,
|
|
|
while the red light causes the same body to cast a blue derived
|
|
|
shadow; but the primary shadow [on the dark side of the body itself]
|
|
|
is not of either of those hues, but a mixture of red and blue.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The derived shadows will be equal in depth if they are produced by
|
|
|
lights of equal strength and at an equal distance; this is proved.
|
|
|
[Footnote 53: The text is unfinished in the original.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the original diagram Leonardo has written within the
|
|
|
circle _q r corpo obroso_ (body in shadow); at the spot marked _A,
|
|
|
luminoso azzurro_ (blue luminous body); at _B, luminoso rosso_ (red
|
|
|
luminous body). At _E_ we read _ombra azzurra_ (blue tinted shadow)
|
|
|
and at _D ombra rossa_ (red tinted shadow).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the nature of colours (277. 278).
|
|
|
|
|
|
277.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No white or black is transparent.
|
|
|
|
|
|
278.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 2: See Footnote 3] Since white is not a colour but the
|
|
|
neutral recipient of every colour [Footnote 3: _il bianco non e
|
|
|
colore ma e inpotentia ricettiva d'ogni colore_ (white is not a
|
|
|
colour, but the neutral recipient of every colour). LEON BATT.
|
|
|
ALBERTI "_Della pittura_" libro I, asserts on the contrary: "_Il
|
|
|
bianco e'l nero non sono veri colori, ma sono alteratione delli
|
|
|
altri colori_" (ed. JANITSCHEK, p. 67; Vienna 1877).], when it is
|
|
|
seen in the open air and high up, all its shadows are bluish; and
|
|
|
this is caused, according to the 4th [prop.], which says: the
|
|
|
surface of every opaque body assumes the hue of the surrounding
|
|
|
objects. Now this white [body] being deprived of the light of the
|
|
|
sun by the interposition of some body between the sun and itself,
|
|
|
all that portion of it which is exposed to the sun and atmosphere
|
|
|
assumes the colour of the sun and atmosphere; the side on which the
|
|
|
sun does not fall remains in shadow and assumes the hue of the
|
|
|
atmosphere. And if this white object did not reflect the green of
|
|
|
the fields all the way to the horizon nor get the brightness of the
|
|
|
horizon itself, it would certainly appear simply of the same hue as
|
|
|
the atmosphere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On gradations in the depth of colours (279. 280).
|
|
|
|
|
|
279.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Since black, when painted next to white, looks no blacker than when
|
|
|
next to black; and white when next to black looks no whiter than
|
|
|
white, as is seen by the images transmitted through a small hole or
|
|
|
by the edges of any opaque screen ...
|
|
|
|
|
|
280.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF COLOURS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of several colours, all equally white, that will look whitest which
|
|
|
is against the darkest background. And black will look intensest
|
|
|
against the whitest background.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And red will look most vivid against the yellowest background; and
|
|
|
the same is the case with all colours when surrounded by their
|
|
|
strongest contrasts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the reflection of colours (281-283).
|
|
|
|
|
|
281.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every object devoid of colour in itself is more or less tinged by
|
|
|
the colour [of the object] placed opposite. This may be seen by
|
|
|
experience, inasmuch as any object which mirrors another assumes the
|
|
|
colour of the object mirrored in it. And if the surface thus
|
|
|
partially coloured is white the portion which has a red reflection
|
|
|
will appear red, or any other colour, whether bright or dark.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every opaque and colourless body assumes the hue of the colour
|
|
|
reflected on it; as happens with a white wall.
|
|
|
|
|
|
282.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That side of an object in light and shade which is towards the light
|
|
|
transmits the images of its details more distinctly and immediately
|
|
|
to the eye than the side which is in shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The solar rays reflected on a square mirror will be thrown back to
|
|
|
distant objects in a circular form.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Any white and opaque surface will be partially coloured by
|
|
|
reflections from surrounding objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 281. 282: The title line of these chapters is in the
|
|
|
original simply _"pro"_, which may be an abbreviation for either
|
|
|
_Propositione_ or _Prospettiva_--taking Prospettiva of course in its
|
|
|
widest sense, as we often find it used in Leonardo's writings. The
|
|
|
title _"pro"_ has here been understood to mean _Prospettiva_, in
|
|
|
accordance with the suggestion afforded by page 10b of this same
|
|
|
MS., where the first section is headed _Prospettiva_ in full (see
|
|
|
No. 94), while the four following sections are headed merely _"pro"_
|
|
|
(see No. 85).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
283.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHAT PORTION OF A COLOURED SURFACE OUGHT IN REASON TO BE THE MOST
|
|
|
INTENSE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If _a_ is the light, and _b_ illuminated by it in a direct line,
|
|
|
_c_, on which the light cannot fall, is lighted only by reflection
|
|
|
from _b_ which, let us say, is red. Hence the light reflected from
|
|
|
it, will be affected by the hue of the surface causing it and will
|
|
|
tinge the surface _c_ with red. And if _c_ is also red you will see
|
|
|
it much more intense than _b_; and if it were yellow you would see
|
|
|
there a colour between yellow and red.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the use of dark and light colours in painting (284--286).
|
|
|
|
|
|
284.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHY BEAUTIFUL COLOURS MUST BE IN THE [HIGHEST] LIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Since we see that the quality of colour is known [only] by means of
|
|
|
light, it is to be supposed that where there is most light the true
|
|
|
character of a colour in light will be best seen; and where there is
|
|
|
most shadow the colour will be affected by the tone of that. Hence,
|
|
|
O Painter! remember to show the true quality of colours in bright
|
|
|
lights.
|
|
|
|
|
|
285.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An object represented in white and black will display stronger
|
|
|
relief than in any other way; hence I would remind you O Painter! to
|
|
|
dress your figures in the lightest colours you can, since, if you
|
|
|
put them in dark colours, they will be in too slight relief and
|
|
|
inconspicuous from a distance. And the reason is that the shadows of
|
|
|
all objects are dark. And if you make a dress dark there is little
|
|
|
variety in the lights and shadows, while in light colours there are
|
|
|
many grades.
|
|
|
|
|
|
286.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Colours seen in shadow will display more or less of their natural
|
|
|
brilliancy in proportion as they are in fainter or deeper shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But if these same colours are situated in a well-lighted place, they
|
|
|
will appear brighter in proportion as the light is more brilliant.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE ADVERSARY.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The variety of colours in shadow must be as great as that of the
|
|
|
colours in the objects in that shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE ANSWER.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Colours seen in shadow will display less variety in proportion as
|
|
|
the shadows in which they lie are deeper. And evidence of this is to
|
|
|
be had by looking from an open space into the doorways of dark and
|
|
|
shadowy churches, where the pictures which are painted in various
|
|
|
colours all look of uniform darkness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hence at a considerable distance all the shadows of different
|
|
|
colours will appear of the same darkness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is the light side of an object in light and shade which shows the
|
|
|
true colour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the colours of the rainbow (287. 288).
|
|
|
|
|
|
287.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Treat of the rainbow in the last book on Painting, but first write
|
|
|
the book on colours produced by the mixture of other colours, so as
|
|
|
to be able to prove by those painters' colours how the colours of
|
|
|
the rainbow are produced.
|
|
|
|
|
|
288.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHETHER THE COLOURS OF THE RAINBOW ARE PRODUCED BY THE SUN.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The colours of the rainbow are not produced by the sun, for they
|
|
|
occur in many ways without the sunshine; as may be seen by holding a
|
|
|
glass of water up to the eye; when, in the glass--where there are
|
|
|
those minute bubbles always seen in coarse glass--each bubble, even
|
|
|
though the sun does not fall on it, will produce on one side all the
|
|
|
colours of the rainbow; as you may see by placing the glass between
|
|
|
the day light and your eye in such a way as that it is close to the
|
|
|
eye, while on one side the glass admits the [diffused] light of the
|
|
|
atmosphere, and on the other side the shadow of the wall on one side
|
|
|
of the window; either left or right, it matters not which. Then, by
|
|
|
turning the glass round you will see these colours all round the
|
|
|
bubbles in the glass &c. And the rest shall be said in its place.
|
|
|
|
|
|
THAT THE EYE HAS NO PART IN PRODUCING THE COLOURS OF THE RAINBOW.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the experiment just described, the eye would seem to have some
|
|
|
share in the colours of the rainbow, since these bubbles in the
|
|
|
glass do not display the colours except through the medium of the
|
|
|
eye. But, if you place the glass full of water on the window sill,
|
|
|
in such a position as that the outer side is exposed to the sun's
|
|
|
rays, you will see the same colours produced in the spot of light
|
|
|
thrown through the glass and upon the floor, in a dark place, below
|
|
|
the window; and as the eye is not here concerned in it, we may
|
|
|
evidently, and with certainty pronounce that the eye has no share in
|
|
|
producing them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE COLOURS IN THE FEATHERS OF CERTAIN BIRDS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are many birds in various regions of the world on whose
|
|
|
feathers we see the most splendid colours produced as they move, as
|
|
|
we see in our own country in the feathers of peacocks or on the
|
|
|
necks of ducks or pigeons, &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Again, on the surface of antique glass found underground and on the
|
|
|
roots of turnips kept for some time at the bottom of wells or other
|
|
|
stagnant waters [we see] that each root displays colours similar to
|
|
|
those of the real rainbow. They may also be seen when oil has been
|
|
|
placed on the top of water and in the solar rays reflected from the
|
|
|
surface of a diamond or beryl; again, through the angular facet of a
|
|
|
beryl every dark object against a background of the atmosphere or
|
|
|
any thing else equally pale-coloured is surrounded by these rainbow
|
|
|
colours between the atmosphere and the dark body; and in many other
|
|
|
circumstances which I will not mention, as these suffice for my
|
|
|
purpose.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_VI._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_'Prospettiva de' colri' (Perspective of Colour)_
|
|
|
|
|
|
_and_
|
|
|
|
|
|
_'Prospettiva aerea' (Aerial Perspective)._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Leonardo distinctly separates these branches of his subject, as may
|
|
|
be seen in the beginning of No._ 295. _Attempts have been made to
|
|
|
cast doubts on the results which Leonardo arrived at by experiment
|
|
|
on the perspective of colour, but not with justice, as may be seen
|
|
|
from the original text of section_ 294.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_The question as to the composition of the atmosphere, which is
|
|
|
inseparable from a discussion on Aerial Perspective, forms a
|
|
|
separate theory which is treated at considerable length. Indeed the
|
|
|
author enters into it so fully that we cannot escape the conviction
|
|
|
that he must have dwelt with particular pleasure on this part of his
|
|
|
subject, and that he attached great importance to giving it a
|
|
|
character of general applicability._
|
|
|
|
|
|
General rules (289--291).
|
|
|
|
|
|
289.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The variety of colour in objects cannot be discerned at a great
|
|
|
distance, excepting in those parts which are directly lighted up by
|
|
|
the solar rays.
|
|
|
|
|
|
290.
|
|
|
|
|
|
As to the colours of objects: at long distances no difference is
|
|
|
perceptible in the parts in shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
291.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE VISIBILITY OF COLOURS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Which colour strikes most? An object at a distance is most
|
|
|
conspicuous, when it is lightest, and the darkest is least visible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An exceptional case.
|
|
|
|
|
|
292.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of the edges [outlines] of shadows. Some have misty and ill defined
|
|
|
edges, others distinct ones.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No opaque body can be devoid of light and shade, except it is in a
|
|
|
mist, on ground covered with snow, or when snow is falling on the
|
|
|
open country which has no light on it and is surrounded with
|
|
|
darkness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And this occurs [only] in spherical bodies, because in other bodies
|
|
|
which have limbs and parts, those sides of limbs which face each
|
|
|
other reflect on each other the accidental [hue and tone] of their
|
|
|
surface.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An experiment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
293.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ALL COLOURS ARE AT A DISTANCE UNDISTINGUISHABLE AND UNDISCERNIBLE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All colours at a distance are undistinguishable in shadow, because
|
|
|
an object which is not in the highest light is incapable of
|
|
|
transmitting its image to the eye through an atmosphere more
|
|
|
luminous than itself; since the lesser brightness must be absorbed
|
|
|
by the greater. For instance: We, in a house, can see that all the
|
|
|
colours on the surface of the walls are clearly and instantly
|
|
|
visible when the windows of the house are open; but if we were to go
|
|
|
out of the house and look in at the windows from a little distance
|
|
|
to see the paintings on those walls, instead of the paintings we
|
|
|
should see an uniform deep and colourless shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The practice of the prospettiva de colori.
|
|
|
|
|
|
294.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW A PAINTER SHOULD CARRY OUT THE PERSPECTIVE OF COLOUR IN
|
|
|
PRACTICE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In order to put into practice this perspective of the variation and
|
|
|
loss or diminution of the essential character of colours, observe at
|
|
|
every hundred braccia some objects standing in the landscape, such
|
|
|
as trees, houses, men and particular places. Then in front of the
|
|
|
first tree have a very steady plate of glass and keep your eye very
|
|
|
steady, and then, on this plate of glass, draw a tree, tracing it
|
|
|
over the form of that tree. Then move it on one side so far as that
|
|
|
the real tree is close by the side of the tree you have drawn; then
|
|
|
colour your drawing in such a way as that in colour and form the two
|
|
|
may be alike, and that both, if you close one eye, seem to be
|
|
|
painted on the glass and at the same distance. Then, by the same
|
|
|
method, represent a second tree, and a third, with a distance of a
|
|
|
hundred braccia between each. And these will serve as a standard and
|
|
|
guide whenever you work on your own pictures, wherever they may
|
|
|
apply, and will enable you to give due distance in those works. [14]
|
|
|
But I have found that as a rule the second is 4/5 of the first when
|
|
|
it is 20 braccia beyond it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: This chapter is one of those copied in the Manuscript of
|
|
|
the Vatican library Urbinas 1270, and the original text is rendered
|
|
|
here with no other alterations, but in the orthography. H. LUDWIG,
|
|
|
in his edition of this copy translates lines 14 and 15 thus: "_Ich
|
|
|
finde aber als Regel, dass der zweite um vier Funftel des ersten
|
|
|
abnimmt, wenn er namlich zwanzig Ellen vom ersten entfernt ist
|
|
|
(?)"_. He adds in his commentary: "_Das Ende der Nummer ist wohl
|
|
|
jedenfalls verstummelt_". However the translation given above shows
|
|
|
that it admits of a different rendering.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The rules of aerial perspective (295--297).
|
|
|
|
|
|
295.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF AERIAL PERSPECTIVE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is another kind of perspective which I call Aerial
|
|
|
Perspective, because by the atmosphere we are able to distinguish
|
|
|
the variations in distance of different buildings, which appear
|
|
|
placed on a single line; as, for instance, when we see several
|
|
|
buildings beyond a wall, all of which, as they appear above the top
|
|
|
of the wall, look of the same size, while you wish to represent them
|
|
|
in a picture as more remote one than another and to give the effect
|
|
|
of a somewhat dense atmosphere. You know that in an atmosphere of
|
|
|
equal density the remotest objects seen through it, as mountains, in
|
|
|
consequence of the great quantity of atmosphere between your eye and
|
|
|
them--appear blue and almost of the same hue as the atmosphere
|
|
|
itself [Footnote 10: _quado il sole e per leuante_ (when the sun is
|
|
|
in the East). Apparently the author refers here to morning light in
|
|
|
general. H. LUDWIG however translates this passage from the Vatican
|
|
|
copy "_wenn namlich die Sonne (dahinter) im Osten steht_".] when the
|
|
|
sun is in the East [Footnote 11: See Footnote 10]. Hence you must
|
|
|
make the nearest building above the wall of its real colour, but the
|
|
|
more distant ones make less defined and bluer. Those you wish should
|
|
|
look farthest away you must make proportionately bluer; thus, if one
|
|
|
is to be five times as distant, make it five times bluer. And by
|
|
|
this rule the buildings which above a [given] line appear of the
|
|
|
same size, will plainly be distinguished as to which are the more
|
|
|
remote and which larger than the others.
|
|
|
|
|
|
296.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The medium lying between the eye and the object seen, tinges that
|
|
|
object with its colour, as the blueness of the atmosphere makes the
|
|
|
distant mountains appear blue and red glass makes objects seen
|
|
|
beyond it, look red. The light shed round them by the stars is
|
|
|
obscured by the darkness of the night which lies between the eye and
|
|
|
the radiant light of the stars.
|
|
|
|
|
|
297.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Take care that the perspective of colour does not disagree with the
|
|
|
size of your objects, hat is to say: that the colours diminish from
|
|
|
their natural [vividness] in proportion as the objects at various
|
|
|
distances dimmish from their natural size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the relative density of the atmosphere (298--290).
|
|
|
|
|
|
298.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHY THE ATMOSPHERE MUST BE REPRESENTED AS PALER TOWARDS THE LOWER
|
|
|
PORTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Because the atmosphere is dense near the earth, and the higher it is
|
|
|
the rarer it becomes. When the sun is in the East if you look
|
|
|
towards the West and a little way to the South and North, you will
|
|
|
see that this dense atmosphere receives more light from the sun than
|
|
|
the rarer; because the rays meet with greater resistance. And if the
|
|
|
sky, as you see it, ends on a low plain, that lowest portion of the
|
|
|
sky will be seen through a denser and whiter atmosphere, which will
|
|
|
weaken its true colour as seen through that medium, and there the
|
|
|
sky will look whiter than it is above you, where the line of sight
|
|
|
travels through a smaller space of air charged with heavy vapour.
|
|
|
And if you turn to the East, the atmosphere will appear darker as
|
|
|
you look lower down because the luminous rays pass less freely
|
|
|
through the lower atmosphere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
299.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE MODE OF TREATING REMOTE OBJECTS IN PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is easy to perceive that the atmosphere which lies closest to the
|
|
|
level ground is denser than the rest, and that where it is higher
|
|
|
up, it is rarer and more transparent. The lower portions of large
|
|
|
and lofty objects which are at a distance are not much seen, because
|
|
|
you see them along a line which passes through a denser and thicker
|
|
|
section of the atmosphere. The summits of such heights are seen
|
|
|
along a line which, though it starts from your eye in a dense
|
|
|
atmosphere, still, as it ends at the top of those lofty objects,
|
|
|
ceases in a much rarer atmosphere than exists at their base; for
|
|
|
this reason the farther this line extends from your eye, from point
|
|
|
to point the atmosphere becomes more and more rare. Hence, O
|
|
|
Painter! when you represent mountains, see that from hill to hill
|
|
|
the bases are paler than the summits, and in proportion as they
|
|
|
recede beyond each other make the bases paler than the summits;
|
|
|
while, the higher they are the more you must show of their true form
|
|
|
and colour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the colour of the atmosphere (300-307).
|
|
|
|
|
|
300.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE COLOUR OF THE ATMOSPHERE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I say that the blueness we see in the atmosphere is not intrinsic
|
|
|
colour, but is caused by warm vapour evaporated in minute and
|
|
|
insensible atoms on which the solar rays fall, rendering them
|
|
|
luminous against the infinite darkness of the fiery sphere which
|
|
|
lies beyond and includes it. And this may be seen, as I saw it by
|
|
|
any one going up [Footnote 5: With regard to the place spoken of as
|
|
|
_M'oboso_ (compare No. 301 line 20) its identity will be discussed
|
|
|
under Leonardo's Topographical notes in Vol. II.] Monboso, a peak of
|
|
|
the Alps which divide France from Italy. The base of this mountain
|
|
|
gives birth to the four rivers which flow in four different
|
|
|
directions through the whole of Europe. And no mountain has its base
|
|
|
at so great a height as this, which lifts itself almost above the
|
|
|
clouds; and snow seldom falls there, but only hail in the summer,
|
|
|
when the clouds are highest. And this hail lies [unmelted] there, so
|
|
|
that if it were not for the absorption of the rising and falling
|
|
|
clouds, which does not happen twice in an age, an enormous mass of
|
|
|
ice would be piled up there by the hail, and in the middle of July I
|
|
|
found it very considerable. There I saw above me the dark sky, and
|
|
|
the sun as it fell on the mountain was far brighter here than in the
|
|
|
plains below, because a smaller extent of atmosphere lay between the
|
|
|
summit of the mountain and the sun. Again as an illustration of the
|
|
|
colour of the atmosphere I will mention the smoke of old and dry
|
|
|
wood, which, as it comes out of a chimney, appears to turn very
|
|
|
blue, when seen between the eye and the dark distance. But as it
|
|
|
rises, and comes between the eye and the bright atmosphere, it at
|
|
|
once shows of an ashy grey colour; and this happens because it no
|
|
|
longer has darkness beyond it, but this bright and luminous space.
|
|
|
If the smoke is from young, green wood, it will not appear blue,
|
|
|
because, not being transparent and being full of superabundant
|
|
|
moisture, it has the effect of condensed clouds which take distinct
|
|
|
lights and shadows like a solid body. The same occurs with the
|
|
|
atmosphere, which, when overcharged with moisture appears white, and
|
|
|
the small amount of heated moisture makes it dark, of a dark blue
|
|
|
colour; and this will suffice us so far as concerns the colour of
|
|
|
the atmosphere; though it might be added that, if this transparent
|
|
|
blue were the natural colour of the atmosphere, it would follow that
|
|
|
wherever a larger mass air intervened between the eye and the
|
|
|
element of fire, the azure colour would be more intense; as we see
|
|
|
in blue glass and in sapphires, which are darker in proportion as
|
|
|
they are larger. But the atmosphere in such circumstances behaves in
|
|
|
an opposite manner, inasmuch as where a greater quantity of it lies
|
|
|
between the eye and the sphere of fire, it is seen much whiter. This
|
|
|
occurs towards the horizon. And the less the extent of atmosphere
|
|
|
between the eye and the sphere of fire, the deeper is the blue
|
|
|
colour, as may be seen even on low plains. Hence it follows, as I
|
|
|
say, that the atmosphere assumes this azure hue by reason of the
|
|
|
particles of moisture which catch the rays of the sun. Again, we may
|
|
|
note the difference in particles of dust, or particles of smoke, in
|
|
|
the sun beams admitted through holes into a dark chamber, when the
|
|
|
former will look ash grey and the thin smoke will appear of a most
|
|
|
beautiful blue; and it may be seen again in in the dark shadows of
|
|
|
distant mountains when the air between the eye and those shadows
|
|
|
will look very blue, though the brightest parts of those mountains
|
|
|
will not differ much from their true colour. But if any one wishes
|
|
|
for a final proof let him paint a board with various colours, among
|
|
|
them an intense black; and over all let him lay a very thin and
|
|
|
transparent [coating of] white. He will then see that this
|
|
|
transparent white will nowhere show a more beautiful blue than over
|
|
|
the black--but it must be very thin and finely ground.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 7: _reta_ here has the sense of _malanno_.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
301.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Experience shows us that the air must have darkness beyond it and
|
|
|
yet it appears blue. If you produce a small quantity of smoke from
|
|
|
dry wood and the rays of the sun fall on this smoke, and if you then
|
|
|
place behind the smoke a piece of black velvet on which the sun does
|
|
|
not shine, you will see that all the smoke which is between the eye
|
|
|
and the black stuff will appear of a beautiful blue colour. And if
|
|
|
instead of the velvet you place a white cloth smoke, that is too
|
|
|
thick smoke, hinders, and too thin smoke does not produce, the
|
|
|
perfection of this blue colour. Hence a moderate amount of smoke
|
|
|
produces the finest blue. Water violently ejected in a fine spray
|
|
|
and in a dark chamber where the sun beams are admitted produces
|
|
|
these blue rays and the more vividly if it is distilled water, and
|
|
|
thin smoke looks blue. This I mention in order to show that the
|
|
|
blueness of the atmosphere is caused by the darkness beyond it, and
|
|
|
these instances are given for those who cannot confirm my experience
|
|
|
on Monboso.
|
|
|
|
|
|
302.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the smoke from dry wood is seen between the eye of the
|
|
|
spectator and some dark space [or object], it will look blue. Thus
|
|
|
the sky looks blue by reason of the darkness beyond it. And if you
|
|
|
look towards the horizon of the sky, you will see the atmosphere is
|
|
|
not blue, and this is caused by its density. And thus at each
|
|
|
degree, as you raise your eyes above the horizon up to the sky over
|
|
|
your head, you will see the atmosphere look darker [blue] and this
|
|
|
is because a smaller density of air lies between your eye and the
|
|
|
[outer] darkness. And if you go to the top of a high mountain the
|
|
|
sky will look proportionately darker above you as the atmosphere
|
|
|
becomes rarer between you and the [outer] darkness; and this will be
|
|
|
more visible at each degree of increasing height till at last we
|
|
|
should find darkness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That smoke will look bluest which rises from the driest wood and
|
|
|
which is nearest to the fire and is seen against the darkest
|
|
|
background, and with the sunlight upon it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
303.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A dark object will appear bluest in proportion as it has a greater
|
|
|
mass of luminous atmosphere between it and the eye. As may be seen
|
|
|
in the colour of the sky.
|
|
|
|
|
|
304.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The atmosphere is blue by reason of the darkness above it because
|
|
|
black and white make blue.
|
|
|
|
|
|
305.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the morning the mist is denser above than below, because the sun
|
|
|
draws it upwards; hence tall buildings, even if the summit is at the
|
|
|
same distance as the base have the summit invisible. Therefore,
|
|
|
also, the sky looks darkest [in colour] overhead, and towards the
|
|
|
horizon it is not blue but rather between smoke and dust colour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The atmosphere, when full of mist, is quite devoid of blueness, and
|
|
|
only appears of the colour of clouds, which shine white when the
|
|
|
weather is fine. And the more you turn to the west the darker it
|
|
|
will be, and the brighter as you look to the east. And the verdure
|
|
|
of the fields is bluish in a thin mist, but grows grey in a dense
|
|
|
one.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The buildings in the west will only show their illuminated side,
|
|
|
where the sun shines, and the mist hides the rest. When the sun
|
|
|
rises and chases away the haze, the hills on the side where it lifts
|
|
|
begin to grow clearer, and look blue, and seem to smoke with the
|
|
|
vanishing mists; and the buildings reveal their lights and shadows;
|
|
|
through the thinner vapour they show only their lights and through
|
|
|
the thicker air nothing at all. This is when the movement of the
|
|
|
mist makes it part horizontally, and then the edges of the mist will
|
|
|
be indistinct against the blue of the sky, and towards the earth it
|
|
|
will look almost like dust blown up. In proportion as the atmosphere
|
|
|
is dense the buildings of a city and the trees in a landscape will
|
|
|
look fewer, because only the tallest and largest will be seen.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Darkness affects every thing with its hue, and the more an object
|
|
|
differs from darkness, the more we see its real and natural colour.
|
|
|
The mountains will look few, because only those will be seen which
|
|
|
are farthest apart; since, at such a distance, the density increases
|
|
|
to such a degree that it causes a brightness by which the darkness
|
|
|
of the hills becomes divided and vanishes indeed towards the top.
|
|
|
There is less [mist] between lower and nearer hills and yet little
|
|
|
is to be distinguished, and least towards the bottom.
|
|
|
|
|
|
306.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The surface of an object partakes of the colour of the light which
|
|
|
illuminates it; and of the colour of the atmosphere which lies
|
|
|
between the eye and that object, that is of the colour of the
|
|
|
transparent medium lying between the object and the eye; and among
|
|
|
colours of a similar character the second will be of the same tone
|
|
|
as the first, and this is caused by the increased thickness of the
|
|
|
colour of the medium lying between the object and the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
307. OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of various colours which are none of them blue that which at a great
|
|
|
distance will look bluest is the nearest to black; and so,
|
|
|
conversely, the colour which is least like black will at a great
|
|
|
distance best preserve its own colour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hence the green of fields will assume a bluer hue than yellow or
|
|
|
white will, and conversely yellow or white will change less than
|
|
|
green, and red still less.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_VII._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_On the Proportions and on the Movements of the Human Figure._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Leonardo's researches on the proportions and movements of the human
|
|
|
figure must have been for the most part completed and written before
|
|
|
the year_ 1498; _for LUCA PACIOLO writes, in the dedication to
|
|
|
Ludovico il Moro, of his book_ Divina Proportione, _which was
|
|
|
published in that year:_ "Leonardo da venci ... hauedo gia co tutta
|
|
|
diligetia al degno libro de pictura e movimenti humani posto fine".
|
|
|
|
|
|
_The selection of Leonardo's axioms contained in the Vatican copy
|
|
|
attributes these words to the author:_ "e il resto si dira nella
|
|
|
universale misura del huomo". (_MANZI, p. 147; LUDWIG, No. 264_).
|
|
|
_LOMAZZO, again, in his_ Idea del Tempio della Pittura Milano 1590,
|
|
|
cap. IV, _says:_ "Lionardo Vinci ... dimostro anco in figura tutte
|
|
|
le proporzioni dei membri del corpo umano".
|
|
|
|
|
|
_The Vatican copy includes but very few sections of the_ "Universale
|
|
|
misura del huomo" _and until now nothing has been made known of the
|
|
|
original MSS. on the subject which have supplied the very extensive
|
|
|
materials for this portion of the work. The collection at Windsor,
|
|
|
belonging to her Majesty the Queen, includes by far the most
|
|
|
important part of Leonardo's investigations on this subject,
|
|
|
constituting about half of the whole of the materials here
|
|
|
published; and the large number of original drawings adds greatly to
|
|
|
the interest which the subject itself must command. Luca Paciolo
|
|
|
would seem to have had these MSS. (which I have distinguished by the
|
|
|
initials W. P.) in his mind when he wrote the passage quoted above.
|
|
|
Still, certain notes of a later date--such as Nos. 360, 362 and 363,
|
|
|
from MS. E, written in 1513--14, sufficiently prove that Leonardo did
|
|
|
not consider his earlier studies on the Proportions and Movements of
|
|
|
the Human Figure final and complete, as we might suppose from Luca
|
|
|
Paciolo's statement. Or else he took the subject up again at a
|
|
|
subsequent period, since his former researches had been carried on
|
|
|
at Milan between 1490 and 1500. Indeed it is highly probable that
|
|
|
the anatomical studies which he was pursuing zvith so much zeal
|
|
|
between 1510--16 should have led him to reconsider the subject of
|
|
|
Proportion.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Preliminary observations (308. 309).
|
|
|
|
|
|
308.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every man, at three years old is half the full height he will grow
|
|
|
to at last.
|
|
|
|
|
|
309.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a man 2 braccia high is too small, one of four is too tall, the
|
|
|
medium being what is admirable. Between 2 and 4 comes 3; therefore
|
|
|
take a man of 3 braccia in height and measure him by the rule I will
|
|
|
give you. If you tell me that I may be mistaken, and judge a man to
|
|
|
be well proportioned who does not conform to this division, I answer
|
|
|
that you must look at many men of 3 braccia, and out of the larger
|
|
|
number who are alike in their limbs choose one of those who are most
|
|
|
graceful and take your measurements. The length of the hand is 1/3
|
|
|
of a braccio [8 inches] and this is found 9 times in man. And the
|
|
|
face [Footnote 7: The account here given of the _braccio_ is of
|
|
|
importance in understanding some of the succeeding chapters. _Testa_
|
|
|
must here be understood to mean the face. The statements in this
|
|
|
section are illustrated in part on Pl. XI.] is the same, and from
|
|
|
the pit of the throat to the shoulder, and from the shoulder to the
|
|
|
nipple, and from one nipple to the other, and from each nipple to
|
|
|
the pit of the throat.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Proportions of the head and face (310-318).
|
|
|
|
|
|
310.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The space between the parting of the lips [the mouth] and the base
|
|
|
of the nose is one-seventh of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The space from the mouth to the bottom of the chin _c d_ is the
|
|
|
fourth part of the face and equal to the width of the mouth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The space from the chin to the base of the nose _e f_ is the third
|
|
|
part of the face and equal to the length of the nose and to the
|
|
|
forehead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The distance from the middle of the nose to the bottom of the chin
|
|
|
_g h_, is half the length of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The distance from the top of the nose, where the eyebrows begin, to
|
|
|
the bottom of the chin, _i k_, is two thirds of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The space from the parting of the lips to the top of the chin _l m_,
|
|
|
that is where the chin ends and passes into the lower lip of the
|
|
|
mouth, is the third of the distance from the parting of the lips to
|
|
|
the bottom of the chin and is the twelfth part of the face. From the
|
|
|
top to the bottom of the chin _m n_ is the sixth part of the face
|
|
|
and is the fifty fourth part of a man's height.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the farthest projection of the chin to the throat _o p_ is
|
|
|
equal to the space between the mouth and the bottom of the chin, and
|
|
|
a fourth of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The distance from the top of the throat to the pit of the throat
|
|
|
below _q r_ is half the length of the face and the eighteenth part
|
|
|
of a man's height.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the chin to the back of the neck _s t_, is the same distance as
|
|
|
between the mouth and the roots of the hair, that is three quarters
|
|
|
of the head.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the chin to the jaw bone _v x_ is half the head and equal to
|
|
|
the thickness of the neck in profile.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The thickness of the head from the brow to the nape is once and 3/4
|
|
|
that of the neck.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The drawings to this text, lines 1-10 are on Pl. VII, No.
|
|
|
I. The two upper sketches of heads, Pl. VII, No. 2, belong to lines
|
|
|
11-14, and in the original are placed immediately below the sketches
|
|
|
reproduced on Pl. VII, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
311.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The distance from the attachment of one ear to the other is equal to
|
|
|
that from the meeting of the eyebrows to the chin, and in a fine
|
|
|
face the width of the mouth is equal to the length from the parting
|
|
|
of the lips to the bottom of the chin.
|
|
|
|
|
|
312.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The cut or depression below the lower lip of the mouth is half way
|
|
|
between the bottom of the nose and the bottom of the chin.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The face forms a square in itself; that is its width is from the
|
|
|
outer corner of one eye to the other, and its height is from the
|
|
|
very top of the nose to the bottom of the lower lip of the mouth;
|
|
|
then what remains above and below this square amounts to the height
|
|
|
of such another square, _a_ _b_ is equal to the space between _c_
|
|
|
_d_; _d_ _n_ in the same way to _n_ _c_, and likewise _s_ _r_, _q_
|
|
|
_p_, _h_ _k_ are equal to each other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is as far between _m_ and _s_ as from the bottom of the nose to
|
|
|
the chin. The ear is exactly as long as the nose. It is as far from
|
|
|
_x_ to _j_ as from the nose to the chin. The parting of the mouth
|
|
|
seen in profile slopes to the angle of the jaw. The ear should be as
|
|
|
high as from the bottom of the nose to the top of the eye-lid. The
|
|
|
space between the eyes is equal to the width of an eye. The ear is
|
|
|
over the middle of the neck, when seen in profile. The distance from
|
|
|
4 to 5 is equal to that from s_ to _r_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. VIII, No. I, where the text of lines 3-13 is also
|
|
|
given in facsimile.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
313.
|
|
|
|
|
|
(_a_ _b_) is equal to (_c_ _d_).
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. VII, No. 3. Reference may also be made here to
|
|
|
two pen and ink drawings of heads in profile with figured
|
|
|
measurements, of which there is no description in the MS. These are
|
|
|
given on Pl. XVII, No. 2.--A head, to the left, with part of the
|
|
|
torso [W. P. 5a], No. 1 on the same plate is from MS. A 2b and in
|
|
|
the original occurs on a page with wholly irrelevant text on matters
|
|
|
of natural history. M. RAVAISSON in his edition of the Paris MS. A
|
|
|
has reproduced this head and discussed it fully [note on page 12];
|
|
|
he has however somewhat altered the original measurements. The
|
|
|
complicated calculations which M. RAVAISSON has given appear to me
|
|
|
in no way justified. The sketch, as we see it, can hardly have been
|
|
|
intended for any thing more than an experimental attempt to
|
|
|
ascertain relative proportions. We do not find that Leonardo made
|
|
|
use of circular lines in any other study of the proportions of the
|
|
|
human head. At the same time we see that the proportions of this
|
|
|
sketch are not in accordance with the rules which he usually
|
|
|
observed (see for instance No. 310).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The head _a_ _f_ 1/6 larger than _n_ _f_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
315.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the eyebrow to the junction of the lip with the chin, and the
|
|
|
angle of the jaw and the upper angle where the ear joins the temple
|
|
|
will be a perfect square. And each side by itself is half the head.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The hollow of the cheek bone occurs half way between the tip of the
|
|
|
nose and the top of the jaw bone, which is the lower angle of the
|
|
|
setting on of the ear, in the frame here represented.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the angle of the eye-socket to the ear is as far as the length
|
|
|
of the ear, or the third of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. IX. The text, in the original is written behind
|
|
|
the head. The handwriting would seem to indicate a date earlier than
|
|
|
1480. On the same leaf there is a drawing in red chalk of two
|
|
|
horsemen of which only a portion of the upper figure is here
|
|
|
visible. The whole leaf measures 22 1/2 centimetres wide by 29 long,
|
|
|
and is numbered 127 in the top right-hand corner.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
316.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From _a_ to _b_--that is to say from the roots of the hair in front
|
|
|
to the top of the head--ought to be equal to _c_ _d_;--that is from
|
|
|
the bottom of the nose to the meeting of the lips in the middle of
|
|
|
the mouth. From the inner corner of the eye _m_ to the top of the
|
|
|
head _a_ is as far as from _m_ down to the chin _s_. _s_ _c_ _f_ _b_
|
|
|
are all at equal distances from each other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The drawing in silver-point on bluish tinted paper--Pl.
|
|
|
X--which belongs to this chapter has been partly drawn over in ink
|
|
|
by Leonardo himself.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
317.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the top of the head to the bottom of the chin is 1/9, and from
|
|
|
the roots of the hair to the chin is 1/9 of the distance from the
|
|
|
roots of the hair to the ground. The greatest width of the face is
|
|
|
equal to the space between the mouth and the roots of the hair and
|
|
|
is 1/12 of the whole height. From the top of the ear to the top of
|
|
|
the head is equal to the distance from the bottom of the chin to the
|
|
|
lachrymatory duct of the eye; and also equal to the distance from
|
|
|
the angle of the chin to that of the jaw; that is the 1/16 of the
|
|
|
whole. The small cartilage which projects over the opening of the
|
|
|
ear towards the nose is half-way between the nape and the eyebrow;
|
|
|
the thickness of the neck in profile is equal to the space between
|
|
|
the chin and the eyes, and to the space between the chin and the
|
|
|
jaw, and it is 1/18 of the height of the man.
|
|
|
|
|
|
318.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b_, _c d_, _e f_, _g h_, _i k_ are equal to each other in size
|
|
|
excepting that _d f_ is accidental.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XI.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Proportions of the head seen in front (319-321).
|
|
|
|
|
|
319.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a n o f_ are equal to the mouth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a c_ and _a f_ are equal to the space between one eye and the
|
|
|
other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_n m o f q r_ are equal to half the width of the eye lids, that is
|
|
|
from the inner [lachrymatory] corner of the eye to its outer corner;
|
|
|
and in like manner the division between the chin and the mouth; and
|
|
|
in the same way the narrowest part of the nose between the eyes. And
|
|
|
these spaces, each in itself, is the 19th part of the head, _n o_ is
|
|
|
equal to the length of the eye or of the space between the eyes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_m c_ is 1/3 of _n m_ measuring from the outer corner of the eyelids
|
|
|
to the letter _c_. _b s_ will be equal to the width of the nostril.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XII.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
320.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The distance between the centres of the pupils of the eyes is 1/3 of
|
|
|
the face. The space between the outer corners of the eyes, that is
|
|
|
where the eye ends in the eye socket which contains it, thus the
|
|
|
outer corners, is half the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The greatest width of the face at the line of the eyes is equal to
|
|
|
the distance from the roots of the hair in front to the parting of
|
|
|
the lips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: There are, with this section, two sketches of eyes, not
|
|
|
reproduced here.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
321.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The nose will make a double square; that is the width of the nose at
|
|
|
the nostrils goes twice into the length from the tip of the nose to
|
|
|
the eyebrows. And, in the same way, in profile the distance from the
|
|
|
extreme side of the nostril where it joins the cheek to the tip of
|
|
|
the nose is equal to the width of the nose in front from one nostril
|
|
|
to the other. If you divide the whole length of the nose--that is
|
|
|
from the tip to the insertion of the eyebrows, into 4 equal parts,
|
|
|
you will find that one of these parts extends from the tip of the
|
|
|
nostrils to the base of the nose, and the upper division lies
|
|
|
between the inner corner of the eye and the insertion of the
|
|
|
eyebrows; and the two middle parts [together] are equal to the
|
|
|
length of the eye from the inner to the outer corner.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The two bottom sketches on Pl. VII, No. 4 face the six
|
|
|
lines of this section,--With regard to the proportions of the head
|
|
|
in profile see No. 312.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
322.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The great toe is the sixth part of the foot, taking the measure in
|
|
|
profile, on the inside of the foot, from where this toe springs from
|
|
|
the ball of the sole of the foot to its tip _a b_; and it is equal
|
|
|
to the distance from the mouth to the bottom of the chin. If you
|
|
|
draw the foot in profile from the outside, make the little toe begin
|
|
|
at three quarters of the length of the foot, and you will find the
|
|
|
same distance from the insertion of this toe as to the farthest
|
|
|
prominence of the great toe.
|
|
|
|
|
|
323.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For each man respectively the distance between _a b_ is equal to _c
|
|
|
d_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
324.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Relative proportion of the hand and foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The foot is as much longer than the hand as the thickness of the arm
|
|
|
at the wrist where it is thinnest seen facing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Again, you will find that the foot is as much longer than the hand
|
|
|
as the space between the inner angle of the little toe to the last
|
|
|
projection of the big toe, if you measure along the length of the
|
|
|
foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The palm of the hand without the fingers goes twice into the length
|
|
|
of the foot without the toes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you hold your hand with the fingers straight out and close
|
|
|
together you will find it to be of the same width as the widest part
|
|
|
of the foot, that is where it is joined onto the toes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And if you measure from the prominence of the inner ancle to the end
|
|
|
of the great toe you will find this measure to be as long as the
|
|
|
whole hand.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the top angle of the foot to the insertion of the toes is equal
|
|
|
to the hand from wrist joint to the tip of the thumb.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The smallest width of the hand is equal to the smallest width of the
|
|
|
foot between its joint into the leg and the insertion of the toes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The width of the heel at the lower part is equal to that of the arm
|
|
|
where it joins the hand; and also to the leg where it is thinnest
|
|
|
when viewed in front.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The length of the longest toe, from its first division from the
|
|
|
great toe to its tip is the fourth of the foot from the centre of
|
|
|
the ancle bone to the tip, and it is equal to the width of the
|
|
|
mouth. The distance between the mouth and the chin is equal to that
|
|
|
of the knuckles and of the three middle fingers and to the length of
|
|
|
their first joints if the hand is spread, and equal to the distance
|
|
|
from the joint of the thumb to the outset of the nails, that is the
|
|
|
fourth part of the hand and of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The space between the extreme poles inside and outside the foot
|
|
|
called the ancle or ancle bone _a b_ is equal to the space between
|
|
|
the mouth and the inner corner of the eye.
|
|
|
|
|
|
325.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The foot, from where it is attached to the leg, to the tip of the
|
|
|
great toe is as long as the space between the upper part of the chin
|
|
|
and the roots of the hair _a b_; and equal to five sixths of the
|
|
|
face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
326.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a d_ is a head's length, _c b_ is a head's length. The four smaller
|
|
|
toes are all equally thick from the nail at the top to the bottom,
|
|
|
and are 1/13 of the foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XIV, No. 1, a drawing of a foot with the text in
|
|
|
three lines below it.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
327.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The whole length of the foot will lie between the elbow and the
|
|
|
wrist and between the elbow and the inner angle of the arm towards
|
|
|
the breast when the arm is folded. The foot is as long as the whole
|
|
|
head of a man, that is from under the chin to the topmost part of
|
|
|
the head[Footnote 2: _nel modo che qui i figurato_. See Pl. VII, No.
|
|
|
4, the upper figure. The text breaks off at the end of line 2 and
|
|
|
the text given under No. 321 follows below. It may be here remarked
|
|
|
that the second sketch on W. P. 311 has in the original no
|
|
|
explanatory text.] in the way here figured.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Proportions of the leg (328-331).
|
|
|
|
|
|
328.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The greatest thickness of the calf of the leg is at a third of its
|
|
|
height _a b_, and is a twentieth part thicker than the greatest
|
|
|
thickness of the foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a c_ is half of the head, and equal to _d b_ and to the insertion
|
|
|
of the five toes _e f_. _d k_ diminishes one sixth in the leg _g h_.
|
|
|
_g h_ is 1/3 of the head; _m n_ increases one sixth from _a e_ and
|
|
|
is 7/12 of the head, _o p_ is 1/10 less than _d k_ and is 6/17 of
|
|
|
the head. _a_ is at half the distance between _b q_, and is 1/4 of
|
|
|
the man. _r_ is half way between _s_ and _b_[Footnote 11: _b_ is
|
|
|
here and later on measured on the right side of the foot as seen by
|
|
|
the spectator.]. The concavity of the knee outside _r_ is higher
|
|
|
than that inside _a_. The half of the whole height of the leg from
|
|
|
the foot _r_, is half way between the prominence _s_ and the ground
|
|
|
_b_. _v_ is half way between _t_ and _b_. The thickness of the thigh
|
|
|
seen in front is equal to the greatest width of the face, that is
|
|
|
2/3 of the length from the chin to the top of the head; _z r_ is 5/6
|
|
|
of 7 to _v_; _m n_ is equal to 7 _v_ and is 1/4 of _r b_, _x y_ goes
|
|
|
3 times into _r b_, and into _r s_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 22-35: The sketch illustrating these lines is on Pl. XIII,
|
|
|
No. 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 22: a b _entra in_ c f 6 _e_ 6 _in_ c n. Accurate
|
|
|
measurement however obliges us to read 7 for 6.] _a b_ goes six
|
|
|
times into _c f_ and six times into _c n_ and is equal to _g h_; _i
|
|
|
k l m_ goes 4 times into _d f_, and 4 times into _d n_ and is 3/7 of
|
|
|
the foot; _p q r s_ goes 3 times into _d f, and 3 times into _b n_;
|
|
|
[Footnote: 25. _y_ is not to be found on the diagram and _x_ occurs
|
|
|
twice; this makes the passage very obscure.] _x y_ is 1/8 of _x f_
|
|
|
and is equal to _n q_. 3 7 is 1/9 of _n f_; 4 5 is 1/10 of _n f_
|
|
|
[Footnote: 22-27. Compare with this lines 18-24 of No. 331, and the
|
|
|
sketch of a leg in profile Pl. XV.].
|
|
|
|
|
|
I want to know how much a man increases in height by standing on
|
|
|
tip-toe and how much _p g_ diminishes by stooping; and how much it
|
|
|
increases at _n q_ likewise in bending the foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 34: _e f_ 4 _dal cazo_. By reading _i_ for _e_ the sense
|
|
|
of this passage is made clear.] _e f_ is four times in the distance
|
|
|
between the genitals and the sole of the foot; [Footnote 35: 2 is
|
|
|
not to be found in the sketch which renders the passage obscure. The
|
|
|
two last lines are plainly legible in the facsimile.] 3 7 is six
|
|
|
times from 3 to 2 and is equal to _g h_ and _i k_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The drawing of a leg seen in front Pl. XIII, No. 1
|
|
|
belongs to the text from lines 3-21. The measurements in this
|
|
|
section should be compared with the text No. 331, lines 1-13, and
|
|
|
the sketch of a leg seen in front on Pl. XV.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
329.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The length of the foot from the end of the toes to the heel goes
|
|
|
twice into that from the heel to the knee, that is where the leg
|
|
|
bone [fibula] joins the thigh bone [femur].
|
|
|
|
|
|
330.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a n b_ are equal; _c n d_ are equal; _n c_ makes two feet; _n d_
|
|
|
makes 2 feet.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See the lower sketch, Pl. XIV, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
331.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_m n o_ are equal. The narrowest width of the leg seen in front goes
|
|
|
8 times from the sole of the foot to the joint of the knee, and is
|
|
|
the same width as the arm, seen in front at the wrist, and as the
|
|
|
longest measure of the ear, and as the three chief divisions into
|
|
|
which we divide the face; and this measurement goes 4 times from the
|
|
|
wrist joint of the hand to the point of the elbow. [14] The foot is
|
|
|
as long as the space from the knee between _a_ and _b_; and the
|
|
|
patella of the knee is as long as the leg between _r_ and _s_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[18] The least thickness of the leg in profile goes 6 times from the
|
|
|
sole of the foot to the knee joint and is the same width as the
|
|
|
space between the outer corner of the eye and the opening of the
|
|
|
ear, and as the thickest part of the arm seen in profile and between
|
|
|
the inner corner of the eye and the insertion of the hair.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b c_ [_d_] are all relatively of equal length, _c d_ goes twice
|
|
|
from the sole of the foot to the centre of the knee and the same
|
|
|
from the knee to the hip.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[28]_a b c_ are equal; _a_ to _b_ is 2 feet--that is to say
|
|
|
measuring from the heel to the tip of the great toe.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XV. The text of lines 2-17 is to the left of the
|
|
|
front view of the leg, to which it refers. Lines 18-27 are in the
|
|
|
middle column and refer to the leg seen in profile and turned to the
|
|
|
left, on the right hand side of the writing. Lines 20-30 are above,
|
|
|
to the left and apply to the sketch below them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some farther remarks on the proportion of the leg will be found in
|
|
|
No. 336, lines 6, 7.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the central point of the whole body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
332.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In kneeling down a man will lose the fourth part of his height.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a man kneels down with his hands folded on his breast the navel
|
|
|
will mark half his height and likewise the points of the elbows.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Half the height of a man who sits--that is from the seat to the top
|
|
|
of the head--will be where the arms fold below the breast, and
|
|
|
below the shoulders. The seated portion--that is from the seat to
|
|
|
the top of the head--will be more than half the man's [whole height]
|
|
|
by the length of the scrotum.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. VIII, No. 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relative proportions of the torso and of the whole figure.
|
|
|
|
|
|
333.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The cubit is one fourth of the height of a man and is equal to the
|
|
|
greatest width of the shoulders. From the joint of one shoulder to
|
|
|
the other is two faces and is equal to the distance from the top of
|
|
|
the breast to the navel. [Footnote 9: _dalla detta somita_. It would
|
|
|
seem more accurate to read here _dal detto ombilico_.] From this
|
|
|
point to the genitals is a face's length.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Compare with this the sketches on the other page of the
|
|
|
same leaf. Pl. VIII, No. 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relative proportions of the head and of the torso.
|
|
|
|
|
|
334.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the roots of the hair to the top of the breast _a b_ is the
|
|
|
sixth part of the height of a man and this measure is equal.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the outside part of one shoulder to the other is the same
|
|
|
distance as from the top of the breast to the navel and this measure
|
|
|
goes four times from the sole of the foot to the lower end of the
|
|
|
nose.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The [thickness of] the arm where it springs from the shoulder in
|
|
|
front goes 6 times into the space between the two outside edges of
|
|
|
the shoulders and 3 times into the face, and four times into the
|
|
|
length of the foot and three into the hand, inside or outside.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The three sketches Pl. XIV, No. 2 belong to this text.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relative proportions of the torso and of the leg (335. 336).
|
|
|
|
|
|
335.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b c_ are equal to each other and to the space from the armpit of
|
|
|
the shoulder to the genitals and to the distance from the tip of the
|
|
|
fingers of the hand to the joint of the arm, and to the half of the
|
|
|
breast; and you must know that _c b_ is the third part of the height
|
|
|
of a man from the shoulders to the ground; _d e f_ are equal to each
|
|
|
other and equal to the greatest width of the shoulders.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XVI, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
336.
|
|
|
|
|
|
--Top of the chin--hip--the insertion of the middle finger. The end
|
|
|
of the calf of the leg on the inside of the thigh.--The end of the
|
|
|
swelling of the shin bone of the leg. [6] The smallest thickness of
|
|
|
the leg goes 3 times into the thigh seen in front.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XVII, No. 2, middle sketch.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relative proportions of the torso and of the foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
337.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The torso _a b_ in its thinnest part measures a foot; and from _a_
|
|
|
to _b_ is 2 feet, which makes two squares to the seat--its thinnest
|
|
|
part goes 3 times into the length, thus making 3 squares.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl, VII, No. 2, the lower sketch.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The proportions of the whole figure (338-341).
|
|
|
|
|
|
338.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man when he lies down is reduced to 1/9 of his height.
|
|
|
|
|
|
339.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The opening of the ear, the joint of the shoulder, that of the hip
|
|
|
and the ancle are in perpendicular lines; _a n_ is equal to _m o_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XVI, No. 2, the upper sketch.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
340.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the chin to the roots of the hair is 1/10 of the whole figure.
|
|
|
From the joint of the palm of the hand to the tip of the longest
|
|
|
finger is 1/10. From the chin to the top of the head 1/8; and from
|
|
|
the pit of the stomach to the top of the breast is 1/6, and from the
|
|
|
pit below the breast bone to the top of the head 1/4. From the chin
|
|
|
to the nostrils 1/3 Part of the face, the same from the nostrils to
|
|
|
the brow and from the brow to the roots of the hair, and the foot is
|
|
|
1/6, the elbow 1/4, the width of the shoulders 1/4.
|
|
|
|
|
|
341.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The width of the shoulders is 1/4 of the whole. From the joint of
|
|
|
the shoulder to the hand is 1/3, from the parting of the lips to
|
|
|
below the shoulder-blade is one foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The greatest thickness of a man from the breast to the spine is one
|
|
|
8th of his height and is equal to the space between the bottom of
|
|
|
the chin and the top of the head.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The greatest width is at the shoulders and goes 4.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The torso from the front and back.
|
|
|
|
|
|
342.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The width of a man under the arms is the same as at the hips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man's width across the hips is equal to the distance from the top
|
|
|
of the hip to the bottom of the buttock, when a man stands equally
|
|
|
balanced on both feet; and there is the same distance from the top
|
|
|
of the hip to the armpit. The waist, or narrower part above the hips
|
|
|
will be half way between the arm pits and the bottom of the buttock.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The lower sketch Pl. XVI, No. 2, is drawn by the side of
|
|
|
line 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Vitruvius' scheme of proportions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
343.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Vitruvius, the architect, says in his work on architecture that the
|
|
|
measurements of the human body are distributed by Nature as follows:
|
|
|
that is that 4 fingers make 1 palm, and 4 palms make 1 foot, 6 palms
|
|
|
make 1 cubit; 4 cubits make a man's height. And 4 cubits make one
|
|
|
pace and 24 palms make a man; and these measures he used in his
|
|
|
buildings. If you open your legs so much as to decrease your height
|
|
|
1/14 and spread and raise your arms till your middle fingers touch
|
|
|
the level of the top of your head you must know that the centre of
|
|
|
the outspread limbs will be in the navel and the space between the
|
|
|
legs will be an equilateral triangle.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The length of a man's outspread arms is equal to his height.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the roots of the hair to the bottom of the chin is the tenth of
|
|
|
a man's height; from the bottom of the chin to the top of his head
|
|
|
is one eighth of his height; from the top of the breast to the top
|
|
|
of his head will be one sixth of a man. From the top of the breast
|
|
|
to the roots of the hair will be the seventh part of the whole man.
|
|
|
From the nipples to the top of the head will be the fourth part of a
|
|
|
man. The greatest width of the shoulders contains in itself the
|
|
|
fourth part of the man. From the elbow to the tip of the hand will
|
|
|
be the fifth part of a man; and from the elbow to the angle of the
|
|
|
armpit will be the eighth part of the man. The whole hand will be
|
|
|
the tenth part of the man; the beginning of the genitals marks the
|
|
|
middle of the man. The foot is the seventh part of the man. From the
|
|
|
sole of the foot to below the knee will be the fourth part of the
|
|
|
man. From below the knee to the beginning of the genitals will be
|
|
|
the fourth part of the man. The distance from the bottom of the chin
|
|
|
to the nose and from the roots of the hair to the eyebrows is, in
|
|
|
each case the same, and like the ear, a third of the face.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XVIII. The original leaf is 21 centimetres wide
|
|
|
and 33 1/2 long. At the ends of the scale below the figure are
|
|
|
written the words _diti_ (fingers) and _palmi_ (palms). The passage
|
|
|
quoted from Vitruvius is Book III, Cap. 1, and Leonardo's drawing is
|
|
|
given in the editions of Vitruvius by FRA GIOCONDO (Venezia 1511,
|
|
|
fol., Firenze 1513, 8vo.) and by CESARIANO (Como 1521).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The arm and head.
|
|
|
|
|
|
344.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From _b_ to _a_ is one head, as well as from _c_ to _a_ and this
|
|
|
happens when the elbow forms a right angle.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XLI, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Proportions of the arm (345-349).
|
|
|
|
|
|
345.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the tip of the longest finger of the hand to the shoulder joint
|
|
|
is four hands or, if you will, four faces.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b c_ are equal and each interval is 2 heads.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Lines 1-3 are given on Pl. XV below the front view of the
|
|
|
leg; lines 4 and 5 are below again, on the left side. The lettering
|
|
|
refers to the bent arm near the text.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
346.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The hand from the longest finger to the wrist joint goes 4 times
|
|
|
from the tip of the longest finger to the shoulder joint.
|
|
|
|
|
|
347.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b c_ are equal to each other and to the foot and to the space
|
|
|
between the nipple and the navel _d e_ will be the third part of the
|
|
|
whole man.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_f g_ is the fourth part of a man and is equal to _g h_ and measures
|
|
|
a cubit.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XIX, No. 1. 1. _mamolino_ (=_bambino_, little
|
|
|
child) may mean here the navel.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
348.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b_ goes 4 times into _a c_ and 9 into _a m_. The greatest
|
|
|
thickness of the arm between the elbow and the hand goes 6 times
|
|
|
into _a m_ and is equal to _r f_. The greatest thickness of the arm
|
|
|
between the shoulder and the elbow goes 4 times into _c m_, and is
|
|
|
equal to _h n g_. The smallest thickness of the arm above the elbow
|
|
|
_x y_ is not the base of a square, but is equal to half the space
|
|
|
_h_ 3 which is found between the inner joint of the arm and the
|
|
|
wrist joint.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[11]The width of the wrist goes 12 times into the whole arm; that is
|
|
|
from the tip of the fingers to the shoulder joint; that is 3 times
|
|
|
into the hand and 9 into the arm.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The arm when bent is 4 heads.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The arm from the shoulder to the elbow in bending increases in
|
|
|
length, that is in the length from the shoulder to the elbow, and
|
|
|
this increase is equal to the thickness of the arm at the wrist when
|
|
|
seen in profile. And the space between the bottom of the chin and
|
|
|
the parting of the lips, is equal to the thickness of the 2 middle
|
|
|
fingers, and to the width of the mouth and to the space between the
|
|
|
roots of the hair on the forehead and the top of the head [Footnote:
|
|
|
_Queste cose_. This passage seems to have been written on purpose to
|
|
|
rectify the foregoing lines. The error is explained by the
|
|
|
accompanying sketch of the bones of the arm.]. All these distances
|
|
|
are equal to each other, but they are not equal to the
|
|
|
above-mentioned increase in the arm.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The arm between the elbow and wrist never increases by being bent or
|
|
|
extended.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The arm, from the shoulder to the inner joint when extended.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the arm is extended, _p n_ is equal to _n a_. And when it is
|
|
|
bent _n a_ diminishes 1/6 of its length and _p n_ does the same. The
|
|
|
outer elbow joint increases 1/7 when bent; and thus by being bent it
|
|
|
increases to the length of 2 heads. And on the inner side, by
|
|
|
bending, it is found that whereas the arm from where it joins the
|
|
|
side to the wrist, was 2 heads and a half, in bending it loses the
|
|
|
half head and measures only two: one from the [shoulder] joint to
|
|
|
the end [by the elbow], and the other to the hand.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The arm when folded will measure 2 faces up to the shoulder from the
|
|
|
elbow and 2 from the elbow to the insertion of the four fingers on
|
|
|
the palm of the hand. The length from the base of the fingers to the
|
|
|
elbow never alters in any position of the arm.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the arm is extended it decreases by 1/3 of the length between _b_
|
|
|
and _h_; and if--being extended--it is bent, it will increase the
|
|
|
half of _o e_. [Footnote 59-61: The figure sketched in the margin is
|
|
|
however drawn to different proportions.] The length from the
|
|
|
shoulder to the elbow is the same as from the base of the thumb,
|
|
|
inside, to the elbow _a b c_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 62-64: The arm sketch on the margin of the MS. is
|
|
|
identically the same as that given below on Pl. XX which may
|
|
|
therefore be referred to in this place. In line 62 we read therefore
|
|
|
_z c_ for _m n_.] The smallest thickness of the arm in profile _z c_
|
|
|
goes 6 times between the knuckles of the hand and the dimple of the
|
|
|
elbow when extended and 14 times in the whole arm and 42 in the
|
|
|
whole man [64]. The greatest thickness of the arm in profile is
|
|
|
equal to the greatest thickness of the arm in front; but the first
|
|
|
is placed at a third of the arm from the shoulder joint to the elbow
|
|
|
and the other at a third from the elbow towards the hand.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Compare Pl. XVII. Lines 1-10 and 11-15 are written in two
|
|
|
columns below the extended arm, and at the tips of the fingers we
|
|
|
find the words: _fine d'unghie_ (ends of the nails). Part of the
|
|
|
text--lines 22 to 25--is visible by the side of the sketches on Pl.
|
|
|
XXXV, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
349.
|
|
|
|
|
|
From the top of the shoulder to the point of the elbow is as far as
|
|
|
from that point to the joints of the four fingers with the palm of
|
|
|
the hand, and each is 2 faces.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[5]_a e_ is equal to the palm of the hand, _r f_ and _o g_ are equal
|
|
|
to half a head and each goes 4 times into _a b_ and _b c_. From _c_
|
|
|
to _m_ is 1/2 a head; _m n_ is 1/3 of a head and goes 6 times into
|
|
|
_c b_ and into _b a_; _a b_ loses 1/7 of its length when the arm is
|
|
|
extended; _c b_ never alters; _o_ will always be the middle point
|
|
|
between _a_ and _s_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_y l_ is the fleshy part of the arm and measures one head; and when
|
|
|
the arm is bent this shrinks 2/5 of its length; _o a_ in bending
|
|
|
loses 1/6 and so does _o r_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b_ is 1/7 of _r c_. _f s_ will be 1/8 of _r c_, and each of those
|
|
|
2 measurements is the largest of the arm; _k h_ is the thinnest part
|
|
|
between the shoulder and the elbow and it is 1/8 of the whole arm _r
|
|
|
c_; _o p_ is 1/5 of _r l_; _c z_ goes 13 times into _r c_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XX where the text is also seen from lines 5-23.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The movement of the arm (350-354).
|
|
|
|
|
|
350.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the innermost bend of the joints of every limb the reliefs are
|
|
|
converted into a hollow, and likewise every hollow of the innermost
|
|
|
bends becomes a convexity when the limb is straightened to the
|
|
|
utmost. And in this very great mistakes are often made by those who
|
|
|
have insufficient knowledge and trust to their own invention and do
|
|
|
not have recourse to the imitation of nature; and these variations
|
|
|
occur more in the middle of the sides than in front, and more at the
|
|
|
back than at the sides.
|
|
|
|
|
|
351.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the arm is bent at an angle at the elbow, it will produce some
|
|
|
angle; the more acute the angle is, the more will the muscles within
|
|
|
the bend be shortened; while the muscles outside will become of
|
|
|
greater length than before. As is shown in the example; _d c e_ will
|
|
|
shrink considerably; and _b n_ will be much extended.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XIX, No. 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
352.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The arm, as it turns, thrusts back its shoulder towards the middle
|
|
|
of the back.
|
|
|
|
|
|
353.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The principal movements of the hand are 10; that is forwards,
|
|
|
backwards, to right and to left, in a circular motion, up or down,
|
|
|
to close and to open, and to spread the fingers or to press them
|
|
|
together.
|
|
|
|
|
|
354.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE MOTIONS OF THE FINGERS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The movements of the fingers principally consist in extending and
|
|
|
bending them. This extension and bending vary in manner; that is,
|
|
|
sometimes they bend altogether at the first joint; sometimes they
|
|
|
bend, or extend, half way, at the 2nd joint; and sometimes they bend
|
|
|
in their whole length and in all the three joints at once. If the 2
|
|
|
first joints are hindered from bending, then the 3rd joint can be
|
|
|
bent with greater ease than before; it can never bend of itself, if
|
|
|
the other joints are free, unless all three joints are bent. Besides
|
|
|
all these movements there are 4 other principal motions of which 2
|
|
|
are up and down, the two others from side to side; and each of these
|
|
|
is effected by a single tendon. From these there follow an infinite
|
|
|
number of other movements always effected by two tendons; one tendon
|
|
|
ceasing to act, the other takes up the movement. The tendons are
|
|
|
made thick inside the fingers and thin outside; and the tendons
|
|
|
inside are attached to every joint but outside they are not.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 26: This head line has, in the original, no text to
|
|
|
follow.] Of the strength [and effect] of the 3 tendons inside the
|
|
|
fingers at the 3 joints.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The movement of the torso (355-361).
|
|
|
|
|
|
355.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Observe the altered position of the shoulder in all the movements of
|
|
|
the arm, going up and down, inwards and outwards, to the back and to
|
|
|
the front, and also in circular movements and any others.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And do the same with reference to the neck, hands and feet and the
|
|
|
breast above the lips &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
356.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Three are the principal muscles of the shoulder, that is _b c d_,
|
|
|
and two are the lateral muscles which move it forward and backward,
|
|
|
that is _a o_; _a_ moves it forward, and _o_ pulls it back; and bed
|
|
|
raises it; _a b c_ moves it upwards and forwards, and _c d o_
|
|
|
upwards and backwards. Its own weight almost suffices to move it
|
|
|
downwards.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The muscle _d_ acts with the muscle _c_ when the arm moves forward;
|
|
|
and in moving backward the muscle _b_ acts with the muscle _c_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXI. In the original the lettering has been
|
|
|
written in ink upon the red chalk drawing and the outlines of the
|
|
|
figures have in most places been inked over.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
357.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE LOINS, WHEN BENT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The loins or backbone being bent. The breasts are are always lower
|
|
|
than the shoulderblades of the back.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the breast bone is arched the breasts are higher than the
|
|
|
shoulderblades.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the loins are upright the breast will always be found at the same
|
|
|
level as the shoulderblades.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
358.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_a b_ the tendon and ankle in raising the heel approach each other
|
|
|
by a finger's breadth; in lowering it they separate by a finger's
|
|
|
breadth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 2. Compare this facsimile and text with
|
|
|
Pl. III, No. 2, and p. 152 of MANZI'S edition. Also with No. 274 of
|
|
|
LUDWIG'S edition of the Vatican Copy.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
359.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Just so much as the part _d a_ of the nude figure decreases in this
|
|
|
position so much does the opposite part increase; that is: in
|
|
|
proportion as the length of the part _d a_ diminishes the normal
|
|
|
size so does the opposite upper part increase beyond its [normal]
|
|
|
size. The navel does not change its position to the male organ; and
|
|
|
this shrinking arises because when a figure stands on one foot, that
|
|
|
foot becomes the centre [of gravity] of the superimposed weight.
|
|
|
This being so, the middle between the shoulders is thrust above it
|
|
|
out of it perpendicular line, and this line, which forms the central
|
|
|
line of the external parts of the body, becomes bent at its upper
|
|
|
extremity [so as to be] above the foot which supports the body; and
|
|
|
the transverse lines are forced into such angles that their ends are
|
|
|
lower on the side which is supported. As is shown at _a b c_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 3.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
360.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note in the motions and attitudes of figures how the limbs vary, and
|
|
|
their feeling, for the shoulderblades in the motions of the arms and
|
|
|
shoulders vary the [line of the] back bone very much. And you will
|
|
|
find all the causes of this in my book of Anatomy.
|
|
|
|
|
|
361.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF [CHANGE OF] ATTITUDE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pit of the throat is over the feet, and by throwing one arm
|
|
|
forward the pit of the throat is thrown off that foot. And if the
|
|
|
leg is thrown forward the pit of the throat is thrown forward; and.
|
|
|
so it varies in every attitude.
|
|
|
|
|
|
362.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Indicate which are the muscles, and which the tendons, which become
|
|
|
prominent or retreat in the different movements of each limb; or
|
|
|
which do neither [but are passive]. And remember that these
|
|
|
indications of action are of the first importance and necessity in
|
|
|
any painter or sculptor who professes to be a master &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And indicate the same in a child, and from birth to decrepitude at
|
|
|
every stage of its life; as infancy, childhood, boyhood, youth &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And in each express the alterations in the limbs and joints, which
|
|
|
swell and which grow thinner.
|
|
|
|
|
|
363.
|
|
|
|
|
|
O Anatomical Painter! beware lest the too strong indication of the
|
|
|
bones, sinews and muscles, be the cause of your becoming wooden in
|
|
|
your painting by your wish to make your nude figures display all
|
|
|
their feeling. Therefore, in endeavouring to remedy this, look in
|
|
|
what manner the muscles clothe or cover their bones in old or lean
|
|
|
persons; and besides this, observe the rule as to how these same
|
|
|
muscles fill up the spaces of the surface that extend between them,
|
|
|
which are the muscles which never lose their prominence in any
|
|
|
amount of fatness; and which too are the muscles of which the
|
|
|
attachments are lost to sight in the very least plumpness. And in
|
|
|
many cases several muscles look like one single muscle in the
|
|
|
increase of fat; and in many cases, in growing lean or old, one
|
|
|
single muscle divides into several muscles. And in this treatise,
|
|
|
each in its place, all their peculiarities will be explained--and
|
|
|
particularly as to the spaces between the joints of each limb &c.
|
|
|
Again, do not fail [to observe] the variations in the forms of the
|
|
|
above mentioned muscles, round and about the joints of the limbs of
|
|
|
any animal, as caused by the diversity of the motions of each limb;
|
|
|
for on some side of those joints the prominence of these muscles is
|
|
|
wholly lost in the increase or diminution of the flesh of which
|
|
|
these muscles are composed, &c.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: DE ROSSI remarks on this chapter, in the Roman edition of
|
|
|
the Trattato, p. 504: "_Non in questo luogo solo, ma in altri ancora
|
|
|
osservera il lettore, che Lionardo va fungendo quelli che fanno
|
|
|
abuso della loro dottrina anatomica, e sicuramente con cio ha in
|
|
|
mira il suo rivale Bonarroti, che di anatomia facea tanta pompa_."
|
|
|
Note, that Leonardo wrote this passage in Rome, probably under the
|
|
|
immediate impression of MICHAELANGELO'S paintings in the Sistine
|
|
|
Chapel and of RAPHAEL'S Isaiah in Sant' Agostino.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
364.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE DIFFERENT MEASUREMENTS OF BOYS AND MEN.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is a great difference in the length between the joints in men
|
|
|
and boys for, in man, from the top of the shoulder [by the neck] to
|
|
|
the elbow, and from the elbow to the tip of the thumb and from one
|
|
|
shoulder to the other, is in each instance two heads, while in a boy
|
|
|
it is but one because Nature constructs in us the mass which is the
|
|
|
home of the intellect, before forming that which contains the vital
|
|
|
elements.
|
|
|
|
|
|
365.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Which are the muscles which subdivide in old age or in youth, when
|
|
|
becoming lean? Which are the parts of the limbs of the human frame
|
|
|
where no amount of fat makes the flesh thicker, nor any degree of
|
|
|
leanness ever diminishes it?
|
|
|
|
|
|
The thing sought for in this question will be found in all the
|
|
|
external joints of the bones, as the shoulder, elbow, wrists,
|
|
|
finger-joints, hips, knees, ankle-bone and toes and the like; all of
|
|
|
which shall be told in its place. The greatest thickness acquired by
|
|
|
any limb is at the part of the muscles which is farthest from its
|
|
|
attachments.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Flesh never increases on those portions of the limb where the bones
|
|
|
are near to the surface.
|
|
|
|
|
|
At _b r d a c e f_ the increase or diminution of the flesh never
|
|
|
makes any considerable difference. Nature has placed in front of man
|
|
|
all those parts which feel most pain under a blow; and these are the
|
|
|
shin of the leg, the forehead, and the nose. And this was done for
|
|
|
the preservation of man, since, if such pain were not felt in these
|
|
|
parts, the number of blows to which they would be exposed must be
|
|
|
the cause of their destruction.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Describe why the bones of the arm and leg are double near the hand
|
|
|
and foot [respectively].
|
|
|
|
|
|
And where the flesh is thicker or thinner in the bending of the
|
|
|
limbs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
366.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every part of the whole must be in proportion to the whole. Thus, if
|
|
|
a man is of a stout short figure he will be the same in all his
|
|
|
parts: that is with short and thick arms, wide thick hands, with
|
|
|
short fingers with their joints of the same character, and so on
|
|
|
with the rest. I would have the same thing understood as applying to
|
|
|
all animals and plants; in diminishing, [the various parts] do so in
|
|
|
due proportion to the size, as also in enlarging.
|
|
|
|
|
|
367.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE AGREEMENT OF THE PROPORTION OF THE LIMBS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And again, remember to be very careful in giving your figures limbs,
|
|
|
that they must appear to agree with the size of the body and
|
|
|
likewise to the age. Thus a youth has limbs that are not very
|
|
|
muscular not strongly veined, and the surface is delicate and round,
|
|
|
and tender in colour. In man the limbs are sinewy and muscular,
|
|
|
while in old men the surface is wrinkled, rugged and knotty, and the
|
|
|
sinews very prominent.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HOW YOUNG BOYS HAVE THEIR JOINTS JUST THE REVERSE OF THOSE OF MEN,
|
|
|
AS TO SIZE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Little children have all the joints slender and the portions between
|
|
|
them are thick; and this happens because nothing but the skin covers
|
|
|
the joints without any other flesh and has the character of sinew,
|
|
|
connecting the bones like a ligature. And the fat fleshiness is laid
|
|
|
on between one joint and the next, and between the skin and the
|
|
|
bones. But, since the bones are thicker at the joints than between
|
|
|
them, as a mass grows up the flesh ceases to have that superfluity
|
|
|
which it had, between the skin and the bones; whence the skin clings
|
|
|
more closely to the bone and the limbs grow more slender. But since
|
|
|
there is nothing over the joints but the cartilaginous and sinewy
|
|
|
skin this cannot dry up, and, not drying up, cannot shrink. Thus,
|
|
|
and for this reason, children are slender at the joints and fat
|
|
|
between the joints; as may be seen in the joints of the fingers,
|
|
|
arms, and shoulders, which are slender and dimpled, while in man on
|
|
|
the contrary all the joints of the fingers, arms, and legs are
|
|
|
thick; and wherever children have hollows men have prominences.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The movement of the human figure (368-375).
|
|
|
|
|
|
368.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of the manner of representing the 18 actions of man. Repose,
|
|
|
movement, running, standing, supported, sitting, leaning, kneeling,
|
|
|
lying down, suspended. Carrying or being carried, thrusting,
|
|
|
pulling, striking, being struck, pressing down and lifting up.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[As to how a figure should stand with a weight in its hand [Footnote
|
|
|
8: The original text ends here.] Remember].
|
|
|
|
|
|
369.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A sitting man cannot raise himself if that part of his body which is
|
|
|
front of his axis [centre of gravity] does not weigh more than that
|
|
|
which is behind that axis [or centre] without using his arms.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man who is mounting any slope finds that he must involuntarily
|
|
|
throw the most weight forward, on the higher foot, rather than
|
|
|
behind--that is in front of the axis and not behind it. Hence a man
|
|
|
will always, involuntarily, throw the greater weight towards the
|
|
|
point whither he desires to move than in any other direction.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The faster a man runs, the more he leans forward towards the point
|
|
|
he runs to and throws more weight in front of his axis than behind.
|
|
|
A man who runs down hill throws the axis onto his heels, and one who
|
|
|
runs up hill throws it into the points of his feet; and a man
|
|
|
running on level ground throws it first on his heels and then on the
|
|
|
points of his feet.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This man cannot carry his own weight unless, by drawing his body
|
|
|
back he balances the weight in front, in such a way as that the foot
|
|
|
on which he stands is the centre of gravity.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXII, No. 4.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
370.
|
|
|
|
|
|
How a man proceeds to raise himself to his feet, when he is sitting
|
|
|
on level ground.
|
|
|
|
|
|
371.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man when walking has his head in advance of his feet.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man when walking across a long level plain first leans [rather]
|
|
|
backwards and then as much forwards.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 3-6: He strides forward with the air of a man going down
|
|
|
hill; when weary, on the contrary he walks like a man going up
|
|
|
hill.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
372.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man when running throws less weight on his legs than when standing
|
|
|
still. And in the same way a horse which is running feels less the
|
|
|
weight of the man he carries. Hence many persons think it wonderful
|
|
|
that, in running, the horse can rest on one single foot. From this
|
|
|
it may be stated that when a weight is in progressive motion the
|
|
|
more rapid it is the less is the perpendicular weight towards the
|
|
|
centre.
|
|
|
|
|
|
373.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a man, in taking a jump from firm ground, can leap 3 braccia, and
|
|
|
when he was taking his leap it were to recede 1/3 of a braccio, that
|
|
|
would be taken off his former leap; and so if it were thrust forward
|
|
|
1/3 of a braccio, by how much would his leap be increased?
|
|
|
|
|
|
374.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF DRAWING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a man who is running wants to neutralise the impetus that
|
|
|
carries him on he prepares a contrary impetus which is generated by
|
|
|
his hanging backwards. This can be proved, since, if the impetus
|
|
|
carries a moving body with a momentum equal to 4 and the moving body
|
|
|
wants to turn and fall back with a momentum of 4, then one momentum
|
|
|
neutralises the other contrary one, and the impetus is neutralised.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of walking up and down (375-379)
|
|
|
|
|
|
375.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a man wants to stop running and check the impetus he is forced
|
|
|
to hang back and take short quick steps. [Footnote: Lines 5-31 refer
|
|
|
to the two upper figures, and the lower figure to the right is
|
|
|
explained by the last part of the chapter.] The centre of gravity of
|
|
|
a man who lifts one of his feet from the ground always rests on the
|
|
|
centre of the sole of the foot [he stands on].
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man, in going up stairs involuntarily throws so much weight
|
|
|
forward and on the side of the upper foot as to be a counterpoise to
|
|
|
the lower leg, so that the labour of this lower leg is limited to
|
|
|
moving itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first thing a man does in mounting steps is to relieve the leg
|
|
|
he is about to lift of the weight of the body which was resting on
|
|
|
that leg; and besides this, he gives to the opposite leg all the
|
|
|
rest of the bulk of the whole man, including [the weight of] the
|
|
|
other leg; he then raises the other leg and sets the foot upon the
|
|
|
step to which he wishes to raise himself. Having done this he
|
|
|
restores to the upper foot all the weight of the body and of the leg
|
|
|
itself, and places his hand on his thigh and throws his head forward
|
|
|
and repeats the movement towards the point of the upper foot,
|
|
|
quickly lifting the heel of the lower one; and with this impetus he
|
|
|
lifts himself up and at the same time extends the arm which rested
|
|
|
on his knee; and this extension of the arm carries up the body and
|
|
|
the head, and so straightens the spine which was curved.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[32] The higher the step is which a man has to mount, the farther
|
|
|
forward will he place his head in advance of his upper foot, so as
|
|
|
to weigh more on _a_ than on _b_; this man will not be on the step
|
|
|
_m_. As is shown by the line _g f_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 1. The lower sketch to the left
|
|
|
belongs to the four first lines.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
376.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I ask the weight [pressure] of this man at every degree of motion on
|
|
|
these steps, what weight he gives to _b_ and to _c_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 8: These lines are, in the original, written in ink]
|
|
|
Observe the perpendicular line below the centre of gravity of the
|
|
|
man.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
377.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In going up stairs if you place your hands on your knees all the
|
|
|
labour taken by the arms is removed from the sinews at the back of
|
|
|
the knees.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 3.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
378.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The sinew which guides the leg, and which is connected with the
|
|
|
patella of the knee, feels it a greater labour to carry the man
|
|
|
upwards, in proportion as the leg is more bent; and the muscle which
|
|
|
acts upon the angle made by the thigh where it joins the body has
|
|
|
less difficulty and has a less weight to lift, because it has not
|
|
|
the [additional] weight of the thigh itself. And besides this it has
|
|
|
stronger muscles, being those which form the buttock.
|
|
|
|
|
|
379.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man coming down hill takes little steps, because the weight rests
|
|
|
upon the hinder foot, while a man mounting takes wide steps, because
|
|
|
his weight rests on the foremost foot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIII, No. 4.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On the human body in action (380-388).
|
|
|
|
|
|
380.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE HUMAN BODY IN ACTION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you want to represent a man as moving some weight consider what
|
|
|
the movements are that are to be represented by different lines;
|
|
|
that is to say either from below upwards, with a simple movement, as
|
|
|
a man does who stoops forward to take up a weight which he will lift
|
|
|
as he straightens himself. Or as a man does who wants to squash
|
|
|
something backwards, or to force it forwards or to pull it downwards
|
|
|
with ropes passed through pullies [Footnote 10: Compare the sketch
|
|
|
on page 198 and on 201 (S. K. M. II.1 86b).]. And here remember that
|
|
|
the weight of a man pulls in proportion as his centre of gravity is
|
|
|
distant from his fulcrum, and to this is added the force given by
|
|
|
his legs and bent back as he raises himself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
381.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Again, a man has even a greater store of strength in his legs than
|
|
|
he needs for his own weight; and to see if this is true, make a man
|
|
|
stand on the shore-sand and then put another man on his back, and
|
|
|
you will see how much he will sink in. Then take the man from off
|
|
|
his back and make him jump straight up as high as he can, and you
|
|
|
will find that the print of his feet will be made deeper by the jump
|
|
|
than from having the man on his back. Hence, here, by 2 methods it
|
|
|
is proved that a man has double the strength he requires to support
|
|
|
his own body.
|
|
|
|
|
|
382.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF PAINTING.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have to draw a man who is in motion, or lifting or pulling,
|
|
|
or carrying a weight equal to his own, in what way must you set on
|
|
|
his legs below his body?
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: In the MS. this question remains unanswered.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
383.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE STRENGTH OF MAN.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man pulling a [dead] weight balanced against himself cannot pull
|
|
|
more than his own weight. And if he has to raise it he will [be able
|
|
|
to] raise as much more than his weight as his strength may be more
|
|
|
than that of other men. [Footnote 7: The stroke at the end of this
|
|
|
line finishes in the original in a sort of loop or flourish, and a
|
|
|
similar flourish occurs at the end of the previous passage written
|
|
|
on the same page. M. RAVAISSON regards these as numbers (compare the
|
|
|
photograph of page 30b in his edition of MS. A). He remarks: "_Ce
|
|
|
chiffre_ 8 _et, a la fin de l'alinea precedent, le chiffre_ 7 _sont,
|
|
|
dans le manuscrit, des renvois_."] The greatest force a man can
|
|
|
apply, with equal velocity and impetus, will be when he sets his
|
|
|
feet on one end of the balance [or lever] and then presses his
|
|
|
shoulders against some stable body. This will raise a weight at the
|
|
|
other end of the balance [lever], equal to his own weight and [added
|
|
|
to that] as much weight as he can carry on his shoulders.
|
|
|
|
|
|
384.
|
|
|
|
|
|
No animal can simply move [by its dead weight] a greater weight than
|
|
|
the sum of its own weight outside the centre of his fulcrum.
|
|
|
|
|
|
385.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A man who wants to send an arrow very far from the bow must be
|
|
|
standing entirely on one foot and raising the other so far from the
|
|
|
foot he stands on as to afford the requisite counterpoise to his
|
|
|
body which is thrown on the front foot. And he must not hold his arm
|
|
|
fully extended, and in order that he may be more able to bear the
|
|
|
strain he must hold a piece of wood which there is in all crossbows,
|
|
|
extending from the hand to the breast, and when he wishes to shoot
|
|
|
he suddenly leaps forward at the same instant and extends his arm
|
|
|
with the bow and releases the string. And if he dexterously does
|
|
|
every thing at once it will go a very long way.
|
|
|
|
|
|
386.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When two men are at the opposite ends of a plank that is balanced,
|
|
|
and if they are of equal weight, and if one of them wants to make a
|
|
|
leap into the air, then his leap will be made down from his end of
|
|
|
the plank and the man will never go up again but must remain in his
|
|
|
place till the man at the other end dashes up the board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXIV, No. 3.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
387.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of delivering a blow to the right or left.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: Four sketches on Pl. XXIV, No. 1 belong to this passage.
|
|
|
The rest of the sketches and notes on that page are of a
|
|
|
miscellaneous nature.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
388.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Why an impetus is not spent at once [but diminishes] gradually in
|
|
|
some one direction? [Footnote 1: The paper has been damaged at the
|
|
|
end of line 1.] The impetus acquired in the line _a b c d_ is spent
|
|
|
in the line _d e_ but not so completely but that some of its force
|
|
|
remains in it and to this force is added the momentum in the line _d
|
|
|
e_ with the force of the motive power, and it must follow than the
|
|
|
impetus multiplied by the blow is greater that the simple impetus
|
|
|
produced by the momentum _d e_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 8: The sketch No. 2 on Pl. XXIV stands, in the original,
|
|
|
between lines 7 and 8. Compare also the sketches on Pl. LIV.] A man
|
|
|
who has to deal a great blow with his weapon prepares himself with
|
|
|
all his force on the opposite side to that where the spot is which
|
|
|
he is to hit; and this is because a body as it gains in velocity
|
|
|
gains in force against the object which impedes its motion.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On hair falling down in curls.
|
|
|
|
|
|
389.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Observe the motion of the surface of the water which resembles that
|
|
|
of hair, and has two motions, of which one goes on with the flow of
|
|
|
the surface, the other forms the lines of the eddies; thus the water
|
|
|
forms eddying whirlpools one part of which are due to the impetus of
|
|
|
the principal current and the other to the incidental motion and
|
|
|
return flow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXV. Where also the text of this passage is given
|
|
|
in facsimile.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
On draperies (390--392).
|
|
|
|
|
|
390.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE NATURE OF THE FOLDS IN DRAPERY.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That part of a fold which is farthest from the ends where it is
|
|
|
confined will fall most nearly in its natural form.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every thing by nature tends to remain at rest. Drapery, being of
|
|
|
equal density and thickness on its wrong side and on its right, has
|
|
|
a tendency to lie flat; therefore when you give it a fold or plait
|
|
|
forcing it out of its flatness note well the result of the
|
|
|
constraint in the part where it is most confined; and the part which
|
|
|
is farthest from this constraint you will see relapses most into the
|
|
|
natural state; that is to say lies free and flowing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXAMPLE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote 13: _a c sia_. In the original text _b_ is written instead
|
|
|
of _c_--an evident slip of the pen.] Let _a b c_ be the fold of the
|
|
|
drapery spoken of above, _a c_ will be the places where this folded
|
|
|
drapery is held fast. I maintain that the part of the drapery which
|
|
|
is farthest from the plaited ends will revert most to its natural
|
|
|
form.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Therefore, _b_ being farthest from _a_ and _c_ in the fold _a b c_
|
|
|
it will be wider there than anywhere else.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 6, and compare the drawing from
|
|
|
Windsor Pl. XXX for farther illustration of what is here stated.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
391.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF SMALL FOLDS IN DRAPERIES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
How figures dressed in a cloak should not show the shape so much as
|
|
|
that the cloak looks as if it were next the flesh; since you surely
|
|
|
cannot wish the cloak to be next the flesh, for you must suppose
|
|
|
that between the flesh and the cloak there are other garments which
|
|
|
prevent the forms of the limbs appearing distinctly through the
|
|
|
cloak. And those limbs which you allow to be seen you must make
|
|
|
thicker so that the other garments may appear to be under the cloak.
|
|
|
But only give something of the true thickness of the limbs to a
|
|
|
nymph [Footnote 9: _Una nifa_. Compare the beautiful drawing of a
|
|
|
Nymph, in black chalk from the Windsor collection, Pl. XXVI.] or an
|
|
|
angel, which are represented in thin draperies, pressed and clinging
|
|
|
to the limbs of the figures by the action of the wind.
|
|
|
|
|
|
392.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You ought not to give to drapery a great confusion of many folds,
|
|
|
but rather only introduce them where they are held by the hands or
|
|
|
the arms; the rest you may let fall simply where it is its nature to
|
|
|
flow; and do not let the nude forms be broken by too many details
|
|
|
and interrupted folds. How draperies should be drawn from nature:
|
|
|
that is to say if youwant to represent woollen cloth draw the folds
|
|
|
from that; and if it is to be silk, or fine cloth or coarse, or of
|
|
|
linen or of crape, vary the folds in each and do not represent
|
|
|
dresses, as many do, from models covered with paper or thin leather
|
|
|
which will deceive you greatly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The little pen and ink drawing from Windsor (W. 102),
|
|
|
given on Pl. XXVIII, No. 7, clearly illustrates the statement made
|
|
|
at the beginning of this passage; the writing of the cipher 19 on
|
|
|
the same page is in Leonardo's hand; the cipher 21 is certainly
|
|
|
not.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
_VIII._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Botany for Painters and Elements of Landscape Painting._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_The chapters composing this portion of the work consist of
|
|
|
observations on Form, Light and Shade in Plants, and particularly in
|
|
|
Trees summed up in certain general rules by which the author intends
|
|
|
to guide the artist in the pictorial representation of landscape._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_With these the first principles of a_ Theory of Landscape painting
|
|
|
_are laid down--a theory as profoundly thought out in its main
|
|
|
lines as it is lucidly worked out in its details. In reading these
|
|
|
chapters the conviction is irresistible that such a_ Botany for
|
|
|
painters _is or ought to be of similar importance in the practice of
|
|
|
painting as the principles of the Proportions and Movements of the
|
|
|
human figure_ i. e. Anatomy for painters.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_There can be no doubt that Leonardo, in laying down these rules,
|
|
|
did not intend to write on Botany in the proper scientific
|
|
|
sense--his own researches on that subject have no place here; it
|
|
|
need only be observed that they are easily distinguished by their
|
|
|
character and contents from those which are here collected and
|
|
|
arranged under the title 'Botany for painters'. In some cases where
|
|
|
this division might appear doubtful,--as for instance in No._
|
|
|
402--_the Painter is directly addressed and enjoined to take the
|
|
|
rule to heart as of special importance in his art._
|
|
|
|
|
|
_The original materials are principally derived from MS._ G, _in
|
|
|
which we often find this subject treated on several pages in
|
|
|
succession without any of that intermixture of other matters, which
|
|
|
is so frequent in Leonardo's writings. This MS., too, is one of the
|
|
|
latest; when it was written, the great painter was already more than
|
|
|
sixty years of age, so we can scarcely doubt that he regarded all he
|
|
|
wrote as his final views on the subject. And the same remark applies
|
|
|
to the chapters from MSS._ E _and_ M _which were also written
|
|
|
between_ 1513--15.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_For the sake of clearness, however, it has been desirable to
|
|
|
sacrifice--with few exceptions--the original order of the passages
|
|
|
as written, though it was with much reluctance and only after long
|
|
|
hesitation that I resigned myself to this necessity. Nor do I mean
|
|
|
to impugn the logical connection of the author's ideas in his MS.;
|
|
|
but it will be easily understood that the sequence of disconnected
|
|
|
notes, as they occurred to Leonardo and were written down from time
|
|
|
to time, might be hardly satisfactory as a systematic arrangement of
|
|
|
his principles. The reader will find in the Appendix an exact
|
|
|
account of the order of the chapters in the original MS. and from
|
|
|
the data there given can restore them at will. As the materials are
|
|
|
here arranged, the structure of the tree as regards the growth of
|
|
|
the branches comes first_ (394-411) _and then the insertion of the
|
|
|
leaves on the stems_ (412-419). _Then follow the laws of Light and
|
|
|
Shade as applied, first, to the leaves (420-434), and, secondly, to
|
|
|
the whole tree and to groups of trees_ (435-457). _After the remarks
|
|
|
on the Light and Shade in landscapes generally_ (458-464), _we find
|
|
|
special observations on that of views of towns and buildings_
|
|
|
(465-469). _To the theory of Landscape Painting belong also the
|
|
|
passages on the effect of Wind on Trees_ (470-473) _and on the Light
|
|
|
and Shade of Clouds_ (474-477), _since we find in these certain
|
|
|
comparisons with the effect of Light and Shade on Trees_ (e. g.: _in
|
|
|
No._ 476, 4. 5; _and No._ 477, 9. 12). _The chapters given in the
|
|
|
Appendix Nos._ 478 _and_ 481 _have hardly any connection with the
|
|
|
subjects previously treated._
|
|
|
|
|
|
Classification of trees.
|
|
|
|
|
|
393.
|
|
|
|
|
|
TREES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Small, lofty, straggling, thick, that is as to foliage, dark, light,
|
|
|
russet, branched at the top; some directed towards the eye, some
|
|
|
downwards; with white stems; this transparent in the air, that not;
|
|
|
some standing close together, some scattered.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The relative thickness of the branches to the trunk (393--396).
|
|
|
|
|
|
394.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All the branches of a tree at every stage of its height when put
|
|
|
together are equal in thickness to the trunk [below them].
|
|
|
|
|
|
All the branches of a water [course] at every stage of its course,
|
|
|
if they are of equal rapidity, are equal to the body of the main
|
|
|
stream.
|
|
|
|
|
|
395.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every year when the boughs of a plant [or tree] have made an end of
|
|
|
maturing their growth, they will have made, when put together, a
|
|
|
thickness equal to that of the main stem; and at every stage of its
|
|
|
ramification you will find the thickness of the said main stem; as:
|
|
|
_i k_, _g h_, _e f_, _c d_, _a b_, will always be equal to each
|
|
|
other; unless the tree is pollard--if so the rule does not hold
|
|
|
good.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All the branches have a direction which tends to the centre of the
|
|
|
tree _m_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The two sketches of leafless trees one above another on
|
|
|
the left hand side of Pl. XXVII, No. 1, belong to this passage.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
396.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the plant n grows to the thickness shown at m, its branches will
|
|
|
correspond [in thickness] to the junction a b in consequence of the
|
|
|
growth inside as well as outside.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The branches of trees or plants have a twist wherever a minor branch
|
|
|
is given off; and this giving off the branch forms a fork; this said
|
|
|
fork occurs between two angles of which the largest will be that
|
|
|
which is on the side of the larger branch, and in proportion, unless
|
|
|
accident has spoilt it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The sketches illustrating this are on the right hand side
|
|
|
of PI. XXVII, No. I, and the text is also given there in facsimile.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
397.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is no boss on branches which has not been produced by some
|
|
|
branch which has failed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The lower shoots on the branches of trees grow more than the upper
|
|
|
ones and this occurs only because the sap that nourishes them, being
|
|
|
heavy, tends downwards more than upwards; and again, because those
|
|
|
[branches] which grow downwards turn away from the shade which
|
|
|
exists towards the centre of the plant. The older the branches are,
|
|
|
the greater is the difference between their upper and their lower
|
|
|
shoots and in those dating from the same year or epoch.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The sketch accompanying this in the MS. is so effaced
|
|
|
that an exact reproduction was impossible.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
398.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE SCARS ON TREES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The scars on trees grow to a greater thickness than is required by
|
|
|
the sap of the limb which nourishes them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
399.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The plant which gives out the smallest ramifications will preserve
|
|
|
the straightest line in the course of its growth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: This passage is illustrated by two partly effaced
|
|
|
sketches. One of these closely resembles the lower one given under
|
|
|
No. 408, the other also represents short closely set boughs on an
|
|
|
upright trunk.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
400.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE RAMIFICATION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The beginning of the ramification [the shoot] always has the central
|
|
|
line [axis] of its thickness directed to the central line [axis] of
|
|
|
the plant itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
401.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In starting from the main stem the branches always form a base with
|
|
|
a prominence as is shown at _a b c d_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
402.
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHY, VERY FREQUENTLY, TIMBER HAS VEINS THAT ARE NOT STRAIGHT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the branches which grow the second year above the branch of the
|
|
|
preceding year, are not of equal thickness above the antecedent
|
|
|
branches, but are on one side, then the vigour of the lower branch
|
|
|
is diverted to nourish the one above it, although it may be somewhat
|
|
|
on one side.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But if the ramifications are equal in their growth, the veins of the
|
|
|
main stem will be straight [parallel] and equidistant at every
|
|
|
degree of the height of the plant.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wherefore, O Painter! you, who do not know these laws! in order to
|
|
|
escape the blame of those who understand them, it will be well that
|
|
|
you should represent every thing from nature, and not despise such
|
|
|
study as those do who work [only] for money.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The direction of growth (403-407).
|
|
|
|
|
|
403.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE RAMIFICATIONS OF PLANTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The plants which spread very much have the angles of the spaces
|
|
|
which divide their branches more obtuse in proportion as their point
|
|
|
of origin is lower down; that is nearer to the thickest and oldest
|
|
|
portion of the tree. Therefore in the youngest portions of the tree
|
|
|
the angles of ramification are more acute. [Footnote: Compare the
|
|
|
sketches on the lower portion of Pl. XXVII, No. 2.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
404.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tips of the boughs of plants [and trees], unless they are borne
|
|
|
down by the weight of their fruits, turn towards the sky as much as
|
|
|
possible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The upper side of their leaves is turned towards the sky that it may
|
|
|
receive the nourishment of the dew which falls at night.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The sun gives spirit and life to plants and the earth nourishes them
|
|
|
with moisture. [9] With regard to this I made the experiment of
|
|
|
leaving only one small root on a gourd and this I kept nourished
|
|
|
with water, and the gourd brought to perfection all the fruits it
|
|
|
could produce, which were about 60 gourds of the long kind, andi set
|
|
|
my mind diligently [to consider] this vitality and perceived that
|
|
|
the dews of night were what supplied it abundantly with moisture
|
|
|
through the insertion of its large leaves and gave nourishment to
|
|
|
the plant and its offspring--or the seeds which its offspring had
|
|
|
to produce--[21].
|
|
|
|
|
|
The rule of the leaves produced on the last shoot of the year will
|
|
|
be that they will grow in a contrary direction on the twin branches;
|
|
|
that is, that the insertion of the leaves turns round each branch in
|
|
|
such a way, as that the sixth leaf above is produced over the sixth
|
|
|
leaf below, and the way they turn is that if one turns towards its
|
|
|
companion to the right, the other turns to the left, the leaf
|
|
|
serving as the nourishing breast for the shoot or fruit which grows
|
|
|
the following year.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: A French translation of lines 9-12 was given by M.
|
|
|
RAVAISSON in the _Gazette des Beaux Arts_, Oct. 1877; his paper also
|
|
|
contains some valuable information as to botanical science in the
|
|
|
ancient classical writers and at the time of the Renaissance.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
405.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The lowest branches of those trees which have large leaves and heavy
|
|
|
fruits, such as nut-trees, fig-trees and the like, always droop
|
|
|
towards the ground.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The branches always originate above [in the axis of] the leaves.
|
|
|
|
|
|
406.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The upper shoots of the lateral branches of plants lie closer to the
|
|
|
parent branch than the lower ones.
|
|
|
|
|
|
407.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The lowest branches, after they have formed the angle of their
|
|
|
separation from the parent stem, always bend downwards so as not to
|
|
|
crowd against the other branches which follow them on the same stem
|
|
|
and to be better able to take the air which nourishes them. As is
|
|
|
shown by the angle _b a c_; the branch _a c_ after it has made the
|
|
|
corner of the angle _a c_ bends downwards to _c d_ and the lesser
|
|
|
shoot _c_ dries up, being too thin.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The main branch always goes below, as is shown by the branch _f n
|
|
|
m_, which does not go to _f n o_.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The forms of trees (408--411).
|
|
|
|
|
|
408.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The elm always gives a greater length to the last branches of the
|
|
|
year's growth than to the lower ones; and Nature does this because
|
|
|
the highest branches are those which have to add to the size of the
|
|
|
tree; and those at the bottom must get dry because they grow in the
|
|
|
shade and their growth would be an impediment to the entrance of the
|
|
|
solar rays and the air among the main branches of the tree.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The main branches of the lower part bend down more than those above,
|
|
|
so as to be more oblique than those upper ones, and also because
|
|
|
they are larger and older.
|
|
|
|
|
|
409.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In general almost all the upright portions of trees curve somewhat
|
|
|
turning the convexity towards the South; and their branches are
|
|
|
longer and thicker and more abundant towards the South than towards
|
|
|
the North. And this occurs because the sun draws the sap towards
|
|
|
that surface of the tree which is nearest to it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And this may be observed if the sun is not screened off by other
|
|
|
plants.
|
|
|
|
|
|
410.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The cherry-tree is of the character of the fir tree as regards its
|
|
|
ramification placed in stages round its main stem; and its branches
|
|
|
spring, 4 or five or 6 [together] opposite each other; and the tips
|
|
|
of the topmost shoots form a pyramid from the middle upwards; and
|
|
|
the walnut and oak form a hemisphere from the middle upwards.
|
|
|
|
|
|
411.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The bough of the walnut which is only hit and beaten when it has
|
|
|
brought to perfection...
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: The end of the text and the sketch in red chalk belonging
|
|
|
to it, are entirely effaced.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The insertion of the leaves (412--419).
|
|
|
|
|
|
412.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE INSERTION OF THE BRANCHES ON PLANTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Such as the growth of the ramification of plants is on their
|
|
|
principal branches, so is that of the leaves on the shoots of the
|
|
|
same plant. These leaves have [Footnote 6: _Quattro modi_ (four
|
|
|
modes). Only three are described in the text, the fourth is only
|
|
|
suggested by a sketch.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This passage occurs in MANZI'S edition of the Trattato, p. 399, but
|
|
|
without the sketches and the text is mutilated in an important part.
|
|
|
The whole passage has been commented on, from MANZI'S version, in
|
|
|
Part I of the _Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano_, by Prof. G.
|
|
|
UZIELLI (Florence 1869, Vol. I). He remarks as to the 'four modes':
|
|
|
"_Leonardo, come si vede nelle linie sententi da solo tre esempli.
|
|
|
Questa ed altre inessattezze fanno desiderare, sia esaminato di
|
|
|
nuovo il manoscritto Vaticano_". This has since been done by D.
|
|
|
KNAPP of Tubingen, and his accurate copy has been published by H.
|
|
|
LUDWIG, the painter. The passage in question occurs in his edition
|
|
|
as No. 833; and there also the drawings are wanting. The space for
|
|
|
them has been left vacant, but in the Vatican copy '_niente_' has
|
|
|
been written on the margin; and in it, as well as in LUDWIG'S and
|
|
|
MANZI'S edition, the text is mutilated.] four modes of growing one
|
|
|
above another. The first, which is the most general, is that the
|
|
|
sixth always originates over the sixth below [Footnote 8: _la sesta
|
|
|
di sotto. "Disposizione 2/5 o 1/5. Leonardo osservo probabilmente
|
|
|
soltanto la prima"_ (UZIELLl).]; the second is that two third ones
|
|
|
above are over the two third ones below [Footnote 10: _terze di
|
|
|
sotto: "Intende qui senza dubbio parlare di foglie decussate, in cui
|
|
|
il terzo verticello e nel piano del primo"_ (UZIELLI).]; and the
|
|
|
third way is that the third above is over the third below [Footnote
|
|
|
11: 3a _di sotto: "Disposizione 1/2"_ (UZIELLI).].
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See the four sketches on the upper portion of the page
|
|
|
reproduced as fig. 2 on P1. XXVII.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
413.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A DESCRIPTION OF THE ELM.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ramification of the elm has the largest branch at the top. The
|
|
|
first and the last but one are smaller, when the main trunk is
|
|
|
straight.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The space between the insertion of one leaf to the rest is half the
|
|
|
extreme length of the leaf or somewhat less, for the leaves are at
|
|
|
an interval which is about the 3rd of the width of the leaf.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The elm has more leaves near the top of the boughs than at the base;
|
|
|
and the broad [surface] of the leaves varies little as to [angle
|
|
|
and] aspect.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVII, No. 3. Above the sketch and close under
|
|
|
the number of the page is the word '_olmo_' (elm).]
|
|
|
|
|
|
414.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the walnut tree the leaves which are distributed on the shoots of
|
|
|
this year are further apart from each other and more numerous in
|
|
|
proportion as the branch from which this shoot springs is a young
|
|
|
one. And they are inserted more closely and less in number when the
|
|
|
shoot that bears them springs from an old branch. Its fruits are
|
|
|
borne at the ends of the shoots. And its largest boughs are the
|
|
|
lowest on the boughs they spring from. And this arises from the
|
|
|
weight of its sap which is more apt to descend than to rise, and
|
|
|
consequently the branches which spring from them and rise towards
|
|
|
the sky are small and slender [20]; and when the shoot turns towards
|
|
|
the sky its leaves spread out from it [at an angle] with an equal
|
|
|
distribution of their tips; and if the shoot turns to the horizon
|
|
|
the leaves lie flat; and this arises from the fact that leaves
|
|
|
without exception, turn their underside to the earth [29].
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shoots are smaller in proportion as they spring nearer to the
|
|
|
base of the bough they spring from.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See the two sketches on Pl XXVII, No. 4. The second
|
|
|
refers to the passage lines 20-30.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
415.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE INSERTION OF THE LEAVES ON THE BRANCHES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The thickness of a branch never diminishes within the space between
|
|
|
one leaf and the next excepting by so much as the thickness of the
|
|
|
bud which is above the leaf and this thickness is taken off from the
|
|
|
branch above [the node] as far as the next leaf.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Nature has so placed the leaves of the latest shoots of many plants
|
|
|
that the sixth leaf is always above the first, and so on in
|
|
|
succession, if the rule is not [accidentally] interfered with; and
|
|
|
this occurs for two useful ends in the plant: First that as the
|
|
|
shoot and the fruit of the following year spring from the bud or eye
|
|
|
which lies above and in close contact with the insertion of the leaf
|
|
|
[in the axil], the water which falls upon the shoot can run down to
|
|
|
nourish the bud, by the drop being caught in the hollow [axil] at
|
|
|
the insertion of the leaf. And the second advantage is, that as
|
|
|
these shoots develop in the following year one will not cover the
|
|
|
next below, since the 5 come forth on five different sides; and the
|
|
|
sixth which is above the first is at some distance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
416.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE RAMIFICATIONS OF TREES AND THEIR FOLIAGE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ramifications of any tree, such as the elm, are wide and slender
|
|
|
after the manner of a hand with spread fingers, foreshortened. And
|
|
|
these are seen in the distribution [thus]: the lower portions are
|
|
|
seen from above; and those that are above are seen from below; and
|
|
|
those in the middle, some from below and some from above. The upper
|
|
|
part is the extreme [top] of this ramification and the middle
|
|
|
portion is more foreshortened than any other of those which are
|
|
|
turned with their tips towards you. And of those parts of the middle
|
|
|
of the height of the tree, the longest will be towards the top of
|
|
|
the tree and will produce a ramification like the foliage of the
|
|
|
common willow, which grows on the banks of rivers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other ramifications are spherical, as those of such trees as put
|
|
|
forth their shoots and leaves in the order of the sixth being placed
|
|
|
above the first. Others are thin and light like the willow and
|
|
|
others.
|
|
|
|
|
|
417.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will see in the lower branches of the elder, which puts forth
|
|
|
leaves two and two placed crosswise [at right angles] one above
|
|
|
another, that if the stem rises straight up towards the sky this
|
|
|
order never fails; and its largest leaves are on the thickest part
|
|
|
of the stem and the smallest on the slenderest part, that is towards
|
|
|
the top. But, to return to the lower branches, I say that the leaves
|
|
|
on these are placed on them crosswise like [those on] the upper
|
|
|
branches; and as, by the law of all leaves, they are compelled to
|
|
|
turn their upper surface towards the sky to catch the dew at night,
|
|
|
it is necessary that those so placed should twist round and no
|
|
|
longer form a cross.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVII, No. 5.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
418.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A leaf always turns its upper side towards the sky so that it may
|
|
|
the better receive, on all its surface, the dew which drops gently
|
|
|
from the atmosphere. And these leaves are so distributed on the
|
|
|
plant as that one shall cover the other as little as possible, but
|
|
|
shall lie alternately one above another as may be seen in the ivy
|
|
|
which covers the walls. And this alternation serves two ends; that
|
|
|
is, to leave intervals by which the air and sun may penetrate
|
|
|
between them. The 2nd reason is that the drops which fall from the
|
|
|
first leaf may fall onto the fourth or--in other trees--onto the
|
|
|
sixth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
419.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every shoot and every fruit is produced above the insertion [in the
|
|
|
axil] of its leaf which serves it as a mother, giving it water from
|
|
|
the rain and moisture from the dew which falls at night from above,
|
|
|
and often it protects them against the too great heat of the rays of
|
|
|
the sun.
|
|
|
|
|
|
LIGHT ON BRANCHES AND LEAVES (420--422).
|
|
|
|
|
|
420.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That part of the body will be most illuminated which is hit by the
|
|
|
luminous ray coming between right angles.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 1.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
421.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Young plants have more transparent leaves and a more lustrous bark
|
|
|
than old ones; and particularly the walnut is lighter coloured in
|
|
|
May than in September.
|
|
|
|
|
|
422.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE ACCIDENTS OF COLOURING IN TREES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accidents of colour in the foliage of trees are 4. That is:
|
|
|
shadow, light, lustre [reflected light] and transparency.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE VISIBILITY OF THESE ACCIDENTS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
These accidents of colour in the foliage of trees become confused at
|
|
|
a great distance and that which has most breadth [whether light or
|
|
|
shade, &c.] will be most conspicuous.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The proportions of light and shade in a leaf (423-426).
|
|
|
|
|
|
423.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE SHADOWS OF A LEAF.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes a leaf has three accidents [of light] that is: shade,
|
|
|
lustre [reflected light] and transparency [transmitted light]. Thus,
|
|
|
if the light were at _n_ as regards the leaf _s_, and the eye at
|
|
|
_m_, it would see _a_ in full light, _b_ in shadow and _c_
|
|
|
transparent.
|
|
|
|
|
|
424.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A leaf with a concave surface seen from the under side and
|
|
|
up-side-down will sometimes show itself as half in shade, and half
|
|
|
transparent. Thus, if _o p_ is the leaf and the light _m_ and the
|
|
|
eye _n_, this will see _o_ in shadow because the light does not fall
|
|
|
upon it between equal angles, neither on the upper nor the under
|
|
|
side, and _p_ is lighted on the upper side and the light is
|
|
|
transmitted to its under side. [Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 2, the
|
|
|
upper sketch on the page. In the original they are drawn in red
|
|
|
chalk.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
425.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Although those leaves which have a polished surface are to a great
|
|
|
extent of the same colour on the right side and on the reverse, it
|
|
|
may happen that the side which is turned towards the atmosphere will
|
|
|
have something of the colour of the atmosphere; and it will seem to
|
|
|
have more of this colour of the atmosphere in proportion as the eye
|
|
|
is nearer to it and sees it more foreshortened. And, without
|
|
|
exception the shadows show as darker on the upper side than on the
|
|
|
lower, from the contrast offered by the high lights which limit the
|
|
|
shadows.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The under side of the leaf, although its colour may be in itself the
|
|
|
same as that of the upper side, shows a still finer colour--a colour
|
|
|
that is green verging on yellow--and this happens when the leaf is
|
|
|
placed between
|
|
|
|
|
|
426.
|
|
|
|
|
|
the eye and the light which falls upon it from the opposite side.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And its shadows are in the same positions as those were of the
|
|
|
opposite side. Therefore, O Painter! when you do trees close at
|
|
|
hand, remember that if the eye is almost under the tree you will see
|
|
|
its leaves [some] on the upper and [some] on the under side, and the
|
|
|
upper side will be bluer in proportion as they are seen more
|
|
|
foreshortened, and the same leaf sometimes shows part of the right
|
|
|
side and part of the under side, whence you must make it of two
|
|
|
colours.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of the transparency of leaves (427-429).
|
|
|
|
|
|
427.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadows in transparent leaves seen from the under side are the
|
|
|
same shadows as there are on the right side of this leaf, they will
|
|
|
show through to the underside together with lights, but the lustre
|
|
|
[reflected light] can never show through.
|
|
|
|
|
|
428.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When one green has another [green] behind it, the lustre on the
|
|
|
leaves and their transparent [lights] show more strongly than in
|
|
|
those which are [seen] against the brightness of the atmosphere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And if the sun illuminates the leaves without their coming between
|
|
|
it and the eye and without the eye facing the sun, then the
|
|
|
reflected lights and the transparent lights are very strong.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is very effective to show some branches which are low down and
|
|
|
dark and so set off the illuminated greens which are at some
|
|
|
distance from the dark greens seen below. That part is darkest which
|
|
|
is nearest to the eye or which is farthest from the luminous
|
|
|
atmosphere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
429.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Never paint leaves transparent to the sun, because they are
|
|
|
confused; and this is because on the transparency of one leaf will
|
|
|
be seen the shadow of another leaf which is above it. This shadow
|
|
|
has a distinct outline and a certain depth of shade and sometimes is
|
|
|
[as much as] half or a third of the leaf which is shaded; and
|
|
|
consequently such an arrangement is very confused and the imitation
|
|
|
of it should be avoided.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The light shines least through a leaf when it falls upon it at an
|
|
|
acute angle.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The gradations of shade and colour in leaves (430-434).
|
|
|
|
|
|
430.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The shadows of plants are never black, for where the atmosphere
|
|
|
penetrates there can never be utter darkness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
431.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the light comes from _m_ and the eye is at _n_ the eye will see
|
|
|
the colour of the leaves _a b_ all affected by the colour of _m_
|
|
|
--that is of the atmosphere; and _b c_ will be seen from the under
|
|
|
side as transparent, with a beautiful green colour verging on
|
|
|
yellow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If _m_ is the luminous body lighting up the leaf _s_ all the eyes
|
|
|
that see the under side of this leaf will see it of a beautiful
|
|
|
light green, being transparent.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In very many cases the positions of the leaves will be without
|
|
|
shadow [or in full light], and their under side will be transparent
|
|
|
and the right side lustrous [reflecting light].
|
|
|
|
|
|
432.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The willow and other similar trees, which have their boughs lopped
|
|
|
every 3 or 4 years, put forth very straight branches, and their
|
|
|
shadow is about the middle where these boughs spring; and towards
|
|
|
the extreme ends they cast but little shade from having small leaves
|
|
|
and few and slender branches. Hence the boughs which rise towards
|
|
|
the sky will have but little shade and little relief; and the
|
|
|
branches which are at an angle from the horizon, downwards, spring
|
|
|
from the dark part of the shadow and grow thinner by degrees up to
|
|
|
their ends, and these will be in strong relief, being in gradations
|
|
|
of light against a background of shadow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That tree will have the least shadow which has the fewest branches
|
|
|
and few leaves.
|
|
|
|
|
|
433.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF DARK LEAVES IN FRONT OF TRANSPARENT ONES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the leaves are interposed between the light and the eye, then
|
|
|
that which is nearest to the eye will be the darkest, and the most
|
|
|
distant will be the lightest, not being seen against the atmosphere;
|
|
|
and this is seen in the leaves which are away from the centre of the
|
|
|
tree, that is towards the light.
|
|
|
|
|
|
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 2, the lower sketch.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
434.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE LIGHTS ON DARK LEAVES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The lights on such leaves which are darkest, will be most near to
|
|
|
the colour of the atmosphere that is reflected in them. And the
|
|
|
cause of this is that the light on the illuminated portion mingles
|
|
|
with the dark hue to compose a blue colour; and this light is
|
|
|
produced by the blueness of the atmosphere which is reflected in the
|
|
|
smooth surface of these leaves and adds to the blue hue which this
|
|
|
light usually produces when it falls on dark objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE LIGHTS ON LEAVES OF A YELLOWISH GREEN.
|
|
|
|
|
|
But leaves of a green verging on yellow when they reflect the
|
|
|
atmosphere do not produce a reflection verging on blue, inasmuch as
|
|
|
every thing which appears in a mirror takes some colour from that
|
|
|
mirror, hence the blue of the atmosphere being reflected in the
|
|
|
yellow of the leaf appears green, because blue and yellow mixed
|
|
|
together make a very fine green colour, therefore the lustre of
|
|
|
light leaves verging on yellow will be greenish yellow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A classification of trees according to their colours.
|
|
|
|
|
|
435.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The trees in a landscape are of various kinds of green, inasmuch as
|
|
|
some verge towards blackness, as firs, pines, cypresses, laurels,
|
|
|
box and the like. Some tend to yellow such as walnuts, and pears,
|
|
|
vines and verdure. Some are both yellowish and dark as chesnuts,
|
|
|
holm-oak. Some turn red in autumn as the service-tree, pomegranate,
|
|
|
vine, and cherry; and some are whitish as the willow, olive, reeds
|
|
|
and the like. Trees are of various forms ...
|
|
|
|
|
|
The proportions of light and shade in trees (436-440).
|
|
|
|
|
|
436.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF A GENERALLY DISTRIBUTED LIGHT AS LIGHTING UP TREES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That part of the trees will be seen to lie in the least dark shadow
|
|
|
which is farthest from the earth.
|
|
|
|
|
|
To prove it let _a p_ be the tree, _n b c_ the illuminated
|
|
|
hemisphere [the sky], the under portion of the tree faces the earth
|
|
|
_p c_, that is on the side _o_, and it faces a small part of the
|
|
|
hemisphere at _c d_. But the highest part of the convexity a faces
|
|
|
the greatest part of the hemisphere, that is _b c_. For this
|
|
|
reason--and because it does not face the darkness of the earth--it
|
|
|
is in fuller light. But if the tree has dense foliage, as the
|
|
|
laurel, arbutus, box or holm oak, it will be different; because,
|
|
|
although _a_ does not face the earth, it faces the dark [green] of
|
|
|
the leaves cut up by many shadows, and this darkness is reflected
|
|
|
onto the under sides of the leaves immediately above. Thus these
|
|
|
trees have their darkest shadows nearest to the middle of the tree.
|
|
|
|
|
|
437.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OF THE SHADOWS OF VERDURE.
|
|
|
|